MASTER 
NEGA  TIVE 
NO.  92-80674 


MICROFILMED  1 992 
COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES/NEW  YORK 


as  part  of  the 
"Foundations  of  Western  Civilization  Preservation  Project" 


Funded  by  the 
NATIONAL  ENDOWMENT  FOR  THE  HUMANITIES 


Reproductions  may  not  be  made  without  permission  from 

Columbia  University  Library 


COPYRIGHT  STATEMENT 

The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  ~  Title  17,  United 
States  Code  ~  concerns  the  making  of  photocopies  or  other 
reproductions  of  copyrighted  material... 

Columbia  University  Library  reserves  the  right  to  refuse  to 
accept  a  copy  order  if,  in  its  judgement,  fulfillment  of  the  order 
would  involve  violation  of  the  copyright  law. 


.• 


A  UTHOR : 


OSWALD,  MICHAEL 

MATTHIAS 


TITLE: 


USE  OF  PREPOSITIONS 
IN  APOLLONIUS  ... 

PLACE: 

NOTRE  DAME 

DA  TE : 

1904 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION  DEPARTMENT 


Master  Negative  # 

32^- BO 6-1 U- .k 


mmimmm0»i* 


Restrictions  on  Use: 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC  MICROFORM  TARGET 


Original  Material  as  Filmed  -  Existing  Bibliographic  Record 


w ill  mi 


■W^^P-^W  HI  nil  fi 


>■« ■•HJ 


88Ap7 
DO 


Oswald,  Michael  Matthias  P. 

Tlio  use  of  the  prepositions  in  Apollonius  Rhodius, 
eoniparod  with  Ihoir  use  in  Ilonior  ...  Notre  Dame,  Ind.. 
Notre  Dame  university  press,  1904. 


cm 


208  p.    m 

Thesis  (pir.  D.)— Catholic  university  of  America, 
iiibliogniphy:  p.  i5i-8. 


:?-ie773 


Library  of  Congress 


u 


6—16762 


FILM     SIZE:____^>jim 


TECHNICAL  MICROFORM  DATA 

REDUCTION     RATIO: ^2f_ 


IMAGE  PLACEMENT:    lA  (^  IB     IIB 

DATE     FILMED: 3j:M7fJr. INITIALS U"^, 

HLMEDBY:    RESEARCH  PUBLICATIONS.  INC  WOODBRIDGE.  CT 


c 


Association  for  information  and  Image  Management 

1100  Wayne  Avenue.  Suite  1100 
Silver  Spring,  Maryland  20910 

301/587-8202 


Centimeter 


UN 


12        3        4         5 

iiiiiiiiiiimniiiniiiiiiiilimliiiiliiiilnii 


n 


7        8        9       10 

liiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiili 


6 

iiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 


m 


fi 


11 
I 


12       13 
1 


14       15    mm 

iiliiiiliiiil 


rrr 


Inches 


1 


T 


T 


TTT 


1.0 

U^      2.8 

IJL 

It     ^ 

1.4 

2.5 
22 

I.I 

2.0 
1.8 

1.6 

1.25 

TTT 


MRNUFRCTURED   TO  fillM   STRNDflRDS     . 
BY  APPLIED   IMRGE,    INC. 


THE     PREPOSITIONS 
IN   APOLLONIUS  RHODIUS 


COMPARED  WITH  THEIR  USE 

IN  HOIWER 


BY 


MICHAEL   M.  F.  OSWALD,  C.  S.  C, 


NOTRE    DAME  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

NOTRE  DAME,  INDIANA 
1904 


'  •: 


Columbta  Winibtifiitp 

intfteCitpof^toHorb 


LIBRARY 


THE  USE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 
IN  APOLLONIUS  RHODIUS 

COMPARED  WITH  THEIR  USE 
IN   HOMER 


DISSERTATION 


SUBMITTED  TO  THE  FACULTY  OF  PHILOSOPHY 
OF  THE  CATHOLIC  UNIVERSITY  OF  AMERICA 
FOR  THE  DEGREE  OF  DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY 


BY 


MICHAEL  M.  F.  OSWALD,  C.  S.  C 


\''. 
\:'' 


■X,, 


NOTRE  DAME    UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

NOTRE   DAME.  INDIANA 
1904 


^\ 


III 


r 


4 


mtf 


TO 


DR.  GEORGE  M.  BOI.UNG, 


>'■  'tiiiiigiiiiiiii 


ipi 


"I 


*■ (, 


T 


0 


t 


MY  ESTKliMKD   PROFESSOR 


OF 


GREEK,    SANSKRIT    AND    COMPARATIVE    PHII^OLOGY 


THIS  WOIUv 


IS  CORDIALLY  AND  RESPECTFULLY 


DEDICATED. 


f 


s 


^ 


\ 


*',> 


A 


t\ 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


A.      GENERAI,  W  ORKS  OF  REFERENCE. 

Paui,,  H.,  Principien  der  Sprachgeschichte,  3te  Aufl.;  Halle, 

1899. 
ScHOBMANN,  G.  F.,  Die  Lehre  von  den  Redeteilen;  Berlin, 

1862. 

Strong,  Logeman  and  Wheeler,  The  History  of  lyanguage; 

New  York,  1891, 
VOGRINZ,  G.,  Sprachgeschichtliche  Beraerk.  z.  Lehre  v.  d. 

Prapositionen;  Berl.  Phil.  Wochenschr.,  1885,  Sp.  225-230. 

B.      GRAMMATICAL  WORKS. 

Brugmann,  K.,   Griech.   Grammatik,   3te  Aufl.;   Miinchen, 
1900. 

CuRTius,  G.,  Erlauterungen  zur  Griech.   Grammatik;  Prag. 

1875. 
Dei,brueck,  B.,  Vergleich.  Syntax  der  Indogerm.  Sprachen; 

Strassburg,  1893. 

Delbrueck,  B.,  Syntaktische  Forschungen,  Vol.  V.,  Halle, 
1888. 

Fairbanks,   A.,   The  Dative  in  Sophocles;  Trans,   of  Am. 

Phil.  As.,  XVII.,  (1886),  pp.  78-126. 
Gii.DERSi,EEVE,  B.  L.,  Problems  in  Greek  Syntax;  A.J.  P., 

XXIII.,  1902. 

G00DEI.1.,  T.  D.,  The  Genitive  in  Sophocles;  Trans,  of  Am. 

Phil.  As.,  XV.,  (1884),  pp.  4-35. 
JoosT,    A.,    Sprachgebrauch    Xenophons    in    der    Anabasis; 

Berlin,  1892. 

Krueger-Poekel,  Griechische  Sprachlehre;  Leipzig.  1875- 
1894. 

Kuehner-Gerth,    Ausf.   Grammatik  der  Griech.  Sprache; 
Leipzig,  1898. 


—  6  — 


—  7  — 


Main,  J.  H.,  Locative  Expressions  in  the  Attic  Orators;  Johns 

Hopkins  Dissert.,  1892. 
Monro,  D.  B.,   Homeric  Grammar,  (  2nd.  ed.);  Oxford,  1891. 
Rutherford,  W.  G.,  The  New  Phrynichus;  London,  1881. 
RzACH,  A.,  Grammatische  Studien  zu  ApoUonius  Rhodius; 

Wien,  1878. 
VoGRiNZ,  G.,  Grammatik  des  Homerischen  Dialektes;  Pader- 

born,  1889. 

C.      WORKS  ON  PREPOSITIONS. 

Ai^viN,  A.  R  ,  De  Usu  Praepositionis  vapd  apud  Thucydidem; 

Upsaliae,  1873. 
DEBBhRT,  P.,  De  Praepositionum  irepl  et  dfi(pl  usu  Thucydideo, 

Regimonti  Pr. ,  1880. 
Eggers,   J.  H.    C,    Abhandlung    iiber  den  urspriinglichen 

Gebrauch  der  griechischen  Praposiiionen;  Altona,  1846. 
Form  AN,  L.,  The  Difference  between  the  Genitive  and  Dative 

with  erf  to  denote  Superposition;  Johns  Hopkins  Dissert., 

1894. 
Geyer,    M.,   Observationes  Epigraphicae  de  Praep.  Graec. 

Forma  et  Usu;  Altenburgi,  1880. 
GOWSH,    E.    J.,     De    Praep.    Usu    Thucydideo,     (P.l.-VI.); 

Schweidnitz,  1859-1877. 
Haggett,  a.  S.,  a  Summary  of  the  Prepositions  in  Homer, 

in  "Studies  in  Honor  of  Basil  L.  Gildersleeve";  Balti- 
more, 1902. 

Kahi,e,  a.,  De  iiri  Praepositionis  Usu  Euripideo,  (P.  I.);  Mar- 
burgi  Cattorum,  1888. 

Krapp,  F.,  Der  Substantivierte  Infinitiv,  abhangig  von 
Prapositionen  und  Propositions  -  Ad verbien  in  der  his- 
torischen  Gracitat.  (Herodotus  bis  Zosimus);  Heidel- 
berg, 1892. 

Krebs,  F.,  Die  Prapositionen  bei  Polybius;  Wiirzburg,  1881. 

Krieger,  E.,  Die  Prapositionen  iirL  und  t/mJj  in  Xenophons 
Anabasis;  Gumbinnen,  1895. 

KoEMMEL,  C,  De  Praepositionis  iiri  cum  Casibus  Conjunctae 
Usu  Thucydideo;  Bonnae,  1875. 


/ 


i; 


'f 


Laun,  E.,  De  Praepositionum  Usu  apud  Aeschylum;  Upsaliae, 

1885. 
LUNDBERG,   C.  A.,   De  Ratione  Herodotea  Praepositionibus 

Utendi  a  Scriptoribus  Atticis  Diversa.  Upsaliae,  1869. 
LuTz,    L.,    Die  Prapositionen  bei   den  Attischen  Rednern; 

Neustadt  a.  d.  H.,  1887. 
LuTz,  L.,  Die  Casus  -  Adverbien  bei  den  Attischen  Rednern; 

Wiirzburg,  1891. 
MeThner,  J.,  De  Praepositionum  Graecarum  Natura  atque 

Usu;  Lesnae. 
MOMMSEN,  T.,  Beitr.  z.  d.  Lehre  v.  d.   Griech.   Prap.;  Berlin, 

1895. 
Pierson,  W.,  Ueber  die  Tmesis  der  Prapositionen   vom  Ver- 

bum  bei  den   Griech.  Dichtern,  insbes.  bei  den  Dramati- 

kern  und  Lyrikem;  Rhein.  Mus.,  1857. 
Przybii,i,a,  K.,  De  Praepositionum  Kard  et  dvd  Usu  Lucianeo; 

Konigsberg,  1883. 
Rau,  F.  H.,  De  Praepositionis  Tapd  Usu;  Lipsiae,  1870. 
Rosberg,  M.,  De  Praepositionibus  apud  Homerum,  quae  cum 

solo  genitivi  Casu  conjunguntur;  Upsaliae,  1870. 
Schumacher,  J. ,  De  Praepositionum  cum  tribus  casibus  Con- 

junctarum  Usu  Euripideo,  (P.  I.);  Bonnae,  1884. 
Soboi^ewski,    S.,    De    Praepositionum    Usu    Aristophaneo; 

Mosquae,  1890. 
Tyi,er,   W.    S.,   On  the  Prepositions  in  the  Homeric  Poems; 

Trans,  of  Am.  Phil.  As.,  1874. 
Wentzel,   E.,   De  Praepositionum  Tmesi  apud  Herodotum; 

Vratislaviae,  1829. 
Westphal,  F.,  Die  Prapositionen  bei  Xenophon;  Freienwalde 

a.  Oder,  1888. 
Wrede,    F.,    De    Origine    Praepositionis  eis  et  varia  apud 

Graecos  Scriptura;  Monasterii,  1868. 

D.      SPECIAL  WORKS  ON  APOLLONIUS. 

Beneke,   F.,    Beitrage  zur  Metrik  der  Alexandriner;  Berlin, 

1884. 
Choi,evius,  Ueber  den  griech.   Epiker  ApoUonius  Rhodius; 

Konigsberg,  1882. 


8  — 


H 


Gerhard,  E.,  Lectiones  Apolloniauae;  Lipsiae,  1816. 

CouAT,  A.,  La  Po^sie  Alexandrine;  Paris,  1882. 

Gbrcke,  a.,  Alexandrinische  Studien;  Rhein.   Mus.,    1887, 

1889. 
Goodwin,   C.  J.,  Apollonius  Rhodius,  His  Figures,  Syntax 

and  Vocabulary"  Baltimore,  1891. 
KoFi^ER,  J.,  Gleichnisse    bei    Apollonius  Rhodius;  Brixen, 

1890. 
La  Roche,  J.,   Der  Hexameter  bei  Apollonius,  Aratos  und 

Callimachos;  Wiener  Studien,  XXI.,  (1900),  pp.  161-197. 
LiNSENBARTH,   O.,    De  Apollouii  Rhodii   Casuum  Syntaxi; 

Lipsiae,  1887. 

RzACH,  A.,   Grammatische  Studien  zu  Apollonius  Rhodius; 
Wien,  1878. 

Seaton,  R.  C,  Imitation  of  Homer  by   Apollonius;  Journal 
of  Philol.  XIX.,  1890. 

WeicherT,  a.,  Ueber  das  Leben  u.  Gedicht  des  Apollonius 
von  Rhodus;  Meissen,  1821. 

ft 

E.      TEXTS. 

Apollonius  is  cited  according  to  the  small  edition  of  Merkel, 
except  that  in  the  matter  of  accentuation  the  traditional  rules 
are  followed.    The  "Editio  Major"  of  Merkel  (  Lipsiae,  1854) 
was  unfortunately  inaccessible.     The  Teubner-Text  has  been 
used  for  the  citations  from   Homer  and  other  authors.     Edi- 
tions of  Apollonius  and  Homer  frequently  consulted  are  : 
Brunck,  R.,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Lipsiae,  1810. 
LEHRS,  F.  S.,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Parisiis,  1862. 
Seaton,  R.  C,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Oxonii,  1900. 

Weli^auer,      a.,     Apollonii    Rhodii    Argonautica,     (Cum 
Scholiis);  Lipsiae,  1828. 

Ameis  -Hentze,  Homers  Odyssee;  Leipzig,  1895. 

La  Roche,  J.,  Homers  Ilias;  Leipzig,  1883. 

P.      INDICES  AND  LEXICA. 

Ebblinc,  H.,  Lexicon  Homericum;  Lipsiae,  1885. 

Gehring,  a..  Index  Homericus;  Lipsiae,  1891. 

Nauck,  a.,  Tragicae  Dictionis  Index;  Petropoli,  1892. 

Seber,  W.,  Index  Vocabulorum  in  Homeri  lliade  et  Odyssea- 
Oxonii,  1780.  ' 


^ 


\ 


%,  J    1 


PREFACE. 


A 


The  study  of  Apollonius  Rhodius  offers  many 
points  of  special  interest  to  the  classic  student,  on 
account  of  the  almost  endless  variety  of  epic  usages 
reflected  from  the  Homeric  poems.  How  far  Apol- 
lonius succeeded  in  imitating  Homer  has  been  shown 
{i)  for  the  forms  by  Rzach;  {2)  for  the  vocabulary  by 
Merkel,  (Prolegomena),  by  Schmidt,  (De  Apollonii 
Rhodii  Elocutione,  Muenster,  1853),  and  by  Seaton, 
(Journal  of  Philology,  XIX.,  1890);  {2>^  for  the 
syntax  of  the  cases  by  Cholevius  and  Linsenbarth; 
(4)  for  the  figures,  syntax  arid  vocabulary  hy  Goodwin;  J 
(  5  )  fo^  Ihe  participle  by  Boiling,  ^ 

The  aim  of  the  present  work  is  to  compare  Apol- 
lonius with  Homer  in  prepositional  usages.  The 
prepositions  make  a  good,  though  rugged,  field  for 
comparison,  because  the  standard  taken  by  Apollonius 
had  to  be  not  only  negative,  by  avoiding  post- Homeric 
uses,  but  also  positive,  by  adopting  forms  and  uses 
which  had  never  crossed  the  boundaries  of  epic  poetry 
and  were,  for  that  reason,  artificial.  For  many 
valuable  suggestions  in  the  work  I  wish  to  acknowl- 
edge my  indebtedness  to  Dr.  Boiling.  To  Dr. 
Miller  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  University  I  am  grate- 
ful for  the  final  examination  of  the  manuscript. 


9 


/ 


A 


-M 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  classification  of  the  parts  of  speech,  generally 
accepted  by  grammarians,  is  convenient  but  not 
accurate.  When  examined  in  the  light  of  compara- 
tive linguistic  science,  the  division  is  found  to  be  ir* 
a  large  measure  arbitrary.  The  cardinal  difficulty 
lies  in  the  fact  that  words  are  grouped  together  and 
differentiated  either  according  io  form,  or  according 
io  function',  but  the  differences  of  form  and  function 
do  not  always  go  parallel.  Hence  a  division  accord- 
ing to  one  does  not  fit  the  other.  In  the  development 
of  a  language  the  original  meaning  of  a  word  often 
fades  and  the  word  may  even  pass  from  one  part  of 
speech  to  another.  This  process  of  change  is  well 
recognized  as  one  of  the  most  interesting  phenomena 
in  the  history  of  language.  Cf.  Paul,  Principien  der 
Sprachgeschichte,  p.  312;  also  B.  I^.  Gildersleeve, 
A.  J.  P.,  XXIII. ,  p.  14. 

As  regards  the  form  of  the  prepositions,  some  un- 
doubtedly originated  in  noun-cases;  e.  g.  a(j.<pi,  «vrf', 
and  Tzepi  are  locatives,  drrip  is  probably  also  a  locative 
without  the  suffix.  The  form  with  suffix  is  seen  in 
Sanskrit  updri,  Greek  o-eip^  if  =  ^b-nipt.  Other  pre- 
positions show  adverbial  suffixes.  Here  belong  most 
of  the  pseudo-prepositions.  Others,  as  5«a,  ;ra/)d,  (tov^ 
cannot  be  classified.  Cf.  Curtius,  Erlauterungen, 
ch.  17;  Brugmann,  Griechische  Grammatik,  p.  430; 
Vogrinz,  Gram,  des  hom.  Dialektes,  p.  88. 

Also  in  regard  to  function^    the  prepositions  are 

XI 


-M 


—  12  — 

perhaps  the  most  unsettled  part  of  speech,  shifting 
from  one  function  to  another  and  finally  laying  claim 
to  several  functions  at  the  same  time.  Thus  the  im- 
proper prepositions  are  used  as  simple  independent 
adverbs  and  in  case-construction;  while  the  preposi- 
tions proper  share  three  distinct  functions,  i.  e.  they 
may  be  used  :  (a)  as  simple  adverbs,  (b)  in  composi- 
tion or  tmesis  with  verbs,  or  (c)  in  ca^^e-regimen. 
The  name  "  pre-position  "  {7:po-*^sfTi^,  prae-positio) 
has  come  chiefly  from  the  second  usage,  and  partly 
also  from  the  last,  because  the  normal  position  in 
post-Homeric  Greek  was  preposition  +  case.  The 
Alexandrian  grammarians  looked  upon  the  post- 
position in  Homer  (  case  +  preposition  )  as  a  devia- 
tion from  the  ordinary  usage;  though  there  are 
strong  reasons  for  believing  that  in  Indo-European 
the  prepositions  in  the  construction  with  cases  were 
post-positive  Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn.  Vol.  i.,  Sec, 
275;  Vol.  III.,  Sec.  44. 

Tyler.  The  Prepositions  in  the  Homeric  Poems, 
Am.  Phil.  Ass.,  Vol.  V.,  p.  7,  says  that  "  of  all  the  parts 
of  speech  the  preposition  has  been  the  most  unfortu- 
nate in  its  nomenclature,  being  the  only  part  of 
speech  whose  name  expresses  nothing  of  its  nature  or 
office,  but  merely  its  position  with  reference  to  the 
verb  of  which  it  is  the  prefix,  or  the  noun  which  it 
precedes;  and  that  position,  usual  indeed,  but  by  no 
means  universal,  still  less  essential  or  founded  in  the 
nature  of  things.  If  it  must  be  named  from  an  acci- 
dental circumstance  instead  of  an  essential  character- 
istic,   its  position   is  so  generally  a  /r^-position  as 


/ 


A 


I 


i^  i 


—  13  — 

perhaps  to  justify  the  name  on  the  principle  of 
logicians  :  '  a  potiori  nomenfit. '  * ' 

For  a  correct  understanding  of  the  so-called  prepo- 
sitions, nothing  is  more  important  than  the  generally 
admitted  fact  that  they  belong  ultimately  to  the  same 
category  of  words  as  the  adverbs.  Cf  Krtiger- 
Pokel,  P.  II.,  68  1-2;  Kiihner-GerthjSec.  443;  Brug- 
mann.  Or.  Gr.^  p.  430;  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  Hom.  Dial, 
p.  206;  Monro,  Hom.  Gram.,  Sec.  175;  Schoemann, 
Die  Lehre  von  den  Redeteilen,  p.  138.  Strong,  The 
History  of  I^anguage,  p.  361;  says:  '*  Prepositions 
were  once  adverbs,  serving  to  denote  more  closely  the 
direction  of  the  verbal  action;  as  to  go  in^  to  carry  off^ 
to  throw  up,  to  fall  down.  They  then  became  dis- 
placed, i.  e.  detached  from  the  verb,  and  came  to 
belong  to  the  noun,  furthering  the  disappearance  of 
its  case-endings  and  assuming  their  office.** 

In  much  the  same  way  is  the  course  of  the  develop- 
ment of  the  different  functions  of  the  prepositions 
mapped  out  by  Delbriick,  Synt.  Forsch.,  Vol.  V.,p.  126; 
Vergl.  Synt.,  Vol.  I.,  p.  664;  Vogrinz,  Berl.  Phil. 
Wochenschr.,  1885,  Sp.  225-230.  Compare  also 
Monro,  Hom.  Gram.,  Sec.  178;  Kiihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  428,  4-5. 

The  strongest  proof  that  the  prepositions  were 
originally  adverbs,  is  to  be  found  in  the  Homeric 
language,  where  we  have  the  actual  transition-period 
from  adverbs  to  prepositions  and  where  consequently 
we  find  cases  of  these  words  in  which  it  is  hard  to 
decide  whether  their  adverbial  or  prepositional  nature 
predominates. 

Accordingly,  after  disposing  of  the  improper  pre- 


k 


—  14  — 

positions  (Chap.  I.),  we  proceed  to  take  up  the 
prepositions:  (a)  as  simple  adverbs  (Chap.  II.)  and 
(b)  in  tmesis  with  the  verb  (Chap.  III.).  Then,  dis- 
cussing briefly  the  reasons  why  prepositions  are  rarer 
in  poetry  than  in  prose  and  pointing  out :  (a)  the 
examples  in  Apollonius  of  the  simple  cases  and  (b) 
the  examples  with  the  suffixes  in-'5£v  and-<J^  to  denote 
the  local  relations  whence,  where  and  whither,  which 
in  prose  would  usually  be  expressed  by  a  preposition 
with  its  case  (Chap.  IV.),  —we  pass  on  to  the  pre- 
positions in  case  construction  (Chap.  V.),  and  con- 
clude with  the  prepositions  in  adverbial  phrases 
(Chap.  VI.). 

It  will  be  noticed  at  a  glance  that  chapters  I.,  II., 
III.,  and  IV.,  belong  almost  exclusively  to  the 
domain  of  poetry  (chiefly  epic),  while  in  chapters 
V.  and  VI.  the  poetic  element  appears  at  once  in 
the  large  bulk  of  the  examples  of  prepositions  to  de- 
note local  relations  and  also  in  such  metaphoric 
usages  as  are  distinctively  poetic. 

Some  uses,  which  are  found  in  Homer,  do  not 
occur  in  the  Argonautica.  The  reason  for  this  is  not 
always  easy  to  find.  The  Homeric  examples  are 
generally  few  in  number,  and  at  first  sight  it  would 
seem  to  be  the  easiest  explanation  to  assume  that  the 
absence  of  these  constructions  in  Apollonius  is  purely 
accidental,  the  bulk  of  his  work  being  only  one-fifth 
of  that  of  Homer.  This  may  sometimes  have  been 
the  case;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  in  accordance  with 
the  tendency  of  imitative  authors  to  overdo  rare  con- 
structions, we  might  expect  to  find  in  Apollonius  a 
large  increase  of  just  such  constructions  as  are  repre- 


/^ 


A   «4-< 


ii 


— 15  — 

sented  in  Homer  by  only  a  few  examples.  The  only 
restrictions  to  this  tendency  in  the  case  of  Apollonius 
seem  to  have  been  two  principles  diametrically  op- 
posed to  each  other,  (i)  When  the  Homeric  con- 
struction is  one  that,  like  iJ-erd  with  the  genitive,  or 
Tzpoi  with  the  dative,  or  even  r.apd  with  the  accusative 
of  the  person,  afterwards  became  the  ordinary  prose 
construction,  Apollonius  avoided  it,  because  at  his 
time  it  was  felt  to  be  prosaic.  (2)  On  the  other 
hand,  a  construction  like  dvd  with  the  genitive  or 
dative,  that  never  obtained  a  solid  foothold  even  in 
later  poetry,  was  possibly  felt  to  be  too  archaic  and 
too  strange,  and  was  for  that  reason  avoided  by  Apol- 
lonius. Similarly  he  avoids  forms  like  erVt'  for  iv  as 
too  poetic,  and  iryt)^,  aveu^  etc.,  as  too  prosaic. 

Little  work  having  been  done  in  the  department 
of  the  Homeric  prepositions  **by  the  statistical  har- 
row "  (  A.  J.  P.,  XXIII.,  p.  25  ),  Kbeling's  Uxicon 
Homericum  and  Gehring's  Indek  Homericus  had  to 
supply  this  deficiency.  Of  valuable  assistance  for  the 
'Homeric  statistics  was  Haggett's  contribution  to  the 
"Studies  in  Honor  of  Basil  L.  Gildersleeve. * '  Also 
the  chapters  on  the  prepositions  in  the  Homeric 
grammars  of  Monro  and  Vogrinz  have  afforded  a 
convenient  outline  for  the  principal  Homeric  usages. 
Sobolewski  (for  Aristophanes)  and  Lutz  (for  the 
Orators)  have  been  most  frequently  consulted  to 
establish  the  Attic  prose-usage.  For  the  later  prose 
Polybius  has  sometimes  been  cited  through  the  dis- 
sertation of  Krebs.  Finally,  the  explanation  for  some 
deviations  from  Homer  I  sought  in  the  **Kpic  Cycle'* 
and  in  Tragedy;   also  in  Herodotus,  because  to  the 


—  i6  — 


I 


later  Greek  writers  ** Ionic"   and    "poetic"  were 
synonymous  terms. 

It  is  to  be  expected  that  in  the  classification  of  the 
prepositions  with  all  their  epic  peculiarities,  some 
doubtful  cases  will  come  up,  which  can  hardly  be  put 
in  any  fixed  category.  Here  belong  especially  :  (a) 
examples  in  which  the  preposition  might  be  taken  as 
a  simple  adverb,  or  with  the  verb  ( tmesis  ).  or  with 
the  noun  (case-construction);  and  (b)  examples  of 
prepositions  in  case-regimen,  but  standing  on  the 
boundary  line  of  two  different  meanings,  as  causal 
and  instrumental.  As  regards  the  settling  of  some 
of  these  puzzling  examples,  the  words  of  Goethe  hold 
good  :     '*Es  irrt  der  Mensch,  so  lang  er  strebt.'* 


A 


'^ 


A 


I-     . 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  IMPROPKR  OR  PSEUDO  -  PRKPOSITIONS. 

The  improper  prepositions,  mostly  adverbs  of  place, 
hold  an  important  position  in  poetry.  I^ike  the 
proper  prepositions,  they  govern  cases,  and  are 
especially  frequent  with  the  genitive.  The  only 
essential  distinction  between  an  improper  and  a 
proper  preposition  is  that  the  former  never  entered 
into  composition  with  verbs  as  the  latter  did 

A  large  portion  of  the  pseudo- prepositions  or  case- 
adverbs  belongs  to  the  epic  language  exclusively. 
Some  are  loose  compounds  (Ttaprh^era  rather  than 
irovt^era),  formed  from  a  preposition  and  an  adverb; 

e.    g.     av-j-TTcViJ^^ev,     ar-«v£t»»9£v,    aro-vo^r^^v,     Sc-a/iTzepi^ 
xar-avTtxptj^  xar-e'j-avriov^  xar-oTttffH-^  //er  oTtarHe^  etC.     Cf. 

Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  hom.  Dial.,  p.  230;  Monro,  Hom. 
Gram.,  Sec.  228. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  improper  prepositions,  no 
better  method  could  be  followed  than  that  pointed 
out  by  T.  Mommsen  in  his  *  *  Beitrage  zu  der  I^hre 
von  denGriech.  Prapositionen  ";  Kxcurs  III.,  Casus- 
Adverbia,  pp.  764-766;  viz.  to  discuss  from  a  com- 
parative point  of  view  the  questions  (a)  of  frequency, 
(b)  of  position  and  (c)  of  case-government.  Stylistic 
peculiarities  occur  in  almost  every  writer.  Apollonius 
has  especially  many,  which  will  be  pointed  out  in 
their  respective  places. 

17 


i\ 


—  iS  — 
FRKQUENCY. 

As  regards  tlie  frequency  of  the  improper  preposi- 
tions compared  with  that  of  the  prepositions  proper, 
Mommsen  says  **  dass  die  Dichter  iiberhaupt  sie  weit 
haufiger  und  weit  mannigfaltiger  haben  als  de  Pros- 
aiker.  Im  Durchschnitt  ist  das  Verhaltniss  der  C.  A. 
zu  den  Prapositionen  in  der  Poesie  hochstens  wie 
1 :6  (Sophocles,  Apol.  Rhod.),  mindestens  wie  1:13 
(Pindar,  Lyrici  Min.).  das  mittlere  Verhaltniss  ist 
1:8  (Homer,    Hesiod,  lambogr.  )»    oder  1:9  (  Euri^ 

pides) In  der  Attischen  Prosa  ist  das  Durch- 

schnittsverhaltniss  1:18,  in  der  altern  (Thucyd.) 
ein  geringeres  1:22  (24);  die  lonische  Prosa  hat 
einen  starkern  Verbrauch  von  C.  A.  (1:12),  des- 
gleichen  Antiphon;  Xenophon  urd  Platon  (1:10), 
(9),    gehen    am    weitsten,    nahern    sich    also  der 

Poesie.  '* 

Homer  has  11 12  examples  of  improper  preposi- 
tions in  case-construction;  Apollonius  has  275.  This 
gives  for  Apollonius  one  improper  preposition  per 
21.2  lines;  for  Homer  one  per  24.9  lines,  and  shows, 
as  does  Mommsen' s  calculation,  a  slight  gain  in 
Apollonius.  The  adverbs  which  Apollonius  construes 
with  cases  more  frequently  than  Homer  are  chiefly  : 
avsu^'^zv  (Apol.  7,  Hom.  9),  ixrjTt  (Apol  i6,  Hom.  3), 
£XT«»V£  (Apol.  12,  Hom.  2),  and  i&rt  (Apol.  4, 
Hom.  2  ).  On  the  other  hand  Apollonius  shows  a 
marked  decrease  in  aWa  (Apol.  i,  Hom.  23),  and 
7tp6iT'9e(v)  (  Apol.  I,  Hom.  35). 

POSITION. 

According  to  Mommsen,  the  pre-positives  hold  in 


/^ 


i 


^'i^... 


—  19  — 

Homer  a  relation  to  the  post-positives  as  eight  to  six. 
In  Apollonius  I  find  142  prepositives  and  97  post- 
positives,  showing  that  Apollonius  (3:2)  uses  the 
prepositives  in  a  slightly  larger  proportion  than 
Homer  (8:6).—  Homer  has  70  cases  of  inter-posita; 
Apollonius  has  36,  which  is  a  large  increase  over 
Homer,  in  proportion  to  his  work. 

It  is  surprising  that  in  the  use  of  pre-positives  and 
post-positives  Apollonius  leans  more  toward  the 
prose  usage  (4:1  ),  whereas  the  common  tendency  in 
poetry  was  for  the  post-positives  to  increase.  Thus 
in  Pindar,  Aeschylus  and  Sophocles  the  prepositives 
balance  with  the  post-positives,  but  in  Euripides  the 
post-positives  increase  considerably. 

WITH   CASES. 

From  the  following  comparison  of  the  statistics  of 
Homer  and  Apollonius  it  is  evident  that  the  use  with 
the  genitive  increases  in  Apollonius,  while  the  use 
with  the  dative,  and  especially  with  the  accusative 
decreases  in  accordance  with  the  general  tendency  of 
the  language. 

Homer:  — Gen    750,  Dat.  250,  Ace.  112. 

Apollonius:  — Gen.  235,  Dat.  35,  Ace.  5. 

Apollonius  has  altogether  82  improper  prepositions: 
69  with  the  genitive,  6  with  the  dative,  one  (  itipt^  ) 
with  the  acusative;  5  with  the  genitive  and  dative, 
one  (  eUw  )  with  the  genitive  and  accusative. 

For  the  greater  part,  Apollonius  imitated  the 
Homeric  usage.  He  differs  from  Homer  chiefly  in 
the  large  number  of  case-adverbs  (  13  c.  gen.,  3  c. 
dat.,  I  c.  ace),  which  do  not  occur  in  Homer  at  all; 


%'* 


20  — 

also  in  using  words  as  case-adverbs  (12  c.  gen.,  4  c. 
dat.),  which  in  Homer  are  used  only  in  an  absolute 
sense.  With  s.'Vw  Apollonius  has  reversed  the 
Homeric  order.  Homer  uses  it  3  times  with  the 
genitive  and  49  times  with  the  accusative;  but  Apol- 
lonius has  it  7  times  with  the  genitive  and  only  twice 
with  the  accusative. 

A.   WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

a)    APOLLONIUS  AGREES  WITH   HOMER. 

'  *Ayxi'  —  I-  25  ocoTtiYJg  TlifinTiYjiSog  ayxi\ 
similar  examples  are:  I.  67,  553;  II.  94;  III, 
219;  IV.  209.  For  Homer  compare:  0  117,  I 
43,  K  161,0  3()2;/^417,  etc. 

'Ay;g6^t: —  I.  37  opeog  ^xiKkYiiov  ayjo^v^ 
also  II.  1047;  IV.  484.  Cf.  H412,*  762;  v  103. 
Homer  never  uses  the  word  in  an  absolute 
sense,  which  is  found  in  Apollonius:  IV.  330, 
336,  etc. 

"^ kvBv%nn — I.  855  'HpaxXiJog  av^v^^v,  also 
III.  641,  781,  987,  1030;  IV.  744,  1008.— Cf. 
E  185,  4>  78,  X  88;  n  192,  n  239,  etc.  The  prose 
form  av^v  is  not  found  in  Apollonius.  though  it 
occurs  nine  times  with  the  genitive  in  Homer: 
P  407,  *  387,  etc. 

"Arra: — III.  44  avua  ^i^pdur.  Cf.  B  G26, 
T  69,  73,  75;  a  334,  etc. 

'Avrta: — I.  790  dj^rta  h(snQivr^g\  IV.  1710 


r 


21 


'Innov^ilog  dvTia  vrjcfov.  Cf.  4>  481,  T  80,  88, 
113,  118;  etc.  In  Homer  dvria  is  always  con- 
strued with  a  case;  in  Apollonius  it  occurs  also 
in  an  absolute  sense,  as  in  I.  799,  III.  287. 

'A7tdv8v^i:{v): — I.  863  dndvEv^e  yvvaixidv] 
also  II.  874,  1210;  III.  114,  333;  IV.  371.  Cf. 
A  48,  549,  E  30,  etc. 

"^ A7tov6(y(pL: — III.  9  Aioq  5'  avrolo  xal  dT^Xidv 
d^avdrcdv  dnovoatpi  ^euv.  Cf.  A  541;  s  113,  etc. 

^A(JGov:-lV.  780  daaov  tola,  Cf.  X  4;  p  303. 

"Arep: — I.  397  Yipd^^vdrep  dXXwr;  II.  55  nd- 
Xov  drfp,  1009  xafidrcdv  drfp.  Cf.  A  498,  A 
376,  E  473,  753;  I  604,  0  292,  ^  50,  etc. 

""A^pig: — III.  874  Xevx^g  smyovvlhog  d^pig, 
1382  d^pig  xid^idv.  Cf.  G  370,  where  Homer 
uses  d;^pf  in  a  temporal  sense.  The  form  d;^pt  is 
not  used  by  Apollonius.  In  two  passages  Apol- 
lonius uses  d;^p($  to  emphasize  a  preposition 
(like  Latin  "usque  ad");  III.  762  vno  veiarov 
Iviov  d;^pf$,  and  IV.  1401  d;^p^  in  axvyjanv. 

Aia^nepeg: — II.  319  rduv  .  .  SiafiTtepeg;  IV. 
1251  hiaiine^eg  .  .  nsr^didv.  Cf.  M  429,  T  362, 
etc. 

'Eyyv^c—l,  633  eyyv^t  vriaov,  also  III.  926; 
IV.  1072,  1442.  Cf.  Z  317,  I  76;  v.  156,  (o  358. 
The  prose  form  iyyvg^  which  occurs  forty-six 
times  in  Homer,  is  not  used  by  Apollonius. 

Kivexa: —  I.  666  tov  .  .  .    elvexa;    II.    180 


] 


22 


slvExa  ^lavroavvyjg;  also  II.  2C1;  III.  721;  IV. 
191,  398,  648,  807,  1097.  Cf.  A  174,  F  100, 
128,  Z  ;?28,  3o(>,  H  89,  T  o8,  X  236,  *  608,  II 
501;  5  145,  etc.  Of  the  variants,  evexev  occurs 
once  with  the  genitive  in  ApoUonius:  IV.  364 
acdr  h'8X8v  xatidrcdP,  with  which  compare  for 
Homer  p  288,  310.  The  form  ehexev,  which  is 
not  Homeric,  is  Ibund  four  times  with  the  geni- 
tive in  the  Argonautica:  I[.  21  (>  avr^g  eivexep 
"Hp>7g;  similarly  II.  1133;  IV.  1032,  1714. 
Here  may  he  mentioned  also  ovvexa,  which 
is  used  only  absokitely  in  Homer,  but  in  Apol- 
lonius  it  governs  the  genitive  three  times:  I. 
1325  =  III.  356  olo  Tttp  ovv8x\  III.  370  rdv 
yap  a(pe  i^iereX^euev  ovvex  aUTta.  In  these 
passages  ovvexa  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to 
evexa.  The  absolute  sense  "because"  is  seen  in 
I.  615;  III.  246,  334,  470,  626,  1124;  IV.  791. 
Cf.  y  53,  61,  etc.  The  prose  form  evsxa, 
which  occurs  twenty-six  times  in  Homer  with 
the  genitive,  is  found  only  once  in  ApoUonius 
(IV.  1521),  and  only  in  the  absolute  sense 
"because." 

'Exdg: — I.  84  tardg  Kolxc^v;  similarly  11.134, 
858;  III.  207;  IV.  131,  566,  1649.  For  Homeric 
parallels  compare  E  791,  I  246,  N  263;  y  260, 
0  t/i/,  exc. 


'•'I*' 


'Exdrep^8v:—IL  678=IV.  1660  napetduv 
txdr8p^8v.  Cf.  r  340,  *  813. 

"ExYiri: —  1)  Of  gods,  "by  the  aid  of:''  I. 
116  Aiuivvooio  8XYii:i.  Cf  o  319,  t  86,  i;  42.  This 
is  the  only  use  in  Homer.  ApoUonius  uses  it  also: 

2)  Of  persons:  I.  902  Hf^tao  Ixriri',  likewise 
1. 334;  11.  253,  297,  526,  757;  III.  621, 1059;  IV. 
1085,  1197. 

3)  Of  things,  "for  the  sake  of,"  as  equivalent 
to  8lv8xa:  I.  773  (piT^orYirog  cxyjrt;  II.  1156=111. 
266  xT8dvidv  'A^dfiavrog  exyitl;  IV.  390  ExyjTL 
y8  avi^^8aLdidv,  1016  Exyjri  napyoavvYjq.  Cf. 
Find.  N.  8,  81;  Aesch.  Choe.  701;  Soph.  Phil. 
669;  Eurip.  Med.  1235.  In  Homer  iorr^n  (dat. 
of  iorr^g)  is  used  of  gods  and  mortals;  cf  S  396, 
T  9;  Yi  214,  X  384,  a  234;  also  ApoUonius  III. 
542,  IV.  1030.  In  Aeschylus,  Pro.  557,  it  is 
used  of  the  occasion,  as  loran  ydiiuv  "on  the 
occasion  of  the  marriage." 

"ExTo^cv: — I.  1037  d!)6VX8o<;  8xro^8v  dryjg; 
III.  1200  ndrov  8xro^8v.  Cf  a  132;  also 
Aesch.  Pers.  871,  Sept.  629.  In  IV.  520  Apol- 
lonius  has  the  adverbial  prepositional  phrase  ex 
r6^8v  (not  exro^ev  as  Brunck,  Wellauer  and 
Lehrs  would  have  it.) 

*Exro^i: — I.  243.  yaiyjg  Uava^au^og  8xro^L 
^dX?M;  I.  659  =  I.  793,  IV.  47,  1180  hro^i 
nipyidv.      Other  examples  are:     I.  833,  1291; 


—  24  — 

III.  373, 1198;  IV.  1296,  1546,  1755.  For  Ho- 
mer compare  0  391,  X  439,— the  only  two  pas- 
sages in  which  he  uses  the  word.  ApoUonius 
has  it  in  an  absohite  sense  in  III.  255. 

'Exrog: — 11.  1174  ixrog  dvYipeipeog  nsXe 
VYjov;  111.  472  f^Yiaov  re  xai  aareog  ixrog  el3Yjaav 
Simihirlj-  IV.  211,  1655.  Cf.  I  67,  T  49,  8  678, 
eio. 

"ExtocSf: — I.  634  nvlkdv  hroa^e;  IT.  894 
nerpdijp  hroa^e.     Cf.  I  552;   4^  148,  etc. 

"Ei^f^o^^r: — I.  929  'Poir6id(iog  ev^o^sv  dxr^g. 
Cf.Z  247,11  161;  (5  74. 

*Ei^f^o3<:— I.  936  Jlponovri^og  ev8o^i;  simiLar 
examples  are:  II.  346,  1265;  IV.  333,  508, 
1374,  1383.     Cf.  2  287;  h.  Cer.  355. 

''Ev(hp: —  I.  906  JlEXaayi^og  hSov  ^hdXxov. 
Cf.  T  13,  *  200,  etc. 

''Ep8p^8{v):—  II.  846  axpy:g  rvr^v  evepy 
'Ax^povalSog;  III.  1158  xXivr^pog  Evep^ev;  IV. 
535   TtoXXov    evep^fv  ov^eog.     Cf.  0  16,  A  252. 

The  form  V6p^e{v),  which  in  Homer  is 
twice  construed  with  the  genitive  (H  204,  2. 
302),  is  used  thus  by  ApoUonius  only  in  con- 
nection with  a  preposition,  as  1. 155  vep^e  xard 
Z^ovog,  745  vep'^ev  vnex  fia^olo. 

'Evrog:  —  I.  782  7iv?i6uv  re  xai  doreog  iv- 
T6g.   Cf.  M  374,  380,  etc. 

""Evroa^eiv): — II.  761  ^eydpcov  hroa^e;  III. 


[I 


\ 


—  2S  — 

754  cryj^ecoj'  hroa^ev;  also  IV.  1066,  1133, 
1778.  For  Homer  compare  A  454;  a  380,  (3 
145,  etc. 

'E^eri:—  II.  784  =  IV.  250,  430  i^en  xei- 
mv  (temp.);  IV.  789  e^ki  vyinvriYig,  Cf.  I.  106; 
^245. 

In  I.  976  en  is  best  taken  with  veov  in 
the  sense  of  ^^recently," — e^  alone  governing 
narpog.  Another  possibility  would  be  to  change 
veov  to  the  genitive  veov  governed  by  ei^-en.  Cf. 
Kuehner-Gerth,  p.  540  A. 

''E^o;^a: — 1.  859  e^o^a  h'  aXXcor  d^avdrcdv, 
Cf.  E  257,  a  113,  134. 

'l^ig:  _  I.  1032  i^vg  ioio;  11.  254  rod  5' 
l^vg.  Cf  E  849,  0  322,  M  106,  254,  H  584,  P 
340,  n  471;  o  511,  et€. 

Ka^vnep^e:  —  III.  581  ^iaaiyjg  xa^vnep^e 
xo2.6vY!g;  IV.  1377  xa^vnep^e  3aXd(7a>7$.  Cf  y 
170,  ^  279,  etc. 

Karavrixpv:—Il,  626  i^ieftevoio  xaravrixpv 
{xar'  dvrixpvl)  UeXiao.  Cf.  x  b59z=X  64,— the 
only  example  in  Homer. 

Karonia^ei—ll.  273  rdcov  5'  av  xaroTtia^e, 
Cf.  X6z=fi  148. 

Aa^pyj:  —  II.  125  Xd^pyj  ivpptvoiv  re  xvvuv 
avruv  re  vo^yjov,    Cf.  E  269;  p  43;  h.  Cer.  240. 

MeGT^yv:—lY .  1573  fieayjyv  \  py^yfitvov,  Cf. 
0  259,  560,  I  549,  A  448,  570,  N  568,  n  396;  x 


26  — 


27  — 


I 


93,  442,  459,  etc.  Apolloiiius  reversed  the  Ho- 
meric usage  of  this  word.  Homer  construed  it 
with  the  genitive  twenty  thnes;  Apollonius  only 
once.  Homer  uses  it  in  an  absolute  sense  five 
times  (A  573,  0  316,  T  371,  *  521;  >?  195); 
Apollonius  has  it  eighteen  times  (I.  85;  II.  51, 
270,  337,  1231);  III.  307,  441,  665,  723,  929; 
IV.  525,  600,  880,  1231,  1360  ^eaariyvg'-  III. 
1316;  IV.  579,  582  ^leaaYjyv). 

Mf(T<|)a:— IV.  337  ^lea^a  ^akayyCivog  nora^ 
fiov  xal  NeaTL^og  alyjg.  Cf.  0  508  (the  only  ex- 
ample of  fieacpa  in  Homer).  The  phrase  iii.0fa 
airig  ''untiF'  occurs  twice  in  Apollonius:  II. 
1230,  1261. 

MfToTKdS'K—  I.  1064  noaiog  ueroTtta^e.  Cf. 
I  504;  L  529. 

Neto.^sp: — I.  1197  SaneSoio  .  .  rivd^ag\v8i- 
6^6P.  Cf.  Liddell  and  Scott  s.  v.  The  word  oc- 
curs only  once  in  Homer:  K  10  veio^ev  ex  x^a- 
hiYig,  for  which  Apollonius  has  two  close  paral- 
lels: I.  385  vHo'^ev  e^  E^py^g  and  I.  1313  veio- 
^ev  8x  ?My6vidv,  Apollonius  lias  the  word  also 
in  the  absolute  sense  in  I.  1288;  II.  205;  III. 
383,  1302,  1357;  IV.  142. 

NaoSc— I.  63  e^vaero  veio^i  yaiyjg,  255  vsl- 
6^1  yaiYig  xslro;  III.  62  veio'^i  Sfaacar:— The 
word  occurs  only  once  in  Homer  <t>  317  vho^l 
Tii^vYjg.   Apollonius  uses  it  absolutely  in  I.  990, 


.!#« 


1098,  1326;  II.  355;  III.  164,  706;  IV.  1613. 
Nd(7c/)t(i^):— I.  197  voGipLV  y  '"^pax^nog,  322 
nokvioc;  v6a<pi.  Similarly  I.  1207,  1294;  II.  275; 
III.  577;  IV.  10,  346,  352,  406,  819.  Cf.  A  349; 
a  20, 185,  7t  383,  w  212,  308,  etc. 

^07t(5^F(r):-  IV.  329  om^ev  norauolo.  Cf.  P 
468  om^e  hlxppoio. 

UdpOL^8{v):  —  II.  52  ^yjxe  ndpot^e  7to5wr, 
909  avrpoLO  ndpoi^Ev;  IV.  245  ndpoi^'  ''AXvog 
noraiiolo.  Cf.  A  360;  h  625,  etc.  Absolutely: 
(1)  ndpot^Bv  I.  208,  529;  II.  89,  582,  654,  889; 
III.  694;  Cf.  A  185,  ri  125,  etc.  (2)  to  Ttapot- 
^ev  "before"  I.  254,  284,  630,  816;  II.  1061; 
III.  324,  473,  526,  894;  IV.  862,  882;  cf.  a  322, 
-/?312,  (T  275. 

ndpog:  —  II.  101  rov  he  ndf^og;  III.  22= 
422,  1062  nohm>  ndpog.   Cf.  0  254. 

Ilpondpot^£{v):—I.  215  'D.iggov  Ttpondpoi^s. 
Other  examples  are  H.  68,  529,  862;  III.  254, 
317;  IV.  1475.  For  Homer  compare  A  348,  n 
218,  0  66;  S  355,  etc.  In  Apollonius  npoTtdpot- 
^8P  is  always  post-positive;  in  Homer  it  stands 
also  before  the  case,  as  in  N  205;  a  117,  etc. 

np6(T3f(r):-IV.  2U7tp6a^8a82.yjvaiy^g.  This 
is  the  only  example  of  npoaS^ev  with  the  geni- 
tive in  Apollonius.  In  Homer,  however,  we 
find  thirty-five  examples;  cf.  M  145,  N  385,  T 
13;  X  4,  etc. 


—  28  — 

j^lr,-lU.  1334  ryjXe  5'  tolo,  Cf.  A  817,  H 
539,  X  291;  [3  333,  etc.  Witli  preposition:  I. 
1278  r^le  8'dn  dxrijg;  TV.  1472  rvj^^e  k'  inei- 
po(o.  Cf.  A  358,  n  117;  e  315,  etc.  The  ad- 
verbial  phrase  TYi'X.e  nape^  occurs  twice  in  Ap- 
ollonius:  11.  272;   III.  1233. 

TyiU^ev—  11.  506  ryjlo^ef  Mifioviyjg.  Cfl 
Find.  N.  2,  18;  Soph,  Aj.  204;  Eurip.  H.  F. 
1112.  In  Homer  always  with  a  preposition,  as: 
A  270,  B  849,  857,  877,  2  208,  etc.  With  e 
283  ry^X6^8v  ix  ^o?.vf.icdP  opkdv  compare  for  Ap- 
ollonius  II.  402  Wt.iaparTC}v  ryj-Jlo^fj^  i^  opscdv. 
In  III.  879  the  genitive  depends  on  the   verb. 

TYjU^t—  II,  588  ryjU^i  ,  .  .  TiErpdcdv.  In 
II,  795  ryj?Mi^i  raierdovrog  ev6a<pioai'  'UpaxX^og, 
the  genitive  is  absolute,  and  so  is  tyiXo^l.  For 
Homeric  examples  of  ryi?J^i  c.  gen.  compare  A 
30,  n  461,  :i  99,  a  86,  541;  ^  365. 

In  IV.  1206  it  is  doubtful  whether  we 
are  to  write  dno  rYi?y6^L  (Brunck,  Becker,  Mer- 
kel)  or  dnoTYjlo^i  (Wellauer,  Seaton).  The 
same  holds  good  for  IV.  726,  1186.  The  form 
dnory^Xo^i  is  not  Homeric;  but  Apollonius  may 
have  used  it  as  a  variant  for  dnor^Xov  (t  117). 

XdpiJ^: —  I.  851  'H^aiaroio  x^?^^  noXv^Yi- 
riog.  Cf.  0  744,  which  is  Jilso  the  only  example 
in  Homer. 


—  29  — 

b)    APOI.I.ONIUS    HAS    CASE -CONSTRUCTION,    WHERE 
HOMER  HAS  ONLY  THE  ABSOLUTE  SENSE. 

*Av8lx^'  —  I-  ^^8  dvSixoL  Tolo  dpaxrog;  II. 
929  dvfiLXOi  <5'  at  ;^i;T^(jr. 

Absol.:  II.  577;  III.  23;  IV.  31.    Cf.  U 
412,  578,  2  511,  T  387,  X  120. 

'ATto-TtpoS't:  —  III.  313  fidXa  noXkov  dno- 
7ipo%i  ^ok^ihog  oiYig,  372  rxp^a'Xiucdv  [lot  dnonpo- 
S^t,  1064  dnonpo^i  noX?i6v  eolo. 

Absol.:  I.  602;  IV.  287,  553,  1633.  Cf. 
S  757,  811,  6  80,  L  18,  35,  etc. 

KarEiuvrlov: — II.  360  xarevavriov  dpxrov. 
This  is  the  only  instance  of  the  word  in  Apol- 
lonius; Homer  has  it  likewise  only  once  <&  567, 
and  in  the  absolute  sense. 

Ilpocrw: —  IV.  1266  ;^Fpcroi;  noXkov  Ttpdcrw. 
Cf.  Soph.  Aj.  204.— Absol.:  A  572,  M  274,  etc. 

"Tnep^Bv:  —  I.  534,  573,  622  vnep^'  dkog, 
1088  vTiEp^ev  vyjiov,  1096  vnep^sv  aelo;  III. 
1222  vLcpoEvrog  vnep^ev  KavxdGov,  IV.  95(5  aly- 
Xyjevrog  imep^ev  oifavov,  1139  rolo  5'  vnsp^sv. 
— Cf.  Aesch.  Sept.  228,  Ag.  232.— Absol.:  II. 
322,  734,  1035,  1067;  III.  205,  883,  1259;  IV. 
571.  Cf  8  184,  ^  393,  476,  v  2,  etc. 

'r^i.6^8v:—  II.  808  I46^8v  dxpr.g;  IV.  168 
iij/oS'fJ^  .  .  .  v7tcopo(pLov  ^akdfioLO.  Cf.  Pind.  01. 
III.  12.  — Absol.:  I.  1203;  III.  542;  IV.  1374. 
Cf.  M  383;  /3  147,  et«. 


I 


I 


—  30  — 

'rU^i:  —  11.  571  H6^t  S'  dx^yjg,  1081 

v^'oS'f  vYjog;  IV.  84()  nepaiyjg  v^ld^i  yairig,  924 
7tvpL^a?.7teog  vyl^o^i  nerpYjg. — AbsoL:  I.  590;  IL 
354,  935;  IV.  46,  1285,  1422,  1680,  1707.  Cf. 
K  16,  P  676,  T  376. 

Note:  Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  hag 
sometimes  case-construction,  where  ApoUonius 
has  only  the  absohite  sense;  e.  g.  dy^ov  (ft  709; 
^  5);  d^<pig  (c.  gen.  B  384,  0  444;  c.  dat.  E  723; 
c.  ace.  H  274;  ^  266);  dvtLxpv  (E  130,  819;  x 
559).  Simihirly  dvriov,  i^om^sv,  rep^ev,  bni- 
crw  (oTticTCTco) ,  TtpoTfpo,  T)7/loi;,  VTthe^^BV. 

C)    APOLLONIUS  HAS  CASE-ADVERBS,  NOT  FOUND 

IN   HOMER. 

' A j^TiTtf p)73fi^:  — II.  1032  dvrmepYi'^ev  v^ 
aov;  III.  1270  aareog  avr iTtepyj^sv. — AbsoL:  I. 
613,  977;  II.  1177;  IV.  470.— Ai^Tf7ifp>7i;  is 
used  only  absolutely  in  ApoUonius.  The  pas- 
sages cited  by  Linsenbarth  for  case-construction 
are  examples  of  the  absolute  use.  In  II.  177 
the  dative  (not  the  genitive)  depends  on  the 
verb,  and  in  I.  722  and  IV.  68  the  genitive  is 
adnominal. 

"^ Anoxpi^ov; — II.  15  aTtoxpiSdv  .  .  .  6fj.L?x)v. 
Cf  Liddell  and  Scott  s.  v. 

''Ancj^ev: — IV.    323  amd^sv  .  .  .  'Ayyov- 


/- 


—  31  — 

pov   optog,    952    dTtw.^cz'    nerpdcov.      Cf  Eurip. 
Iph.  T.  108. 

The  absolute  sense  occurs  ten  times  in 
ApoUonius:  I.  583;  II.  48,  86,  433,  983;  III. 
1136,  1190;  IV.  443,  1170,  1569. 

^ExTto^ev:— III.  262  exm^ei^  dryjg,  1288 
sxno^Ev  dippdaroLO  xev^iimfog  j(^^oviov. 

'Eraj-ioiSa^tg:  —  I.  380  rcdv  S^  eva^0i[3ahig 
avrol  ereoja^ev  dfKpoTEpcxi^ev.  A  similar  ex- 
ample is  IV.  199  duoii3a^ig  dvspog  dvi^p  ii^o^evog^ 
although  here  we  may  have  a  blending  of 
two  constructions.  Cf  Solon  12  (4),  1.  43cr7ifi;- 
^81  (V  d/lXoJ>ci'  d?.?^og;  but  Theocr.  I.  34  nap  Se 
ol  di^^peg  I  xaTiOV  s^£Lpd^ovT£g  df^iotiSafiig  aXXo^ev 
a?i?iog  I  v6LX8iovG'  eTtttoai. 

'EvoTiayig — IV.  1505  hnorphoaprog  ivuna- 
S/g.— AbsoL:  IV.  354,  718,  1413. 

'Ead;^pt: — I.  604  iod^pt  Mvptpyjg. 

Karevavria:  —  IL  1118  xarevavrla  v/iaov. 
Cf  Dion.  P.  114. 

Mejjo^t: — II.  172  ^eaao^L  vyjog.  Here  fiea- 
ao^L  is  a  poetic  variant  for  fisra^v. —  AbsoL:  I. 
1278. 

MeroTtiv: — IV.  1762  (.leromv  .  .  .  Ev(py!uoLO. 

UapoLrepo:  —  II.  427  rcSvSs  napoLTepu.  Ab- 
soL: II.  686. 

nfpia;i;ia: — II.  217  nepiaXXa  ^euv.  AbsoL: 
III.  529;  Hom.  h.  XIX.  46. 


—  32  — 

Uporepoae: — L  1241  lov  npoTspidae  xe^^ev- 
S^ov;  II.  394  vrjaov  ^e  TtporepcjGe  xai  rjteipoio  its- 
pairig  (pepfiovrai  ^iT^vpeg. — Absol.:  I.  306,  391, 
592,  964,  1014;  11.  369,  554,  621;  III.  1287; 
IV.  498,   1375,  1608.      Cf.   Horn.   h.  32,  10. 

B.   WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

As  T.  Mommsen  (p.  186)  observes,  there 
are  two  characteristic  differences  between  the 
Alexandrian  poets  and  the  early  bards;  (1)  the 
decrease  of  ^srd  with  the  dative  (and  to  some 
extent  also  of  a^ua)  and  (2)  the  increase  of  syn- 
onymous adverbs,  as  fiiya,  a^iiiya  and  the  like 
with  the  dative. 

a)     APOLLONIUS  AGREES  WITH  HOMER. 

"Alia: — 1)  temporal:  I.  607  au  r.eXloio  (3o- 
Xalg.  Similar  examples  are:  I  1362;  II.  945, 
1123;  III.  1171.     Cf.  1  682,  2  136,  210,  etc. 

2)  sociative:  I.  257  xp(c5  afi.  Similar 
examples  are:  I.  656,  637;  II.  210,  419;  III. 
256,  880,  915,  1242;  IV.  363.— Cf.  K  196,  etc. 

3)  concomitant:  I.  425  afj.'  evj^uXf, 
III.  632  aaa  xXayyii;  IV.  1599  aaa  5'  fij^oX^- 
atv.     Cf.^  161;  Horn.  h.  24,  15. 

'Ouov: — II.  121  ofiov  8i  ol  eaasvovro  Aiaxl- 
8aL,  788  oiiov   MvgoIglv.     Other  examples   are: 


Ai^ 


—  sa- 
il. 841,  891,  964;  IV.  1329.  Cf.  E  867,  0  118, 
etc. 

"Eyyv^evi—II.  137  a^iaiv  iyyv^ev.  Cf.  P 
554,  2  133. 

b)    APOLLONIUS   HAS    CASK  -  CONSTRUCTION,     WHERK 
HOMER  HAS  ONI.Y  THE  ABSOLUTE  SENSE. 

"Avri^v:  —  III.  100  avryiv  \  d?.?L^XaLg. — 
Absol.:  III.  1009,  1065.  Cf.  11   223;  e  77,  etc. 

C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  CASE- ADVERBS,  NOT  FOUND 

IN   HOMER. 

*A[i(iiya: — I.  573=11.  985  afifiiya  navpoig-, 
III.  1404  afifitya  KoXxoig.  Cf.  Herod.  VI.  58, 
16  av/ifitya  yvvat^i — Absol.:  IV.  626,  1194. 

Mtya:— IV.  1343  fiiya  ^Yi^^^vrepYiGLV.  Cf. 
Find.  Pyth.  IV.  113.  Similarly  fxiySa  in  Ho- 
mer 0  437. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

UepL^  (not  Homeric):  —  II.  204  yalav  Si 
Ttepi^,  573  vyja  ,  .  ,  nepi^;  III.  1213  nepi^  Se 
fiiv  iare^dvcipro.  Cf.  Aesch.  Pers.  368;  Eurip. 
H.  F.  243.  In  Herodotus  the  word  governs  the 
accusative  frequently,  and  the  genitive  twice: 
I.  179;  II.  91.  The  absolute  sense  is  found  in 
ApoUonius  in  I.  1097;  III.  1290;  IV.  272,  281 
1518,  with  which  compare  Aesch,  Pers.  418; 
Soph.  Ant.  1301;  Eurip.  Andr.  266. 


--34  — 

D.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE  AND  DATIVE. 

Of  the  five  adverbs  that  govern  the  geni- 
tive and  the  dative  in  Apollonius,  only  ax^hov 
has  both  cases  in  Homer.  IlfXag  governs  only 
the  genitive  in  Homer.  'ETtttTj^epo  and  e^vne^- 
^€v  are  nsed  only  absolutely  in  Homer;  Avhile 
imax^Sop  is  not  a  Homeric  word. 

Xxe^6v:—1)  With  the  genitive:  I.  402  aXog 
ax^Sov,  408  [3(a^ov  axe^ov.  1243  Uyjyecjv  axe^op. 
Similarly  H.  1099,  1193,  1255;  EL  1072;  IV. 
469,  506,  1123,  1311,  1742.  Cf.  T  263;  S  439, 
e  288,  etc. 

2)  With  the  dative:  I.  671  r^  xai  Ttapi^- 
evixal  nlavpeg  ax^^ov  tlipiouvro.   Cf.  [i  284,  i  22. 

UeXagi—l)  With  the  genitive:  III.  1073 
vrjaov  niXag;  IV.  1343  op^oio  nsXag.  Cf  o  257 
TYi^ief^iaxov  nsXag  (the  only  example  of  niXag 
c.  gen.  in  Homer).  Likewise,  the  word  is  found 
only  once  in  the  absolute  sense  in  Homer  {x 
516);  whereas  Apollonius  has  it  more  often; 
cf  I.  737;  n.  187,  984;  HI.  59,  1235;  IV.  718! 

2)  With  the  dative:  II.  1049  Tte^a^  n^lv. 
Cf.  Find.  01.  VII.  34,  N.  XL  4;  Aesch,  Supp.  208. 

"Eniaxep6: — 1)  With  the  genitive:  IV.  451 
imaxBpcd  .  .  .  doiS^g. 

2)  With  the  dative:  I.  528  iniaxepo  dXX- 
rfkoKSiv,  Absol.:  III.  170,  1268.  Cf  A  668, 
2  68,  ip  125. 


t' 


I 


iir 


i  -^. 


'^U 


\ 


—  35  — 

'E<^i;7tfp^f(r): — 1)  With  the  genitive:  11. 
395  *ai;p(jj^  5'  €>i;7tep^fi^;  III.  217  €<^i;7tep3f 
SofiOLo;  IV.  1706  SoLOUdV  Se  fii^g  i(pv7t8p^ev. 

2)  With  the  dative:  III.  833  d^/?po(T6w  S' 
i^vnep^e  xapyjan  ^dXke  xaXvnrpyjp, — Absol.: 
IV.  176.     Cf  a  645:  S  298,  etc. 

'EmaxeSop: — 1)  With  the  genitive:  11. 
1286  sTtiaxs^op  .  .  .  veiGof.iepidP ;  IV.  946 
ni^a^oevrog  emax^^op  aiytakolo.  Cf  h.  Ap.  3 
imcxs^op  €p;^0|Mf  j'oto. 

2)  With  the  dative:  II.  606  intaxe^ov 
(U;i>7Xy?(Ttr:— Absol.:  11.  492;  IV.  1108,  1185, 
1348. 

E.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE. 

EI(TG):— 1)  With  the  genitive:  L  372 
elcTw  a?i6g;  II.  136  slao)  Be(3pvxiyjg,  579  elcrw 
Tterpdcdp;  III.  311  hnspcyjg  bIgo}  ;^3oj^og.  The 
variant  eao  c.  gen.  occurs  three  times :  I. 
357=390  €G(j  a;i6$;  XL  73  eaco  rolxoto.  Cf  Z 
284=X  425;  yj  135;  ^  290;— Aesch.  Sept.  232, 
539,  Ag.  1022;  Soph.  0.  T.  1515,  Tr.  902,  El. 
39;  Eurip.  Med.  89,  100,  135,  etc. 

2)  With  the  accusative:  HI.  1018  (pphag 
flcTo;  IV.  308  x6?i7top  eao  noproto.  Cf  A  71, 
r  322,  Z  10,  2  441,  11  155,  184,  199;  X  579, 
etc.— Absol.:  11.  95,  736;  III.  48,  651;  IV.  710. 
Cf  H  270,  8  775,  etc. 


»•  / 


37 


CHAPTER  II. 


1 


^•^M 


PREPOSITIONS  USED  AS  INDEPENDENT 

ADVERBS. 

The  adverbial  use  of  the  prepositions  belongs 
chiefly  to  the  epic  language.  It  is  less  frequent  in 
lyric  and  dramatic  poetry,  as  also  in  Ionic  prose.  In 
Attic  prose  only  Tzpd^di  and  xai  npo^  have  survived. 
Cf.  Kriiger-Pokel,  P.  II.,  Sec.  68,2;  Kiihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  443. 

According  to  the  general  opinion  this  was  the 
original  use  of  prepositions,  though  Delbriick 
(Grundr.,  275)  thinks  that  the  «</-verbial  use  came 
from  the/r^-verbial,  which  would  make  tmesis  older. 

In  ApoUonius  there  is,  as  might  be  expected,  a 
considerable  increase  in  the  adverbial  use  of 
prepositions.  He  has  124  examples,  while  Homer 
has  317  in  all.  In  proportion  to  the  bulk  of  his 
work  ApoUonius  used  the  prepositions  as  adverbs 
nearly  twice  as  often  as  Homer.  He  has  on  the 
average  one  in  47  lines,  while  Homer  has  one  only 
in  89. 1  lines  (II.  83,  Od.  98  4).  As  a  rule  when  the 
preposition  is  used  adverbially,  it  is  placed  at  the 
head  of  a  sentence  or  clause  ;  consequently,  a  particle 
usually  follows  it  to  give  it  the  tone  of  an  independent 
adverb.  Out  of  the  124  examples  in  ApoUonius  95 
occur  at  the  beginning,  and  only  29  are  found  in  the 
middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause ;  104  are  followed  by  a 
particle  («J^75,  r^p-12,  t^-ii,  xae'-3,  ^'y'-^,  r^-^^-i),   and 


only  20  are  without  a  particle.  The  prepositions 
not  used  at  the  head  of  the  sentence  or  clause,  nor 
accompanied  by  a  particle,  are  chiefly  the  double 
prepositions  itapi^^  dtarrpo^  tniTzpo  and  TtpoTtpo ;  also  k-^t 
and  Ttepi  in  a  few  phrases.  Attention  may  be  drawn 
to  the  frequent  occurence  of  the  adverbial  prep- 
ositions in  the  fifth  foot. 

Apollonius  differs  from  Homer  in  a  number  of 
details.  Notably  is  this  the  case  with  fierd^  7:p6  and 
«rwy,  which  he  employs  more  frequently  as  indepen- 
dent adverbs ;  vice  versa,  (hanpo  and  Tzapd  are  more 
frequent  in  Homer.  'Avd,  dr.or.po  and  ot:6  are 
not  used  adverbially  in  the  Argonautica  as  in  the 
Odyssey  or  in  the  Iliad.  'Em7:po^  which  Apollonius 
uses  eleven  times  and  only  adverbially,  is  not  a 
Homeric  word.     Also  -poitpd  is  un-Homeric. 

TABLE  SHOWING  THE  FREQUENCY  OF  THE  ADVERBIAI,  USE  OF 

PREPOSITIONS  IN  APOI,I,ONIUS,  AS  COMPARED 
WITH  THEIR  FREQUENCY  IN  HOMER. 


Prepos. 


iv 

fjuerd 

hrtirpb 

Tp)6 

iirl 

Tap^K 

7rp6s 

wapd 

Tpoirpd 

Siatrpd 

T€piTp6 

wtpi  r  d/nf>l  T€ 

dpd 

diroTpd 

inrd 


I. 


7 

4 

5 
I 

4 

3 
I 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 


II. 


8 
2 
I 

2 
o 

3 

I 

2 
I 
I 
I 
o 
o 
I 
I 
o 
o 
o 


III 


2 

8 

3 

3 

4 
I 

3 
3 

4 

2 

I 
I 

o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 


IV. 


6 
6 
6 
8 
2 

4 
2 
2 
o 
I 
o 
I 
I 
o 
I 
o 
o 
o 


TotinAp. 


23 
20 

15 
14 
10 
II 

7 
7 
5 
4 
2 
2 
I 
I 
2 
o 
o 
o 


Total  in  Homer. 


Total 


80    1  .  43.  Od.  37) 

64(11.41,  Od.  23) 

59(11.27,  Od.  32) 

6(11.  4.  Od.  2) 

3(K224,4'879,  «387) 
o 

10  (II.  7,  Od.  3) 

21  (II.  17,  Od.  4) 

8  (II.  2,  Od.  6) 

12  (II.  7,  Od.  5) 

17  (II.  II.  Od.  6) 
o 

18  (II.  16,  Od.  2) 
2  (A  i8o=n699) 

2(d/A^iTepf-4>io,  4^191) 
2  (2562,  «343) 
2  (n669,  679) 
9  (II.  7.  Od.  2.) 


25+244-35+40  =  12I      II315  (II.  192,  Od.  i23.) 


—  39 


.|i!ii 


—  'A^c^t  — 
I.  238  d^<pl  Se  >lat5i^  |  nTiYj^vg  anepj^^ouevov  ativ- 

I.  880  di.i<pl  Se  X6tf^adv\§pGi^eig  ydvvrat.  Cf.  ^''  292. 

IV.  1299  duipl  he  Keiucyv  |  tpayjetg  iSpsuerai, 

Similarly  nepi  in  II  569. 
I.   1123  du(pi  he  (pvXXoig  \  are^d^ievoi   h^vtvoiai 

^VYinoXiYig  6^e?Mvro, 

I.  1154  d^<pl   yap  ai^yjp  |  v/ive^og  earopeaev  hi- 

vag.  Cf.  X  94. 

II.  921  d^^l  he  xoKyi  \  rerpd^a^iog  (polvixL  Xo^o) 

ene'Xd^nero   nrikrii^.     Cf.    0    608    d^i^l   he 

niikYit,  I  (s^ephoJkeov    xpordcpoiOL    TLpdaaero 

•       fiapvafievoio,  X  134  ai.i(pi  he  ^oi^^dg  ekdanero^ 

II.  1207    d^(pl  he  KoT^x^av  \  e^vea    vaierdovaiv. 

Cf.  n  234,  X  408. 

III.  166  d^^i  he  novrog.  Cf  M  460. 

III.  424  ^ovXyiv  h'  d^^l  noT^vv  arp6<pa  ^popov. 
III.  810  du^i  he  ndaat  \  ^viiyjhelg  ^ioroto  fieXyj- 

hoveg  IvhdTi^ovro. 
III.  882  df.i<pi    he    S'Tjpe^  |  xvvC^yj^fioj   aaivovGiv 

vnorpoixeovreg  lovaav, 
III.  884  d^(pi  he  Xaot  |  elxov,  Cf.  H  83;  X  136. 
III.  1247  dfi^i  h'  eralpOL  \  Tteipyjaav  revj(^eidv. 
III.  1346  d^i^l   5'    eralpoi  \  ^dpavvov  ^v^olcjiv. 

Cf.  K  151,  0  9;  L  544. 

III.  1351  dficpl  he  7toX;i6$  I  d^pog,  Cf.  fl  163. 

IV.  129  d^(pi  he  ^axpai  \  'hoveg  nora^olo. 


/ 


—  40  — 

IV.  311  dfi^i  Se  Soiai  |  ax,'i.^ovrai  Ttpo^oai 
IV.  601  afifi  Se  xovpai  |  'HXidheg.  Cf.  A  328. 
IV.  941  dfifi  Sexv^a.  Cf.  A  481;  3  427,  eUl. 
IV.  1396  dfiipi  fie  vvfi^ai  \  'EanepiSeg  nolnvvov, 

—  Aianpo  — 
IV.  313  TYi  5e  Sianpo  |  "A\)yvprog  Ko^x^l  re  So- 
tJTfpoj^  (5p^>7^>7(ittj^.  Cf.  T  276,  4>  164,  etc. 

—  ev  — 

In  point  of  frequency  of  the  prepositions 
in  the  adverbial  use,  ev  holds  the  third  highest 
place  in  Apollonius  as  well  as  in  Homer.  Also 
in  Ionic  prose  ev  is  often  used  adverbially, 
jundbarg  (p.  5)  cites  twenty-five  examples 
from  Herodotus.  For  most  of  the  examples 
from  Apollonius  are  found  close  parallels  in 
Homer. 

I.  752  h  he  hvLi   Si^poi  nenovi^aro   Sy^pioovreg. 

Cf.E  740-741, 2  490,  573,  587;  >?  129,  etc. 
I.  759  ev  xai  'ATtoaXcjj^  <I>oa/3o$  oiarevoiv  irirv- 

xTo,     Cf.  2  483. 

L  939  ev  8e  ol  dxrai  |  dfi(plSv(ioL.  Cf.  r  173, 175, 
etc. 

I.  948  ev  h'fjpcjg  AlvYiLog  v\o<;  avaaaev.  Cf.  Soph 

O.  T,  27,  182. 
I.  1262  ev  he  xeXaivov  vno  cnTidyxvoig  ^eev  alfia. 

With  this  compare  the  following  examples, 
in  which  the  dative  is  ethical:  III.    1042  iv  hi 


«► 


i  '^.-4 


—  41  — 

oi  dXxY!  I  l(T(Ter';  IV.  169  ev  he  ol  ^rop  ;tatpet; 
IV.  1064  iv  he  ol  ^Top  .  .  .  e^'aero;  IV.  1541 
iv  he  ol  6aae  .  .  .  ^d^nerai-,  IV.  16  ev  he  ol  oa- 
ae  nTJfixo  nvpog.     Cf.  T  16,  366;  ^  131. 

II.  1266  iv  he  xal  avrov  \  larov  d(pap  ;^a^a(Tar- 

To  napaxTiLhov. 

III.  1090  iv  h'  avrvi  'lai^'^xdg,  euyj  n6'kig,  iv  he 
xai  d/l/lat  noTiXai  vaierdovoiv  (are  situated)- 
For  this  use  of  avryj  compare:  I.  23,  109, 
349;  III.  269;  also  Z  451,  ^  441,  etc.  The 
emendation  to  aiV??  (Brunck,  Wellauer, 
Lehrs  and  Seaton)  is  unnecessary,  espec- 
ially since  the  reading  of  LG  is  avryj 

IV.  655,  656  iv  he   aoXoi  xal  rpv^ea  ^eaxe:^a 

xeivGiv,  I  iv  he  Xi^yiv  'Apywog  incovvfiiy^v  ne- 
(pdrLOrau  Cf.  H  551;  l  136. 

-  'Em  - 

The  preposition  ini  when  adverbial  is  used 
a)  in  a  local  sense,  "near",  "by",  "above''  or 
"over";  b)  in  a  temporal  sense,  "next",  "after", 
"thereupon".  This  second  usage  is  not  Homeric. 

a)  Of  place:— II.  370  inl  he  arofia  Sepfi^- 
hovrog  .  .  .  fivperai;  II.  1072  ini  he  U^l  ia- 
aelovro;  III.  1207  inl  h'  dpveLov  rd^ie  Xaifidv. 
Cf.  A  462=j/  459  ini  h'  al^ona  olvov  7,el(ie',  also 
A  639,  640;  2  612,  etc. 

b)  Of  succession  in  time:— III.  726  rolov  h' 


—  42  — 

ini  fiv^ov  hiTtev,  which  occurs  with  slight  varia- 
tion in  III.  779,  IV.  1095,1594.  Cf.  Herod.  IV. 
59,  VIII.  93.  In  Homer  A  25,  379,  et<j.,  ini  is 
to  be  construed  with  the  verb. 

This  double  preposition  does  not  occur  in 
Homer.  In  Apollonius  it  is  used  only  in  the 
absolute  sense,  "forwards".  Only  in  three  places 
is  it  followed  by  a  particle.  I.  30,  983,  1156; 
II.  133  {M),  904,  1247  (yap);  III.  1337;  IV. 
141,  296  (yap),  593,  1388. 

—  MfTa  — 

a)  In  the  local  sense  "beyond",  "next  to": 
II.  374  ^erd  re  afwyepidrarot  avSpc^v  \  Tpy?;^^)?^ 
XdXi;/iJe$  xai  drsipea  yalav  exovaiv.  Cf.  ^  133; 
fp  231;  also  Herod.  I.  142,  145. 

II.  396  ^8rd  5'  av  7iepi6aia  (pvXa  Bex^ipoiv, 

b)  In  the  temporal  sense  "thereupon",  "after''. 
This  use,  like  the  temporal  adverbial  ini  is  not 
Homeric;  cf.  T.  Mommsen,  p.  42.  It  occurs 
frequently  in  Herodotus;  cf  Lundberg  p.  7. 
I.  708  ^erd  h'  eig  sov  opro  veea^i.  Cf  Herod. 
I.  11,  19,  22,  26,  30,  etc. 

III.  969  iierd    5'  avrig  vno  ^lUYig  dvefiOLO  \  xlvv- 
(jievai  ofid^Yjaav  dneipirov. 

III.  1146  fierd  5'  aire  hier^ayov, 

IV.  24  ^lerd  h^  ijye  naXiaavrog  d3p6a  xo/lTtcor 


X 


-43  - 

^dpfiaxa  Ttdvr    dfivSig  xarf;^ei;aTo   ^wpta- 

fxolo. 
IV.  80  ^erd  8e  <i>p6vrig  re  xal  ''Apyog,  |  vie  8vu 

<I>pt^oi;,  ;^a^d5($  ^opor. 
IV.  877  ^erd  5'  ovn  naXiaavrog  Ixer^  oTtlaao. 
IV.  1219  ^erd  5'  avre  Sv68exa  SQixev  enea^ac  \ 

MriSeiYi  Sfiodg. 
IV.  1257  ^erd  5'  avrog  .  |   .  "Ayxalog  .  .  dyo- 

pevaev, 
IV.   1423  ^erd  5'  epvea  ryjXe^dovra]  .  . .  r.e^ovro, 
IV.   1588  ^erd  5'  ovr ig  ia eSpaxev. 
IV.  1688  fierd  5'  olye  veov  .  |  .  Ipov  .  .  ISpvcavro. 
c)  In  the  concomitant  sense  "together  with": 
III.   115  fierd  xai  Favvfiy^^ea  lfvpe~\.  Cf.  B  446, 

477,0  67  (La  Roche). 

—  Hapd  — 

II.  841  Ttapa  5'  danera  [lYiTja  |  .  •  .  ra^yjia  Xat- 

fiorofiYjaav.  Cf  A  611,  B  279,  etc. 

III.  1285  Ttapd  5'  o^pi^ov  ey^og  enri^ev  \  6p36r 
m  ovpidxiii-  Cf  r  135,  K  153. 

—  Hape^  — 

1)  "Away":  II.  272=111.  \2^^r^:Ke  nape^  "far 

away". 

2)  "Besides":  III.  195  ov  5'  eaxe  nape^  ong  d?iXo 

xeXevoi.  Cf.  8  348. 
III.   237    SaiSaXeyj  6'  al^ovaa   nape^  ixdrep^e 
rirvxro. 


—  44  — 

III.   1050  xai  he  roi  ct/lXo   Ttape^  hno^i^ao^*  6v- 
eiap,     Cf.  ^  168. 

—  Ilfpt  — 

Of  all  the  prepositions  Ttepl  is  most  fre- 
quently used  as  an  adverb  in  ApoUonius  as  well 
as  in  Homer.  In  this  use  it  means  either  "on 
all  sides'',  "around''  (Lat.  undique)  or  "exceed- 
ingly". 

a)  Of  the  place,  "on  all  sides",  Lat.  undique: 

I.  1036  ndvTYi  Se  Ttspt  ^eya  nenrarai  ?p;co$.  Cf. 

E  194  a^^t  ^6  nenXoi  \  ninravraL. 

II.  301  Tocppa  5'  dpiar^eg    Ttivoev  nepi  Sep^ia  ye- 

povTog  I  ndvrri  <pOLf3yjGavreg. 
II.  569  navTYi  ^e  itEpi  (liyag  l^pE^Ev  ai^rip.   Cf. 

I.  880;  IV.  1299. 
II.  665  TiEpi  (V  aOTiErog  ISpc^g  \el(3eraL  ex  Xayovuv. 

II.  1107  axoTOEig  6e  nepi  ^6<pog  r^pyipeiaro. 

III.  1247  nepl  hi  ^i^og. 

IV.  1310  TtEpi  5'  o^vTaTai  ^epov  avyai  \  t^eXlov 

IV.   1708    fiapfiapEyjv    Si*  dneTia^-^^    ^log    TiEpl 

ndvTo'^Ev  aiy'kYiv,     Cf  p  439. 

b)  Of  the  degree,  "exceedingly",  as  equiv- 
alent to  7tfpt<T(TG}$.  Cf  Delbrueck,  Grundr.  p. 
703.  Ancient  as  well  as  modern  scholars  are 
not  agreed  how  to  accent  this  TCEpi.  Beck  and 
La  Roche   write  Ttfpt,   while  Wolf  and  Ameis 


> 


—  45- 

prefer  Ttepi  in  Homer.  For  ApoUonius,  Brunck, 
Wellauer  and  Lehrs  use  Ttept;  but  Merkel  has 
the  form  without  anastrophe. 
I.   101  og  TtEpi  ndvrag  'Epe;^S^et5a$  exExaaro, 
I.   138  og  TtEpi  Ttdvrag  ixaivvro  vavriXtriaiv. 
I.  670  TtEpi   hk  ^EVEaiv  dyopEVGai.     Cf.  11  186. 
I.  771  TtEpi  yap  iiEvmivEv  ETtEO^ai  \  ryjv  ohov, 

I.  1333  TtEpi   yap  ^'   d^og    yixev  eviaTtElv.     Cf. 

II  279. 
IL  20  TtEpi  5'  a^  YioT^vhEvxEa  ti^Ev  ofiox^T^.  Cf. 

^88. 

II.  53  TtEpi  5'  oly    EOav  iaxXyjuTEg.    Cf.  2  549, 

4>  105. 

II.  241  TtEpi  5'  avTE  Svo)  vlag  ^opkao. 

III.  1354  (ppi^Ev  Se  TtEpi  onfiapolg  oaxEEoaLV 
Sovpaai  t'  d^^iyvoig  xopv^Eoal  te  T^a^Tto^Ev- 
riaiv  I  "^ ApYiog  TEfiEvog.  Cf  h.  Cer.  472. 

IV.  181  TtEpi  yap  hiEv,  Cf  E  566=P  666, 1  433, 
A  557;  X  96. 

IV.  1029=1381  CO  TtEpi  Syj  lUEya  ^Epraroi. 

—  Ilept  r  cifi^L  TE  — 

This  double  preposition,  which  is  the  equiv- 
alent for  the  Homeric  d^iptnEpi,  occurs  three 
times  in  ApoUonius.  In  HI.  633  it  is  used  in 
case-construction,  as  it  is  also  in  P  760,  the  only 
example  of  TtEpi  t'  d^<pi  te  in  Homer.  In  the 
other  two  passages,  ApoUonius  uses  it  in  the 
absolute  sense. 


-46- 


—  47  — 


n.  1211  rolog  ^uv  6 fig  TUpi  r'  du^pi  re  Ipurat. 

Cf.  h.  Cer.  276. 
IV.  158  Ttepi  r'  dfupi  re  vripirog  6S//>7 1  <pap^dxov 

vnvov  e^aXke. 

—  rieptTtpo  — 
The  only  example  in  Apollonius  is  II.  869 
TteptTtpo  ydp   ei  ixexaaro  \  i^vvetv,  an  imitation 
oF  the  only  example  in  Homer  [A  180]  =11  699 
nspLTtpo  ydp  lyx^^  ^vev. 

-np6- 

In  Apollonius  the  adverbial  npo  is  used 
only  in  the  temporal  sense;  in  Homer  it  is  tem- 
poral (A  70;  a  37)  and  local  (H  188).  The 
examples  from  the  Argonautica  are: 

I.  1246  Ttpo  yap  ai^Tot  ivi  ara^uolai  vofiijeg  sT^aav, 

II.  1045  Ttpo  yap  dyxv^  reivato  ro^a. 

III.  385  Ttpo  ydp  arro;  dim4/aro  ^EtltxioLaiv, 
III.  1173  [ne^Ttov]  Ttpo  fiev  avrov  dprjifiXov  Te- 

ylauwj'a. 

III.  1197  Ttpo  ydp  r'  aXiyvvev  exaara, 

IV.  84  Ttpo   ydp  r  dvafavSd  rervxtai  ndvra 
fidX\ 

IV.  558  Ttpo   re  ^vpia  nvj ^av^svrag. 

—  npoTtpo  — 

This  preposition  is  not  found  in  Homer. 
Apollonius  has  it  three  times,  once  in  case  con- 
struction and  twice  in  the  absolute  sense. 


^ 


^if 


m  "W        ilBlifc 


»1 


III.  1012  nponpo  h'  d<pei6riaaaa  ^vu^eog  e^eXe  ^d- 
rprig  \  fdpfiaxov, 

IV.  1233  ^f-^ZP^^  Lxovro  \  TipoTtpo  ^idTj  evho'^i 
2i5pTir. 

—  Hpog  — 

Ylpog  is  the  only  preposition  which  occurs 
adverbially  in  good  Attic  prose.  Cf.  Kuehner- 
Gerth,  Sec.  443,  2.  For  this  reason  it  is  not 
surprising  to  find  only  four  examples  in  Apol- 
lonius, viz.: 

II.  222  ov  ydp  /lovvov  .  .  .  Ttpo$  5'  eri.  This 
example  is  interesting  and  especially  note- 
worthy. It  has  no  parallel  in  Homer,  and 
it  is  evidently  a  poetic  variant  for  the  ordi- 
nary prose  expression:  ov  ^ovov,  d/l/ld  xal 
(Lat.  non  solum,  sed  etiam). 

III.  232  Ttpog  he  xal  avroyvov  an^apov  dhd^av- 
rog  aporpov  \  ^Aaaer.  Cf.  E  307  K  108 
(TtoTt),  N  678,  n  86,  X  59;  e  255,  etc. 

III.  1045  Ttp6$  Se  xal   aurw  hovpl  ddxog  nena- 
Xayfievov  earo  \  xal  ^tfog, 

IV.  527  Ttpog  S'avrol  ifiYixoLvocdvro  xeT^ev^ov. 

—  Xvv  — 

Although  Vogrinz,  Monro  and  Haggett  do 
not  admit  the  adverbial  use  of  avv  in  Homer,  it 
seems  from  the  context  that  in  cj  378  avv  is  an 
adverb;  also  in  K  224  (cf  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec. 


( 


-48- 

443)  and  in  "P  879.— At  any  rate,  this  use  ob- 
tains in  ApoUonius,  who  has  it  ^sometimes  in 
phrases  where  Homer  would  use  afia  (adv) . 
I    74  avv  xal  rpkog  ^ev  'Oil^ig.  Cf.  Eunp.  Iph. 

A.  268;  H.  F.  785.  , 

I.  202  avv  he  naXaif/owo?  Aepvoi.  nan  a^levioio. 
I.  998=IV.  253  <Tt»»'  he  xal  uXXoi.     Cf.  o  387. 
III.  518  avv  he  xal  Olveihrn. 
III.  1174  avv  he  xal  Ai^^ihriv. 
More  noteworthy  are: — 
I.  156  avv  he  Uepixlvtievog  iiYi^rnog  ofTo  veeg^i. 
ni    707    avv   he  xdp>7  xoTiTtoig   nepixa^^alev, 
'  which  Lehrs  translates  by  "unaque  caput 

sinui  injecit." 
IV.  1164  avv  he  rig  aiel  \  Tttxpj?  Tia^fiefi^^xev 

ev^ooavvipaiv  dvii^.  ^ 

Very  curious  is  III.  700  avv  re  dpj?- 
areioa  neXea^i.  I  prefer  with  Wellauer  to  take 
avvas  a  simple  adverb  here,  though  tmesis 
with  the  verb  {aiv  .  .  .  TuXea^i)  is  pos- 
sible. The  scholiast  thought  even  of  tmesis 
with  the  noun  {avv  .  hpr,areifa=n  avvepyog), 
for  which  compare  the  chapter  on  the  preposi- 
tions in  adverbial  phrases. 


—  49  — 

Note: — Here  may  also  be  mentioned  the 
five  examples  from  ApoUonius  in  which  the  pre- 
position is  equivalent  to  a  compound  verb,  i.  e. 
the  idea  of  the  verb  is  so  subordinate  to  the 
preposition  that  the  verb  is  dropped  altogether. 
This  use  is  more  common  in  Homer  than  in 
ApoUonius. 
' Ava=dvd<iTy!^i  TV.   1322.     Cf.  Z  331,  I  247, 

2  178;  a  13. 
'Av=dveary!  I.  494.    Cf.  3  115. 
ndpa=ndpsari  IV.  1260,  1272,   1553.  Cf.   A 

174,  E  603,  ete.     Homer  has  also  evi=ev- 

eari,  S   603,  846,  i  126,  Ti  267,  a  355,  ete. 
'Eni=e7teari  ^  92,  n  315;  N  104;   and  /^era^ 

fiereati  <p  93. 


—  51  -- 


CHAPTER  III. 


r- 


I 


PREPOSITIONS    USED     IN     THE    SO- 
CALLED   TMESIS. 

NATURE  OF  TMESIS. 

Closely  connected  with  the  independent  adverbial 
use  of  prepositions  is  the  use  of  the  so-called  tmesis. 
The  one  overlaps  the  other  so  much  that  the  two 
are  not  always  to  be  distinguished  by  any  fixed  line. 
The  difference  is,  that  in  the  case  of  tmesis  the 
preposition  is  not  so  much  an  independent  adverb ; 
but  it  is  rather  felt  to  constitute  with  the  verb  a  unit, 
although  it  still  has  an  independent  position  in  the 
sentence.  **The  clearest  cases  of  tmesis,"  as  Monro 
(p.  164)  says,  "are  those  in  which  the  compound 
verb  is  necessary  for  the  construction  of  the  other 
words  in  the  sentence  ;  e.  g.  «5?  7r«r  an  Alv^iav  iU/irjv, 
or  OTTO  d"  eff^ero  iiktHov  *  promised  hire. '  ' ' 

In  the  Homeric  language  there  can  hardly  be  any 
question  of  tmesis  in  the  strict  sense,  i.  e.  a  splitting 
of  a  compound  verb,  so  that  other  words  come  be- 
tween the  preposition  and  the  verb.  The  apparent 
cases  of  tmesis  are,  for  the  greater  part,  not  the 
result  of  division,  but  the  maintenance  of  an  earlier 
usage  in  which  the  preposition  as  an  independent 
word  received  an  independent  position  in  the  sentence, 
when  as  yet  the  fusion  of  both  in  the  compound  had 
not  taken    place.     (See   Kiihner-Gerth,   p.   530). 


—  52  — 

The  Greek  grammarians  used  the  term  r/ir7/T£?,  because 
they  took  as  their  norm  the  later  established  usage 
and  looked  on  the  independent  position  of  the  prepo- 
sition in  the  Homeric  language  as  the  result  of  the 
actual  splitting  of  the  compound  verb. 

The  difficulty  of  classifying  the  various  usages  of 
the  prepositions   is   generally   recognized  ;  but  it  is 
most  embarrassing,  when  there  are  three  possibilities 
of  construing  the  preposition  :—  ( i )  as  an  independent 
adverb.  (2)  in  tmesis  with  the  verb,  or  (3)  with  a  case. 
No  crucial  test  can  be  fixed  for  determining  these  puz- 
zling cases.     After  all  sifting  and  shifting  and  com- 
bining of  results,  the  difficulty  remains  a  matter  of 
personal   opinion.     An    attempt   to  lay  down  some 
objective  principle  by  which  to  determine  the  different 
usages    would    fail    of   its    purpose.      The     words 
of  Goethe  could  well  be  applied  here  :     **Ks  irrt  der 
Mensch,  so  lang  er  strebt/'     Hence  the  treatment  of 
those  doubtful  cases  is  largely  subjective.     This  ac- 
counts for   the  differences  in  the  statistics.     Thus, 
T.  Moramsen  gives  as  the  total  of  t^v  with  the  dative 
in  Homer  the  figure  181  ( II.  107  Od.  74);  but  Hag- 
gett  has    188   (II.  113,  Od.    75).     Vogrinz  has  for 
Tre/ot  69  cases  with  the  genitive,  84  with  the  dative  and 
62  with  the  accusative,  against  which  numbers  Hag- 
gett  has  79  examples  with  the  genitive,  85  with  the 
dative,  and  72  with  the  accusative. 

T.  Mommsen   (p.  42 )  thinks  that  in  a  case  like 

O  400  Ai£^«  ffi-i^  "^^  ^«'  akftoi  ripTZsrat    dvijp^    it  is  jUSt    aS 
correct  to  connect  fJ-srd  with  aXyetrt  as  with  ripnerat. — 

Delbruck,  Grundr.    p.   653  fif.    cites  28   cases  from 
Homer  in  which  with  equal  right  and  with  no  change 


\- 


—  53  — 

in  meaning  either  case  construction  or  tmesis  may  be 
admitted  Compare  also  as  a  good  instance  of  the 
equivalence   Aesch.    Pro.    20.    axovrd  d  axiuv  donhnot^ 

yaXxeo/iafTt  |  TzpumzatTnakeniTU)  raif5'  (iTzavHpmTztp  T^nyw^  but 
line  56  TtanadXeoe  r/x)?  Tzirpai^. 

Hoffmann  (Progr.,  l,iineberg,  1857-1858 )  at- 
tempted to  formulate  rules  by  which  to  decide 
whether  tmesis  or  case-construction  is  to  be  preferred. 
His  rules  may  be  stated  briefly  as  follows  : 

I.  The  preposition,  when  separated  from  the  case 
by  the  caesura  of  the  verse,  is  to  be  construed  with 
the  verb.     As  examples  are  cited  : 

A  53  hvTfiiap  /j.sv  dvd  ^rrparov  w^ero  xT^Xa  f^eolo. 

B  1^2  X^ooiii^tp^  ^r£  5'  djupt  Tij(pu)ii  yalav  lfid(T(T7j. 

O  607  d<p)jn(Tfio^  dk  Tzsp}  (TTOfMi  ytyyern^  r«>  dk  ol  offtre.  .  . 

II.  The  preposition  is  to  be  construed  with  the 
verb  when  an  important  word,  with  an  objective 
emphasis  of  its  own,  stands  between  the  preposition 
and  its  case  ;  e.  g.  O  266  dfi(p\  dk  /arrac  |  (i>/iot<^  ditrffuvrai. 

Note:  —  An  attributive  genitive  has  no  objective 
emphasis  of  its  own ;  hence  in  S  378  «va  governs 
Ye(popa<s ;  in  A  44  ^olt'  belongs  to  xapij>u}>^  etc. 

III.  The  preposition  should  be  taken  with  the 
verb,  when  the  verb  stands  between  the  preposition 
and  the  supposed  case  ;  e.  g.  /^  3  7:£p\  dk  ^i<po^  d^h  »^ir' 

OJ/IW, 

IV.  The  preposition  should  be  taken  with  the 
verb  when  the  preposition  stands  after  the  verb,  but 
not  immediately  before  the  case ;  e.  g.  ^  198  f^aXhtv  t* 

ditd  ddxpu  Trapstwv  ;  »5^  149  trxidaffov  d'  dnd  xijdea  {^ufioo. 

These  rules  are  too  arbitrary  to  be  of  any  great 
value  and  to  be  strictly  applied  in  each  case.     Some- 


] 


1 


ll 

1 


—  54  — 

times  they  are  positively  objectionable,  as  may  be 
seen  when  they  are  put  to  the  test.  The  first  rule  is 
evidently  based  on  the  principle  that  the  preposition 
when  standing  immediately  before  its  case  is  a  pro- 
clitic and  so  constitutes  with  the  following  noun,  as  it 
were,  a  single  word.  In  consequence,  if  case- 
construction  be  assumed,  there  cannot  be  a  caesura 
at  this  point.  The  application  of  this  rule,  however, 
is  often  restricted  by  the  fact  that  another  caesura  or 
diaeresis  can  be  found  to  satisfy  the  requirements  of 
the  verse.  Thus  all  the  examples  cited  in  support  of 
the  rule  may  be  scanned  with  the  Bucolic  Diaeresis. 
In  the  first  it  must  be  done  because  fiva  nrparov  (  A  lo, 
53i  384 ;  ^  209,  436  ;  K  66.  82,  141,  etc.)  has  become 
a  fixed  phrase  like  the  Sanskrit  prdti  vdram  (  accord- 
ing to  wish),  dnu  dyun  (throughout  the  days). 
Cf.  Delbriick,  Grundr.  p.  653. 

As  regards  Apollonius  this  rule  is  of  no  practical 
importance.  In  three  examples  the  masculine  caesura 
falls  between  the  case  and  the  preposition  evi  ( I  94, 
IV.  986,  1667  ).  But  as  the  post- positive  preposi- 
tion has  a  strong  accent  of  its  own,  this  is  in  itself 
less  objectionable.  Besides  in  all  these  lines  there 
is  a  Bucolic  Diaeresis  which  satisfies  the  metre  and  so 
renders  unnecessary  the  change  from  eVt,  which  is  the 
reading  of  the  MSS. ,  to  cw  which  has  been  made  by 
Gerhard,  Lect.  Apoll,  ch.  8,  De  Caesura  p.   129. 

The  second  rule  is  followed  by  Ameis ;  Cf.  his  note 
to  i?  80,  while  T.  Mommsen  (p.  41  ),  takes  the  op- 
posite view.  Kiihner-Gerth  ( p.  533 )  admits  the 
rule  with  some  exceptions  (  A  831 ,  ^  1 15,  <  535,  X  155. ) 
For  exceptions  in  Apollonius  see  IV.,  1062,  1734. 


•t 


^^^/ 
^^^H^ 


—  55  — 

In  like  manner  the  third  and  fourth  rules  are  not 
absolute,  though  they  are  perhaps  less  objectionable 
than  the  first  and  the  second.  The  general  tendency 
is  to  allow  tmesis  the  preference  whenever  this  can 
be  done  ;  because  originally  the  case  did  not  depend 
directly  on  the  preposition,  but  on  the  verb  +  the 
preposition.     Cf.   Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  428,  4-5. 

PURPOSE  OF  TMESIS. 

"  The  ^hos  of  tmesis,"  says  Haggett,  '*as  well  as 
that  of  the  adverbial  use  is  seen  from  the  fact  that  it 
belongs   predominantly    to    the   higher    spheres    of 
poetry.     It  lays  stress  on  the  preposition  by  giving  it 
an   independent  place    in  the    sentence."     In    epic 
poetry  tmesis  is  used  almost  unconsciously  and  unin- 
tentionally.    Its  effect  is  simply  to  give  emphasis  or 
vividness.  In  tragic  and  lyric  poetry,  on  the  contrary,  it 
is  a  figure  of  speech  and  an  ornament  of  style.  In  epic 
it  belongs  to  the  idiom  ;  in  lyric  and  tragic  poetry  to 
the  poet.     Thus  we  find  that  while,  on  the  whole, 
tmesis  is  rarer  in  tragic  and  lyric  poetry,  individual 
differences  exist  between  the  great  poets.    Aeschylus 
has  15  cases  of  tmesis,  chiefly  in  lyric  passages  and 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis.  Sophocles  has  20  examples, 
principally  in  dialogue  and  for  the  purpose  of  vivid- 
ness.    Euripides  uses    it   82    times.     With  him    it 
is  to  emphasize,  to  make  more  plastic  and,  above  all, 
to  adorn.     Pindar  has  33  cases,  used  for  all  purposes. 
Aristophanes  limits  its  use  to  parody  in  the  chorus. 
Herodotus  uses  it  quite  often,  because   his  history 
has  the  character  of  an  Epos.     Attic  prose  writers 
have,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  curious  cases, 


'] 


-56- 

avoided  tmesis.  Cf.  Pierson,  Rh.  Mus.  1857,  and 
Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  345 

Apollonius  has  205  examples  of  tmesis ;  Homer 
has  1359,  showing  that  Apollonius  has  approximated 
the  norm  of  epic  poetry. 

It  may  be  noticed  that  tmesis  is  sometimes  con- 
venient for  metrical  purposes,  when  the  compound 
verb  could  otherwise  not  be  used  on  account  of  too 
many  short  syllables  in  succession ;   as  in  v4  98  djtd 

jtaTp\  tpiXtfi  ddfievat 

POSITION. 

The  preposition  in  tmesis  usually  precedes 
the  verb.  Only  rarely  it  follows.  This  ana- 
strophic  tmesis  occurs  in  tragedy  only  in  a  few 
doubtful  cases  Cf.  Schumacher,  De  Praepositionum 
cum  tribus  casibus  conjunctarum  usu  Euripideo.  p. 
68.  When  the  preposition  precedes  the  verb,  import- 
ant words  may  intervene  and  the  preposition  and  the 
verb  may  stand  in  different  lines.  When  the  prepo- 
sition follows  the  verb,  important  words  may  inter- 
vene, but  the  verb  and  the  preposition  are  always  in 
the  same  line,  and  rarely  separated  by  the  caesura. 
The  following  lists  show  the  facts  for  Apollonius. 

A.      PREPOSITION  BEFORE  THE  VERB. 
(  198  IN  ALL.) 

i)  With  words  like  U^  ydp^  Ti,  fiiv^  d'ap  intervening: 
I.  110,  321,  348,  385,  400,  485,  673,  730,  735, 
1018,  1026,  1 155,  II 70;  II.  28,  58,  184,  202,  274, 
493»  904,  926,  1043;  III.  I.  112,  311,  631,  649, 
670,  1 166;  IV.  329,  393,  594,  1275,  1330,  1348, 
1401.  1627,  1669,  1701.  1744,  1759.     Total  41. 


J'J 


—  57  — 

2)  With  more  important  words  intervening : 

a)  Preposition  and  verb  in  the  same  line  : 

I.  218,  262,  280,  344,  349,  364,  399.434,  526,  541, 
566,  596,  639,  697,  747,  755,  763,  850,  1059,  1 144, 
1 197,  1198,  1268,  I284^  1356;  II.  14,  94,  183,  191, 
201,  355,  456,  534,  563,  581,  608,  693,  742,  894,  926, 
933»  1071'  1128,  1192,  1219,  1279;  III.  157, 
205,  231,  261,  269,  280,  291,  295,  371,  378,  424, 
486,  511,  591,  648,  650,  746,  750,  791,  821,  868,  888, 
889,  929,  946,  958,  961,  1067,  1189,  1209,  1230, 
1359;  IV.  83,  208,  225,  298.367,392,  409,461,  478, 
484*  493>  547,  599.  609,  640,  683.  867,  892,  1016, 
1038,  1063,  1076,  1104,  1134,  1146,  1171,  1199,  1265, 
1270,  1281,  1292,  1301,  1325,  1350,  1392,  1436, 

1533,  1534,  1550,  1577,  1654,  1709,  1744,  1777. 
Total  123. 

b)  Preposition  and  verb  in  different  lines: 

I.  381,  392,  396,  1028,  1079,  iiio,  1205,  1231; 
n.  91,  530.  701,  930;  III  154.  516,  725,  873, 
1203,  1235;  IV.  603,  645,  747,  983,  1031,  1123, 
1181,  1415,  1669,  1675,  1677.  Total  29. 

B.      PREPOSITION  AFTER  THE  VERB. 
(  12   IN   ALL.) 

1 )  No  word  intervening : 

III.     831,  1135,  1192;  IV.  307,  600.     Total  5. 

2)  Particles  intervening : 

1.     979,  1 195;  II.     682;  IV.  750,  1312.   Totals. 

3)  More  important  words  intervening : 
III.     46,  1017.     Total  2. 


\i 


\f 


-58  ~ 

Tmesis  is  less  frequent  in  Apollonius  than  in 
Homer.  Apollonius  has  one  example  per  28.4  lines  ; 
Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  has  one  per  20.4  lines  on 
the  average  (II.  21.9,  Od  18.8).  The  more  im- 
portant differences  in  the  numerical  relations  of  the 
individual  prepositions  are  the  following :  In  Homer 
the  preposition  used  most  frequently  in  tmesis  is 
xard  (210);  in  Apollonius  it  is  i^^i  (36).  *Avd  gains 
and  xard  loses  in  Apollonius ;  similarly  Sid  and  e«V. 
Apollonius  has  on  if*  twice  in  tmesis :  Homer  never. 
Upfh  occurs  only  once  in  tmesis  in  Apollonius ;  but 
Homer  has  36  examples  of  this  use.  ///><>  and  oko 
Apollonius  does  not  employ  in  tmesis  ;  though  Homer 
has  Trpd  eight  times  and  urJ  eigthy-two  times  in 
tmesis. 

Other  differences  in  usage  will  be  noted  in  the 
more  detailed  account  of  each  preposition  in  tmesis. 
According  to  the  divergence,  the  following  sub- 
divisions are  made,  wherever  required  : 

1 )  Apollonius  and  Homer  both  have  tmesis. 

2)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  Homer  has  only  the 
compound  verb. 

3)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  the  compound  verb  is 
post- Homeric. 

4)  Apollonius  has  tmesis ;  the  compound  verb  is 
not  quotable. 


—  59- 

TABLE    SHOWING    THE     FREQUENCY    OE    EACH    PREPOSITION 

IN  APOI,I,ONIUS,  COMPARED  WITH  THEIR 

FREQUENCY  IN  HOMER. 


Prepos. 


iK 

ivd 
iw6 

Kard 
iw 

Sid 

xepl 

dfjL<f>L 

ci)v 
wapd 
furd 

dt 
ifwip 
7rp6s 

SUk 

irapdK 

inriK 

hr€K7rp6 

wp6 
xnrb 


Total 


I. 

7 

II. 
7 

III 
II 

IV. 
II 

Tot.inAp. 

36 

3 

5 

II 

12 

31 

7 

6 

7 

8 

28 

5 

I 

5 

10 

21 

5 

5 

4 

5 

19 

12 

I 

I 

3 

17 

0 

5 

2 

4 

II 

3 

I 

3 

2 

9 

I 

I 

I 

4 

7 

I 

2 

I 

3 

7 

0 

0 

2 

3 

5 

I 

I 

2 

0 

4 

I 

0 

0 

2 

3 

0 

0 

0 

2 

2 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

I 

0 

I 

0 

0 

I 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

I 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 
48 

0 
36 

0 

50 

0 
71 

0 

205 

Total  in  Homer. 

207  (II.  104,  Od.  103) 

208  (II.  107,  Od.  loi) 
71  (II.  35.  Od.  36) 
115  (II.  74,  Od.  41) 


210  (II. 
126  (II. 

19(11. 
68  (II. 

67  (11. 
37  (11. 

55  (II. 
20  (II 

26  (II. 


109,  Od. 
.  72,  Od. 
,  10,  Od. 

34,  Od. 
30,  Od. 

19,  Od. 

21,  Od. 
.  12,  Od, 

14,  Od. 


loi) 
54) 
9) 
34) 

37) 
18) 

34) 
8) 
12) 


36  (II.  19,  Od.  17) 


I  (tA  16) 

3  (7  175,  *  149.  'f  129) 
o 

8  (II.  6.  Od.  2) 

82  (II.  49>   Od.  33) 

1359  (II   715,  Od.  644). 


This  table,  as  also  those  in  the  other  chapters, 
shows  the  prepositions  not  alphabetically,  but  accord- 
ing to  their  decrease  in  frequency  in  Apollonius.  In 
the  more  detailed  account,  however,  the  alphabetical 
order  is  observed. 


f 


—  60  — 

— dfi^L — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

^ A^^L-[iaXkid:  I.  262  (irityip  5'  d^<p'  avrov 
^B^oT^ri^Bvyi.  Tmesis  is  here  suggested  by 
d^i^i-neaovaa  in  line  270.  Compare  also  o 
347  di^fi  ^€  TtaiSi  <pi?iO)  /Jd/le  7t>7;gef,  and  ^P  97 
dfi^i^akovre  dTJXriT.ovg.,  also  Eurip.  Bacch.  1364 
Tt  II  dii^i^d?iXsig  ;tfpcr(V;  A  clearer  example 
of  tmesis  is  seen  in  IV.  747  d^Kpl  ^e  nenTiOv  | 
6<|)3aX^otai  ^akovaa,    Cf,  2  204;  x  365,  451,  etc. 

^AfLi^i-evvvfii:  III.  1203  d^t^l  5f  ^pog  | 
latraro;  IV.  1436  d^tpi  Si  fiipfia  neTyopiov  earo 
Xeovrog,     Cf.  T  293;  x  542,  ^  529. 

'Afxipi-ri^yjlii:  II.  1071  d^<^i  5f  ;^a>lxetag 
x6piJ^a$  x6(paX'^aiv  e^evro,     Cf.  K  261;  v  431. 

'Afi^i'X^u:  IV.  645  d^<^f  ydp  a(r>7r  |  r.epa 
XBV€  3ed.     Cf.  >7  14,  3  278,  296. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 

THE  COMPOUND. 

^AfjL^L'8iveonai:  IV.  1533  rpig  5'  dfi(pi  avv 
evTsat  Sivi^^evreg.  Similarly  is  nepl  in  tmesis 
in  I.  1059.  Cf  X.  165;  (where,  however.  La 
Roche  construes  nepc  with  tioXlv),  ^  562,  etc. 
Aesch.  Pers.  457. 


—  61  — 


3         / 

va- 


a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'Av-aipeo:  I.  1205  drd  ro^a  xai  iovg  \ 
Sepfia  S-'  fXor;  III.  157  am  ^'  dyxvXov  el/iero 
ro^ov.     Cf  A  32. 

'Av-iaryjf.u:  II.  493  dvd  S'  larar  ^lyjacov,  \  dv 
he  BopyjLOi  vhg.     Cf  *  886,  etc. 

'Ara-/3atV(o:  I.  1110  av  he  xai  avrol  \  (3alvov; 
III.  1235  dv  he  xai  avrog  \  (iyjaaro.  Cf  P.  541; 
y  481,  492. 

^ Av'ej(pnai:  I.  673  dvd  5'  eaj(^e^e  hetpriv, 
Cf  p  291. 

'Ava-Xro):  III.  821  nvxvd  K  dvd  xXyilhag 
eCdv  Xveaxe  S'l^pduov.     Cf.  1 178,  562,  yl  636. 

'Aj^-6pri;^ut:  I.  349  dvd  S'  avrog  dpi^iog  cdpvvr 
""Iriacdv;  IV.  1350  dvd  S''  vfieag  opcrat.  Cf.  ^ 
812;   ^3. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   HOMER  HAS  ONLY 

THE  COMPOUND. 


f    9 


'Av-aeipcdi  I.  1268  xai  dvd  nT^atvv  av^^v 
deipcdv  I  IyiOlv  iivxYifia;  II.  14  npiv  x^lpeoaLV 
ifi'^CLV  idg  dm  ;tetpa$  delpai;  III.  873  dv  he 
XtT(^voLg  I  Xenra2,eovg  .  .  .  deipov;  IV.  1550 
yaiyjg  5'  dvd  (3(^^ov  deipag  \  ^elvi  dpiaryieaat 
TtpoLGxero. —  For  the  compound  compare  III. 
72,  IV.  94,  1497;  also  H  130,  X  399,  <!>  508, 
*  614,  882;  [i  402,  etc. 


f 


—  62  — 

'Av4pxofiat:  IV.  1627  37^0$  5'  rMiog  ^h 
eSv,  dvd  S'  rjXv^ei  darjjp  |  av?.tog. 

'Ava-xatu:  II.  701  8vayeu>g  Upo)  dvd  5(7tAda 
fiyjpia  ^o^o)  \  xalov. — For  the  compound  com- 
pare 7]  13,  I  251,  etc. 

'Ava-ando:  II.  926  oi  5'  dm  fziv  xpacnvag 
Xalipog  andaav.     Cf.  N.  574  and  A  480. 

' Ava-Ti'^Yifii  "dedicate'^    II.  930  av  hk  xal 

^0p(p6vg  \  ^^X€  ^VpYlV, 

' Ava-<paivo(iai:  IV.  1709  rolac  ^S  rig  27top- 
dhcdv  /3a«7  dvd  roipp  iipadv^y^  \  v^aog.  Cf.  A  62, 
174;  X  29.  In  II.  1043  ApoUonius  has  ix  in 
tmesis  with  the  same  verb. 

C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

'Av4^o^ai:  I.  1170  dvd  h'  e^ero  atyri  \ 
Ttanraivciv;  IV.  1330  nanryivag  dv  dp  e^er  ini 
X^vog. 

'Av'€L7ielv  ^^announce'':  IV.  1199  oy  o)g  rd 
Ttpura  SixYig  dvd  nsipar'  ssltibv.  Cf.  Find.  P. 
I.  61,  X.  9. 

' Ava'xaXvnr(^:  IV.  1348  av  h"  sxd^v^v  \ 
TiinTuov,     Cf.  Eurip.  Iph.  Aul.  1146. 

'A^a-xiveoi:  III.  929  rdcdv  rig  fieaayjyvg  dvd 
nrspd  xivYiaaaa,     Cf.  Soph.  Tr.  1259. 

'Av-ox^i^o:  IV.  1675  dv  Si  /iJapfia^  |  ox^i- 
^uv  Xdiyyag,  For  the  actual  compound  in 
ApoUonius  compare  I.  1167;  III.  1297. 


1 

/- 


i 


-63- 

^Ava-ravvG):  I.  344  6  S'  avro^evy  ev^a  nep 
Yiaroy  I  he^irepYiv  dvd  x^^f^  ravvaaaro, 

d)  APOLI.ONIUS  HAS   TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

^ Ava-vcifid^):  III.  1230  dv  Se  noXvppivov 
v6fia  adxog,  dv  Si  xal  lyxog.  That  tmesis  is 
intended,  is  seen  from  such  examples  as  are 
given  at  the  end  of  this  chapter,  viz.:  I.  1284; 
II.  493;  III.  516;  III.  1230. 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

^A^aipeo:    IV.   1038    aiVdp    iuoi    dno  Syj 

^apvg  etXfTo  Sai^idv  \  dyXatag;    IV.  1312  eXov 

S'  dno  %epaJ  xapriarog  .  .  .  neiO^v.    Cf.  V  294; 

K  458  rov  h^dno  fiev  xnSeyjv  xvveyjv  X6^a?i^^iv 

eXovro. 

^ Ano'^dXki^:  I.  979  ^dXev  S'  dno  hei^ara 

^v^ov.    Cf.  S-  149  axehaaov  S'  dno  xYihea  ^v^ov; 

also  B  183,  *  51;  Aesch.  Ag.  165. 

'Ano-iv(d:  I.  1195  eSv  S'  dno  Sep[ia  Xiovrog. 
Cf.  B261. 

^ Anjo-xehdvvv^i:  III.  1359  d^  dno  ;f6f//fpta$ 

ve^e^jag   Bxehaaoav   d^rai.       Homer    has    the 

form  dno-(TxsSdvvvfii  in  tmesis  in  ^  149,  [i  385. 

^Ano-xonru:    IV.  208  npvfivala   reco$    dno 

neic^ar  exo^ev,    IV.  1270   rovvex    iyco  ndaav 

(lev   dn    iXniSa  ^yjfii   xexofp^i.      Cf.    A    146; 

X  127. 


'/■ 


-64- 

'ATto-T.BiTtQi  I.  399  rolg  fieaGyjv  oloiaiv  and 
xkYilha  linovro  (for  them  alone  they  reserved 
the  middle  bench);  III.  1067  aTi'  o^^aXfiovg 
^.LTtBv  aih6g;  III.  1135  Ximva'  ano  TtarpiSa 
yalav;  IV.  750  Xelnov  b'ano  86fiara  Kipxyjg, 
Cf.  1437   (La  Roche);    Soph.  Ph.  1158,  1177. 

'Ano-XvG):  II.  456  no^iEov  5'  and  nYi^ar' 
elvaev  (the  genitive  is  adnominal;  cf.  III. 
1343).     Cf.  2  345,  tp41;  y  392,  ^  420. 

'A7to-7i6/£7tG>:  IV.  683  i[  5'  ore  hri  vvxl^v 
ano  Ssifiara   ne^^ev   oveipuv.     Cf.  (i  133  and 

'Ano-re^vca:  III.  378  and  yX^acag  re 
rafi6p;  IV.  983  and  narpog  \  firjSea  vriTieiug 
Irafie  Kp6vog,     Cf.  F  292;  Soph.  Ph.  1207. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 

THE   COMPOUND. 

'ATto-TiVc):  IV.  1325  and  ,  ,  .  tlvst'  duoi- 
^nv.     Cf.  r  286.  etc. 

C)  APOI.I.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

^  ' Ano-xoiiiCi^:  IV.  1104  ici  ano  narpl  xofiiaoai 

*  ATto-Xu^doiIY.  1415  ano  kylav\.,:^^Go(i€v, 
'AnO'VYiki^:  I.  364  ano  h'  elfiar' .  .  vyirjaavro, 
Cf.  Eurip.  Ion  875. 

' Ano^rpdnrcj:  III.  1017  arpdnrsv  "Epug 
fi^elav  and  ^Xoya. 


I 


I 


bi> 


-65- 

d)  APOLLONirS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 

QUOTABI^E. 

' ATtD-iie^iYiiiL:  I.  280  dno  i^vxriv  ^e^iftsv, 

— Slol — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Aia-xed^o:  IV.  392  Sid  r  mneSa  ndvra 
xedaaar,  IV.  1265  6id  Syj  ndXac  fjSe  xeda^yj  vyjvg, 
Cf.  0  322. 

ALa-xoGfiio):  III.  46  xocfiei  xP^^^h  ^^« 
xspxlSi.     Cf.  B  655;  t  157. 

Aia-riuvo:  II.  355  'A;t^P"^  avrrjv  Sid 
veio^i  rifivcdv  \  axpriv.     Cf.  P  522,  2  618. 

b)  APOI.LONIUS   HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER   HAS  ONI^Y  THE 

COMPOUND. 

Aia-eiho^ai:  II.  581  ev^a  xai  ev^a  8id 
nT^nvg  elSero  Uovrog.  For  the  compound 
compare  I.  546;  IV.  1358;  also  0535,  N  277. 

Aia-xeSdvvvfiL:  II.  1128  de^lXat  vyjog  .  ,  ,  Sid 
Sovpara  ndvr'  ixiSaaaav;  II.  1192  xecpy^v  ye 
xaxov  hid  xvfi  ixeSaaaev. 

Aia-oeva:  III.  670  Std  S'eaavro  ^afi^^^aaaa. 

C)  APOI.I,ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

Aia-nepdu;  11.  608  Sid  vyjl  nepT^ari;  IV. 
461  ^v  ovSe  Si  al^yjoi  nepoaaiv. 


—  66  — 

d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   TIIK   COMPOUND   IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

Aia-ravvG) :  IV.  599  8id  nrepd  xov<pa  ravvaaag. 

This  double  preposition  never  occurs  in 
tmesis  in  Homer.  ApoUonius  has  one  doubt- 
ful example,  which,  however,  as  it  seems,  is  to 
be  attributed  to  editors;  viz.:  IV.  409  ote  ^ri  (is 
ket  duai  vesa^ai.  The  reading  of  LG  is 
Sie^u^i,  which  is  the  same  pateographically 
as  5ie^  eiCkn, 

—  ex  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'E^-atpfo:  I.  396  ix  5*  dpa  ^eaariv  \  i^peov; 
II.  184  ix  h'  ?XfcT'  6<|)3aX|Uc5i^  yXvxepov  ^dog, 
Cf.  A  369,  A  116,  A  381;  ^  140,  etc. 

'Ex-^aivu:  I.  1018  ix  5'  olp  l/3wai^.  Cf. 
A  437,  438,  439,  T  113;  ^  456,  etc. 

'Ex-/3d>lX(j:  II.  926  ix  ^i  l3a?.6vreg  \  nda- 
fiar\     Cf.     A  436,  A  109. 

'Ex-ysTididi  I.  485  ix  5'  iyiXaaaev  d5>7V 
'A^py^iog  "iSag.     Cf.  Z  471. 

'E^-epfo^at:  III.  1166  ix  r'  ipeovro.  Cf. 
A  204,  233;  B  257;  x  63,  109. 

"Ef  a^i  "exibo'':  III.  112  ix  S'  laav  a^^u. 
Cf.  4^  370,  G)  501. 


. 


i  *f 


^" 


\ , 


i 


-67- 

'E^-epxoi^at:  II.  202  ix  S"  iX^oiv  fieydpoio. 
Cf.  K  140;  y  406,  S  121,  403,  740,  o  395,  n  165, 
343,  etc. 

Likewise  are  we  to  construe  in  the  follow- 
ing examples  ix  with  xtco,  though  that  verb 
does  nowhere  occur  in  the  actual  composition, 
and  for  this  reason,  it  seems,  ix-xio  has  been 
kept  out  of  the   dictionaries.      The   rule   of 
Haggett  "to  classify  as  adverbial  only  those 
instances  in  which  the  preposition  does   not 
in  Homer  enter  into  composition  with  the  verb 
and  so  cannot  be  said  to  be   separated   from 
it    by    tmesis,"   must    not    be    followed    too 
scrupulously.     Haggett  himself  did  not  do  so, 
since  with  Vogrinz  and  Monro  he  denies  the 
existence  of  the  independent  adverbial  use  of 
ix  in  Homer.     Hence  he  must  have  taken  ix 
with   xiev   in   o   492.      This   applies   also   to 
i^-dyvvfii,  i^'aiaao,  i^-aXeo^at,  ix-xakvivti^,  ix- 
peo,  and   c^-w^eco,  which    are    never   found   in 
Homer  as  actual   compounds,  though    tmesis 
has  to  be  assumed  in  the  case  of  each  one. 
Cf  r  367,  E  161,  N  655,  *  119;  ;.  559,  X  64,  etc. 

'Ex-xtG):  III.  269  ix  h'  avTyj  Ei8vla  Sdfiap 
XLEV  AlT^rao.  Cf  w  492  ix  5'  vlog  AoXtov  xiev, 
where  tmesis  is  confirmed  by  the  preceding 
i^-eX^^v.  The  other  two  examples  in  ApoUo- 
nius are  III.  650  ix  he  ndXtv  xiev  evSo^ev  and 


.pi 


EEV 


—  68  — 

III.  868  ix  he  ^vpa^e  xiovaa:    Cf.  2  29  ix  ^e 
^vpa^E  ISpa^ov. 

'Ex-Xav^dvo):  III.  280  ix  5'  oye  xapTtaXifi- 
Old  XaScoi'  noaiv  ovhov  auec4^Ev,     Cf.  ri  220. 

^Ex'TtiTtru:  III.  961  ix  5'  dpa  ol  xpahiyj 
arri^Eoiv  tiegev,  Cf.  yi  283;  also  K  94.— IV. 
1016  dig  i^ol  EX  nvxLval  ETtEOov  ^pEVEq, 

'Ex-peo:  IV.  1677  ix  hk  ol  i^oip  \  . 
Cf.  N  655,  4>  119;  y  455,  i  290. 

'Ex-^aividi  II.  1043  €x  5'  i^adv^ri  \  aXXog 
ini  nporepo)  TiEnoryjiievog,     Cf.  TI  299. 

'Ex-;^f(j:  II.  904  ix  5'  E^Eav  niavvoi  avEfioi 
Tiiva.     Cf.  A  525,  4>  180. 

b)  APOI.I.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER   HAS   ONLY  THE 

COMPOUND. 

'E^-LxvEo^ai:  III.  311  ix  S'  txo/iiea^a  [  dxT>7J' 
riTtEipov  TvpaYiviSog. 

'E^-ovoiiaivcd :  IV.  1744  ex  r  ovofiYjvEv 
AiaoviSyi.  Homer  has  i^-ovofid^a  in  tmesis. 
Cf.  A  361,  r  398,  etc. 

'Ex-TiEpduxi :  IV.  329  ix  5'  inEpiqaav  \  hoidg 
^ApTEfiiSog  Bpvyyjihag  dy^^o^i  vyjaovg.  Cf.  ri  35, 
^  561, 

'Ex-nrvu:  IV.  478  rplg  S'  i^  ayog  Inrva' 
686vruv.     Cf.  E  322. 


..^ 


flyi 


#1 


—  69  — 

C)  APOLI.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

'E^-ava-TtvECd:  III,  231  ix  Se  nvpog  Setvov 
aiXag  dunvEtEaxov;  cf.  III.  1291;  IV.  472.  For 
the  tmesis  within  the  double  preposition  com- 
pare Kuehner-Blass,  Vol.  II.  p.  321. 

'Ex-^odw:  III.  631  ix  5'  il36yjaav  \  j(^(d6[iEV0L, 
Cf.  Xen.  Cyr.  6,  10. 

^Ex-xELpij:  IV.  1031  xal  ix  ^Epog  ovTioov 
dvSpcdv  I  xELpETE  yYiyEVEidv,  Homer  has  dno-xEipid 
in  tmesis;  cf.  K  456,  N  546;  also  Eurip.  Hec.  910. 

'Ex-Xd^Ttw:  III.  371  ix  heol  o^L^iar  eXa^yi^ev. 

'Ex-Xeltio):  IV.  1401  ix  bi  Xinovtcov  |  .  .  .  . 
oLoruv;  IV.  1759  ix  Si  Xinovrag  \  ^ndprriv.  Cf. 
Eurip.  Andr.  1040. 

^Ex'Tipo-XECdi  IV.  603  ix  hi  (paEtvdg  \  r,?.Exrpov 
2,i(3dhag  (i^E^dpcdv  npo^Eovaiv  Epa^E, 

^Ex-pvo^ai:  IV.  83  ex  inEy  (plXoi,  pvaaa^E, 
Cf.  Eurip.  Bacch.  258. 

'Ex'^pd^Gi :  IV.  1123  ix  S'  dpa  naaav  \ 
TtE^pa^Ev  dyyEXiYiv.     Cf.  Aesch.  Pr.  950. 

d)  APOI.I.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

'Ex-Ttpo-td/lyla) :  IV.  1669  ix  S'  aihYi'ka  \ 
SEixYiTija  npotaTi^Ev, 


—  70 


71 


iv 


zni 


a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

"Efi-l3aLvu:  I.  381  iv  5'  dpa  Ti^vg  (Sy^aa^'. 
Cf.  q^  481. 

'E^.^aXXo:  1. 392  iv  U  ol  larov  \ ..  i^d?uovro. 
Cf  *  352; /3  330,  g  268. 

'Ev-eXavvu:  I.  526  iv  yap  ol  86pv  Mov 
i:^y!^aro.     Cf  T  259. 

''Ev^eLfii:  I.  730  iv  fiiv  eaav  Ki;xX6)7tf$. 
Similar  examples  are  I.  735,  747,  763.  Cf.  2 
419;  v  438;  also  h.  Ap.  395. 

'Ev-iYiui:  II.  274  iv  yap  eyjxev  |  Zevg  fievog 
axduarov  a^ptv;  III.  958  (ii^Xom  5'  iv  aanerov 
nxev  bi^vv.  Cf.  H  182,  n  291,  ^  177,  etc. 

'E/^-7ti7tT(i>:  I.  566  iv  U  liyvg  niaev  odpog. 
The  other  examples  in  Apollonius  are  I.  1028, 
1284;  IV.  393.  Cf  A  134,  0  485,  A  297, 
n  276,  *  9. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;     HOMER   HAS   ONLY  THE 

COMPOUND. 

'Ev-8p8i!)u:  1. 1198  iv  Si  nXarvv  ufiov  speiGEv. 
Ci.  I  383. 

'E^M-m7tX>7^<:  I.  697  iv  5'  dyopjj  nX^ro  ^p6oi\ 
Cf.  Herod.  11.  87. 

C)    APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

'Ey-xaXvnna:  IV.  1292  iv  Si  xdpYi  nenXoiai 
xaXv^^d fxevoi,     Cf  Arist.  Ran.  911;  PL  714. 


> 


^- 


a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

^En-atveG):  I.  348  inl  5'  YiveoVy  a>$  ixeTiSVsv  | 
^EpaxXeyjg;  III.  946  inl  Si  a^^Sov  r.vsov  afi^a, 
Cf  r  461;  II  294=352. 

'E7tt-/3d/i;i(j:  III.  1189  d  xai  nep  inl  c^vyd 
^oval  (SdXoiro;  III.  1192  vv^  S'  Innoiaiv  e^a'k'Xev 
em  ^vyd\  IV.  1146  la^e  ^'  ixdarYiv\aiS(Sig  Isfievyjv 
nep  0|U6)$  inl  ;t^^P*  /^aXeaS^ar,  IV.  1744  ruv  ap 
inl  ^vijariv  xpaSiyj  ^d7.ev  (Merkel).  Cf  fl  272; 
S  440,  ^  520,  T  58,  i;  4. 

'En-e'Xavvid'.  I  755  inl  Mi^pTtXo$  YiT^aGev 
Innovg.    Cf  H  223. 

'En-epxoi^ai:  IV.  493  inl  Se  a<pLaiv  yj^^v^e 
xovpyjl^pa^ofisvoig.  Cf  A  221;  (S429,>7  283,^152. 

'En-idXT^cdi  II.  183  tq  xat  oi  y^pag  ^iv  inl 
Srjvaidv  laXXev  [Zei;$].   Cf.  t  288,  o  474. 

'En-opvv^Li  I.  850  Ki;!ntpt$  yap  inl  ylvxvv 
Ifjiepov  cdpaev;  III.  516  inl  Si  rpirog  *lSag  \  «pro 
fxeya  ^povkdv,  inl  S'  vUs  TvvSapeoLO.  Cf.  ^V  759, 
689;  y  176,  ^  313. 

'E7t^-7teXo^at:  IV.  1654  onnote  firi  ol  in' 
dxdfiarog  ni'koi  ai6v.  Cf.  o  408. 

'Enc-ri^yilii:  II:  534  xal  i^'  lepd  ^evreg-,  II. 
693  inl  fiyjpia  ^rjaofiev  alyuv.  Other  examples 
are  IV.  609,  1301,  1534.  Cf  B  29,  A  41, 
2  317,  *  18. 


—  72  — 

'Eni-xSu:  II.  191  ini  (ivhaXeriv  bhfiYiv  x^ov, 
similarly  III.  205,  1209.  Cf.  0  158,  0  589; 
y  289,  ^  14. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONI.Y 

THE   COMPOUND. 

'E7t-aapw:  III.  591  6^vem<;  inl  ;ffipa  i^v 
xredreaaiv  deipetp, 

'Eni'xei^ai:  IV.  1392  ini  ^yjpyj  yap  hsiro  \ 
il^l^a.  For  the  compound  compare  III.  430;  also 

Z458. 

# 

'Em-6aaofiai:  II.  28  ini  8'  oaaErai  olo^ev 
olog    dj/^pa.  Cf.  P  381. 

'Eni-nei^ofzai:  III.  511  ^vfiog  iij  ini  ndyxv 
nenoi^ev  \  r.vopsri, 

'E7t£-ppco2/i;^f:  1.385  ini  h'  ipp6aavro  noheooiv, 
'£7t(-Tpf7ta):  I.  400  ini  5'  erpeTWv  aivriaavreg  \ 
Ttfpvv  ivareipyjg  oiT^ia  vy^og  Epva^at. 

C)  APOI,LONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

'E<^-a<pfG):  II.  1319  noXiecat  3'  ini  x^oog 
elTiE  napeiig.  Cf.  x  42  ndvrag  vno  x^pov 
Mog  elXev, 

'En-aiopso}:  1.639  rolov  a<pLv  ini  Uog  ^Joparo. 

'Eni-^pdxi^i  IV.  640  hivov  yap  ini  /liyag 
^t^poLX^^  ai^>7p, 

'Eni^xXv^cj:  I.  541  ini  Se  p6^ia  xU^ovro; 
II.  682  xXv^sv  5'  Int  xv^iaTa  ;tfp(T6j;  cf.  I.  257. 


L 


\ 

t 

i 


I 


\  r  i| 


y 


—  73  — 

'Em-Xa/z/?di^6) :  III.  750  daxd  fxaX  ov 
yiYihetav  ini  yT^vxepog  kd(3ev  vnvog;  IV.  1063 
o?>7  (iiv  ini  a^vyepyj  Tid^ev  aha, 

'Em-TtpiG):  IV.  1669  TievyaXsov  6'  ini  ol 
nplev  xoXov, 

'Ent-^ihpvvGi:  III.  831  dXoLq)ri\vexrapBri 
^aihpvver'  ini  X9^)  cf.  IV.  661. 

—  elg  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'ELa-voEi^:  I.  321  ig  h'  ivoYiaav.    Cf.  M  335. 

b)  APOtLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

'EiG^^dXku,:  IV.  594  ig  h'  l/3aXov  fivxarov 
poor  'EpiSavolo,  with  which  compare  I.  928. 
IV.  1577  Big  dXo^  o%a  /idXyjre;  cf.  IV.  637, 
824,  etc.  In  case-construction  the  phrase  would 
mean  "to  cast  into  the  sea",  '^to  throw  over- 
board ''rather  than  "to  put  out  to  sea ';  cf.  A  314. 

—  xard  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Ka^-atpeo):  III.  725  xdS  Se  ^iiv  dx?ivg\€lXev, 
Cf.  L  372  xdS  Se  fiiv  vnvog  YipEi;  also  X  426,  o 
496;  n  268. 

Kara-fiaivu:  III.  888  xar'  avro^i  /S^aar 
dnT^vYjt;,     Cf.  N  737,  0  384. 

KaTa-^d;iXa):  III.  154  xdS  Si  ^aEivQ 


—  74  — 


/3dXf  x(5X7t6).  Cf.  B  414,  692,  T  356,  E  305,  * 
125;  I  482,  539,  x  172,  etc. 

Kar-e^idi  II.  742  aiyri  5'  ovnore  nqv  ye  xard 
^Xoavpyjr  sxei  ax^r^v,  Cf.   B  560,  699;  t  6,  7.  497. 

KaTa-xayli;7tT(o:  I.  434  xah  h'  a^vhig  rd  ye 
ndvra  xaXv^i^avreg  nvxa  Syj^t};  II.  894  xar^ 
ai'ToSi  5'  dfi^e  xaXv^ei\axXeudg  xaxog  olrog,  Cf. 
A  460,  B  423,  Z  464,  P  594,  n  325;  y  457,  etc. 

Kara-zlaTtcj:  I.  1144  ^yjpeg  5'  f(?wi;oi;$  Tf 
xard  ^v^o^ovg  re  Xmovreg  \  oip'^aiv  aaivovreg 
ini^Xv^ov;  IV.  298  xar  avro^t  nalha  Xinovreg, 
Cf.  P  535,  *  201,  n  470;  x  209,  a  269,  ^  90,  etc. 

Kara-pfcj:  IV.  1701  xard  S'  eppeer  d(T;^a- 
Xocjj^Ti  I  5axpt'a.     Cf.  A  810,  11  109. 

Kara-  ;^ai):  IV.  367  xard  S'  or/looj^  at(y;go$ 
Ixeva  I  :^>7?wi;Tepa($.    Cf.  D  123;  yj  286,  X  433,  etc. 

b)  APOIXONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   HOMER  HAS  ONLY 

THE  COMPOUND. 

Kar-epvxcxi:  I.  1079  rovg  Se  xar'  av^L  \ 
vavriXXea^t  epvxov;  II.  530  dpicr^eg  5e  xar' 
av^L\^i[j.voi  epvxdfievoi.  Cf.  II.  287,  also  Z  192; 
a  315,  etc. 

Kar-epvo:  II.  933  xdS  5'  dpa  Xdt^og  ipvaad- 
[levot  ravvovro  \  eg  nohag  dfi(porepovg,  Cf.  €  261, 
^  151,  etc. 

Kar-evvd^u:  I.  1155  xara  S^  evvaaenovrov. 

Kara-xXdo):  IV.  1076  yj^e  Se  xovpYi\aivo7ia^yjg 
xard  (lOL  voov  ex?iaaev  avriouaa. 


i' 


—  75  — 

C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;  THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMKRIC. 

Kara-xU^G):  IV.  1281  [ofi^pog']  oare  (3o(3v 
xard  fivpia  exTivaev  epya.  Cf.  Archil.  8,  4. 

Kara-fiLfivu:  III.  648  xar  avro^i  ^i^vev, 
Cf.  *  163  nap  ai^i  fievov. 

Kara-vdo^ai:  1. 1356  Syj  ydp  pa  xar'  airo^i 
vdcaaro  Ttalhag,     Cf.  II.  522. 

d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS   TMESIS;   THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

Kara-ne'ke^i^id:  II.  91  xdh  he  liapelav\xelp 
inl  ol  neXefii^ev,  Cf.  the  scholiast,  and  Liddell 
and  Scott  s.  v. 

—  (lerd  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Mer-elTtov:  II.  1279ai'T/m  S'  'Ayxalog  rolov 
fierd  (.iv^ov  eemev;  cf.  III.  522  avrixa  h"  ^Apyog  \ 
rolov  enog  fiermnev  eelho^evoLOtv  de'^Tiov. 

Mera-rpeTtw:  III.  261  ^erd  5'  i^ufag  erpanev 
aiaa.  III.  649  fierd  S'  irpdner  avng  bniaoid  \ 
Grpe<pMa\     Cf.  A  199. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 

THE  COMPOUND. 

Mer-epxofiai:  I.  110  ^erd  5'  jyXuSei^  i?i8o- 
fievoiGiv,  For  the  compound  compare  I.  710; 
III.  348,  697;  also  4>  422;  a  229,  etc. 


/ 


n 


« 


—  76  — 

—  TCapd  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Tlapa'l3d?iX(o:  IV.  484  KoX^i8og  ay;^oS^6  i^ridg 
tYiv  Ttapa  vYia  (idXovro  \  yjpo>€g;  IV.  892  orig 
Ttapd  nela^a  ^dTiotro,     Cf.  E  369,  0  504,  N  35. 

nap-taT>7^i:  III.  1  E(  b'  dye  vvv,  ^Eparci, 
Ttapd  ^' laraao.     Cf.  E   809., 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND   IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

Xlapa-^erpeG):  IV.  1777  d/lXd  sxyiXoi  \  yalav 
KexponLYjv  napd  r  AvkiSa  fierpi^oavreg.  Cf.  I. 
595,  1116;  II.  939,  etc. 

C)  APOI^LONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

Ilap-opi'i^ac  III.  486  rsYjv  napd  ^Yirepa 
^v^oig  opvv^t,  ?iLGa6(i6vog.  Cf  Liddell  and 
Scott  s.  V. 

—  Ttapex  — 

IlapEx-afiei^Q:  II.  94  6  5'  dyx*  aiVoto  napsx 
yovv  yovvog  dfi6il3o)V]  cf  I.  581  nyjXidbag  Se 
Ttape^yjIjiEi^ov  ipinvag.  The  compound  does  not 
occur  in  Homer;  but  II.  94  is  a  close  imitation 

of  A  547. 

—  TtepL  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Ilepi-  €ifii:  II.  58  oaaov  iyci  f>ivovg  re  ^ouv 
nepi  r  eifii  rafieo^at,  Cf.  0  27  roaaov  iyo) 
Ttepi  t'  €1(1*  dv^p^Ttciv. 


I 

1 


*i 


r 


-77  - 

TLlepi'XaXvnrG) :  I.  218  Xvyaioig  ibd^aaae 
nepl  vifpeeGOi  xa/li;'v//a$;  III.  746  xai  rtva  naihidv  \ 
fiy^r epa  re^vecircjv  dbivdv  nepi  xCdy!  ixdXvnrev. 
Cf  K  201,  H  359,  n  735,  fl  20;  a  201. 

UepL'X,^o)'  III-  291  0)g  be  yvvYj  [laXepo)  nepl 
xdp<pea  ;^ei;aTo  5aXaj.     Cf.  B  19;  S-  282,  v  189. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC 

IIepL-fiod^):  III.  791  ryjXov  Se  noT^ig  nepi 
ndaa  ^o/iaei  \  noTfiov  e^iov.  Cf.  T  362  ye?iaaae  Se 
ndaa  nepi  x^^^- 

nept-baicd:  IV.  867/1  (lev  yap  (iporeag  aiei 
nepi  adpxag  eSatev,    Cf.  dix^L-Saio}  in  M  35. 

UepL-SevGi:  IV.  1134  (leXin  ^yipov  Tiepi  ;^et^o$ 
eSevaev. 

nept-Sivevu:  I.  1059  rpig  nepi  x^T^^eioig  avv 
revx^ai  Sivrj^evreg. 

Hepi'Tiafi^dvG):  1. 1197  nepi  arvnog  eXka^e, 

—  npog  — 

YlpoC'^dXTiid'.  I.  1231  npog  ydp  ol  hixp^iYivig 
dn*  ai^epog  avyd^ovaa\  ^dTJke  aeXyivaiyi,  Cf.  H 
421;  T  433. 

GVV 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

l,vV'eXavvG):  I.  1026  avv  S'  e?uaaav  (leXiag 
re  xai  danibag  aXXyj^OLaiv.     Cf.  cr  98. 


—  78  — 

^vy-X^ij:  II.  563  ovv  5i  g^lv  x^ro  ^v^og, 
Cf.  n  358  avv  5e  yk^ovri  vooq  ;f  i;to. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   HOMER   HAS  ONLY  THE 

COMPOUND. 

^vv-avrau^:  IV.  1181  avv  h'  ave^eg  dypoioratl 
i^ivreov.     Cf.  IV.  1484. 

^vv-e^yiS,  II.  201  pivoi  he  avv  oarSa  fiovvov 
hpyov. 

C)  APOI.LONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

^vfi'TtopavvG):  IV.  547  avv  yap  oi  dva^ 
nopavve  xeXev^ov. 

d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  cOMfOUND   IS  NOT 

QUOTABLE. 

^vv-afia^vvu:  III.  295  to  5'  [nvp]  d^ea^rov 
i^  okiyoio  ^a/loi;  aveypo^evov  avv  xdp^fa  ndvr^ 
a^a^vv  Si, 

I^vv-evveno):  IV.  1275  avv  5'  evvenov 
daxoL^ocavTL. 

—  imep  — 

'T7tfp-/3dXXw:  IV.  307  (3a7jliv  vnsp  ai»;c8m 
yat)7$;  IV.  600  ov  hi  Ti$  vhup  .  ,  |  o/cjyo^  hvvarai 
^akeetv  vnep.     Cf.  X  597. 


vnix 


T7tex-[3d?iXG):  I.  596  (lek^ov  hnex  Ttora/iolo 
^akslv   'Afivpoio   pie^pa,  which   the   scholiast 


f 


—  79- 

explains  by  napa^el^lai.  The  compound 
vTtex^akTud  is  not  found  in  Homer,  but  compare 
0  369  ovx  dv  v7te^€<pvye  ^rvyog  vharog  aind 
|)ef3pa. 

—  vTtexnpo  — 

IV.  225  vTtEXTtpo  he  Ttovrov  era^vev  vyjvg; 
cf.  vnexTtpo^eovaai  in  IV.  935.  The  word 
vTtexTtpordavu  is  a  "dna^  ^.eyofievov,'^ 

SUMMARY. 

I.  NUMBER  OF  EXAMPLES  OF  TMESIS  IN  APOLLONIUS. 

a)  Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer no 

b)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  where  Homer  has  only  the 

compound 39 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  in  compounds  that  are  post- 

Homeric 46 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  in  new  compounds 10 

Total,  205 

II.    NUMBER  OF  VERBS  USED  IN  TMESIS  BY 

APOLLONIUS. 

a)  Apollonius  and  Homer  both  have  tmesis 68 

b)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  Homer  has  only  the  compound..  33 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  the  compound  is  post-Homeric.  40 

d)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  the  compound  is  not  quotable...    9 

Total,  150 

Examples  in  which  the  preposition  is  repeated  in  a 
second  clause:  I.  1284  iv  d^  <T<f>ip  Kparepbv  m/cos  iriaeif,  iv  bk 
Ko\(pdi  I  daireros;  11.  493  dv&,  5'  iffrar'  'I-^auv,  \  Siv  8^  Bopijtot  vUv, 
III.  1230  Slp  S^  voXiLfppiPov  pdfia  a-dKos,  Slp  8^  Kal  ?7xoy;  III.  516  irl 
8i  rplros  'ISos  |  (Spro,  fiiya  <ppop^<ap,  iwl  5'  vUe  Tvpdap^oio.  For 
similar  examples  in  Homer  compare  A  447,  2  419,  <ir  887-888. 
Cf.  also  Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  445,  2  a.  i. 


—  8i  — 


CHAPTER  IV. 


I 


\ 


WHY    PREPOSITIONS    IN    CONSTRUC- 
TION WITH  CASES  ARE  RARER  IN 
POETRY  THAN  IN  PROSE. 

The  frequency  of  the  prepositions  in  case-construc- 
tion varies  considerably  in  all  the  departmeijts  of  the 
literature.  In  poetry,  as  a  rule,  the  prepositions  are 
rarer  than  in  prose.  In  valuing  this  fact,  however, 
from  a  stylistic  point  of  view,  we  must  bear  in  mind 
that  in  poetry  the  prepositions  are  more  plastic  and 
weigh,  if  not  number,  more  than  in  prose.  Cf. 
Gildersleeve,  A.J.  P.,  XXIII.,  i6.  Vogrinz,  Berl. 
Phil.  Woch.  for  1885,  sp.  225-230,  says:  "  Betrachtet 
man  theoretisch  das  Werden  des  Prapositions- 
ausdruckes,  so  kann  man  gemass  den  gelauterten 
Vorstellungen  die  wir  heutzatage  von  sprachlicher 
Entwicklung  haben,  annehmen,  dass,  unbeschadet 
der  vollen  formalen  und  Bedeutungskraft  des  Kasus, 
dasselbe  Verhaltniss,  welches  durch  den  Kasus  allein 
ausgedriickt  wurde,  in  der  Praposition  resp.  in  dem 
adverbialen  Zusatze  entschiedener  zum  Ausdruck 
gebracht  wurde.  Bei  dieser  FuUe  und  diesem 
sozusagen  pleonastischen  Ausdruck  konnte  es  aber 
nicht  bleiben.  Der  weitere  Gang  war  der,  dass  die 
Praposition  deutlicher  ins  Bewustsein  der  Sprechen- 
den  trat  als  die  Kndung  der  Kasus.*' 

There  are  several  reasons  for  this  difference  in 
frequency.  First  of  all,  the  case-adverbs,  which  are 
so  numerous  in  epic  poetry,  often  take  the  place  of 


—  82  — 

the  prepositions.  Moreover  place- relations  that  would 
in  prose  be  expressed  by  preposition  and  case,  can  be 
denoted:  a)  by  a  simple  case  :  the  locative  genitive, 
the  ablatival  genitive,  the  locative  dative  and  the 
accusative  of  the  goal ;  b)  by  the  suffixes  -»'/£>, -»V£,  and 
'Se.  Therefore,  before  taking  up  ApoUonius'  use  of 
the  prepositions  with  cases,  it  is  well  to  compare  his 
use  of  these  last  two  constructions  with  the  Homeric 
use. 

A.     SIMPLE    CASES    TO     EXPRESS    LOCAL 

RELATIONS. 

l)    LOCAIv    GENITIVE. 

Setting  aside  adverbial  forms  such  as  adrouy  ayx^n^ 
rr^Xuh,  u(;>oo,  which  though  originating  in  this  construc- 
tion do  not  have  the  same  stylistic  effect,  we  find 
according  to  Linsenbarth,  De  Apollonii  Rhodii 
Casuum  Syntaxi  Comparato  Usu  Homerico,  few 
examples  in  ApoUonius  as  compared  with  Homer. 
Of  the  subdivisions  made  by  Monro  (  Sec.  1 49 ) , 
neither  the  first  nor  the  second  are  represented  in 
ApoUonius.  Examples  after  verbs  of  motion  are . 
I.    687     [/^of$]     yuoro^ov    veiolo   (iieipvaaovatv 

aporpov.  Cf.  K  353  bXxe^evai  veiolo  l3a^ELYjg 

nyjxrov  dporpov;  also  B  785,  801,  V  14,  A 

244,  E  222,  597,  etc. 
III.    1055    al    XEV     opipofievovg    no^eag    veiolo 

^oxevGYig.  Cf.  P  748  nehioio  hiaTtpvaiov  rerv- 

;t>7X6>$;  also  P  372. 
Without  Homeric  parallels  are: 
I.  546  drpanog   &g    ;|jXofpoIo  hieihofievYi   nehioio. 

Cf.  Call.  Del.  141  SietSofjiivyj  sv  i55aTt  v^cog. 


\ 


-83- 

III.  953  aryj^eov  idyyj  xeap  ''her  heart  broke 

within  her  breast." 
The  quasi-partitive  genitive,  like  nov  yvig  (Lat. 

ubi   terraruni)    occurs    in    the    following 

passages: 

II.  1139  bnn6%i  yatyjg;  similarly  IV.  532  onyi 

Z^opog,     Cf.  Eurip.  Her.  19,  46. 

III.  770  ev^a  xaxuv.  Cf.  Soph.  Aj.  659;  Eurip. 
Tro.  680. 

IV.  1476  'Hpa;c;i37a|...  dneipeaiYig  ryjTiov  z^ovog 
eharo  Avyxevg\r(:}g  iUeiv.  Cf.  Arist.  Nub. 
138  TYiT^ov  ydp  oixCd  rdv  dypwr. 

Under  the  partitive  genitive  may  also  be 
put  III.  876  'AfiviGolo  loEoaa^evYi  nora^olo,  and 
III.  1203  Tioeaaaro  ....  norafiolo  |  .  .  .  .  repev 
Sifiag.     Cf.  E  6,  Z  508,  0  265;  /?  261,  etc. 

2)   ABI^ATIVAI,  GENITIVE. 

The  ablatival  genitive  is  used  in  prose 
chiefly  with  verbs  of  separation  and  of  depri- 
vation. In  addition  to  these  verbs,  it  occurs 
in  poetry  frequently  with  verbs  of  motion. 
This  latter  use  had  to  be  reinforced  by  prepo- 
sitions in  prose.— Goodell,  The  Genitive  in 
Sophocles,  A.  Ph.  As.,  XV.,  has  collected  from 
Sophocles  456  examples  of  the  ablatival  genitive 
without  prepositions  (17.  1  %  lyric),  616  with 


—  84  — 

prepositions  (14  %  lyric)  and  96  with  adverbs 
(18.5  %  lyric).  ApoUonius,  through  the 
influence  of  the  tragic  poets,  has  extended  the 
use  of  the  ablatival  genitive.  Under  the 
following  three  divisions  I  have  mainly  re- 
arranged the  results  of  Linsenbarth  so  as  to 
bring  the  agreement  and  the  difference  between 
ApoUonius  and  Homer  into  greater  prominence. 
Besides  presenting  the  na^kaia  xaivCyg,  I  have 
added  some  new  examples. 

a)   WITH  VERBS  USED  ALSO  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE 
ABI^ATIVAI,    GENITIVE. 

a)  With  simple  verbs: — dsvsa^i  1.  782; 

II.  976;  IV.  491.  Cf.  B  128,  T  294,  N  310, 
etc.—elvai  II.  523, 992;  III.  358;  IV.  990, 1387. 
Cf.  Z  211;  a  215,  h  206,  etc.  In  I.  230  ApoUo- 
nius uses  dno;  Homer  has  ix  in  A  63,  B  197 
a  33,  40.— £ixa^£t»'  I.  105.  Cf.  elxeiv  in  A  509 
E  348;  n  42,  a  10.— sxso^i  I.  334;  II.  1204 

III.  1267;  IV.  1054.  Cf.  B  98,  T  84,  N  360 
etc.—Mr'iv  III.  1300;  IV.  667.  Cf.  A  210,  319 
Hes.  Th.  4S.—lEi7tsa^ai  I.  315.  Cf.  *  523 
529.— Xmv  I.  903;  III.  62.  Cf.  e  397,  v  321 
n  364.— Ttamr  IV.  712,  773,  777.  Cf.  B  595 
4>  228,  p  S.—TtaveaS^i  III.  418.  Cf.  A  467,  B 
430,  H  SlQ.—xau^ea^i  HI.  1050.  Cf  A  504, 
M  I72,262,etc.— w^flff^t  II.  1056.   Cf.  M  420. 


Hi 


-85- 

(i)  With  compound  verbs: — dvahvea^ai  I. 
1228.  Cf.  A  359;  e  337 .—dvanrelv  II.  609,  739. 
Cf  A  382,  0  235,  T  221  .—aTtoepyeiv  I.  865.  Cf. 
n  23S.—dnoX^yHv  1.  1325.    Cf.  H  263,  A  255, 

*  577,  etc.— dnoyiveiv  II.  456;  III.  1343.  Cf. 
X  50;  <^  46. — dnofiopyvvvai  II.  86.  Cf.  E  416. 
—dnonXa^siv  I.  1220;  II.  776,  959.  Cf  ^i  285, 
0  382.— dnoTt'i^eff^at  I.  129.  Cf  (p  119.— 
dTtoriiyiyeiv  IV.  1118.  Cf  K  364,  X  456.— 
d<?)op|ua(T^t  1. 190;  II.  317;  IV.  1020.  Cf.  B  794. 
— 3iaTpt^f(T3at  11.885.  ClfS  40i.—8xyiyvea^ai 
1.  56, 157,  208,  223.  952,  975;  III.  364;  IV.  260. 
Cf.  E  637,  T  199,  418,  etc.-ixTcrvsLv  IV.  478. 
Cf  £  322.—sxaaovv  II.  1186.  Cf  S  501.— 
ixaevea^at  IV.  40.  Cf  H  1;  ,  373,  ^  366.— 
ixfpaivEabat  I.  1310.  Cf  u  441. — i^dyeiv  IV. 
749.    Cf  E  35, 352,  A  4S7 .—i^aipela^ai  II.  184; 

III.  279,  843,  1012.  Cf  0  323,  T  137,  n  754. 
e^dyiXea^i  II.  268;  IV.  464.    Cf  E  142,  P  342, 

*  39d.—i^anolSaiveiv  III.  199,  326.  Cf  fi  306. 
—e^inretv  III.  207.  Cf  H  51;  x  466.-£CgX- 
avveiv  I.  987;  IV.  1136,  1758.  Cf  E  324,  K 
499,  etc.— £^ep;Ki(T3ai  II.  202.  Cf  K  140,  X  237; 
V  371,  etc.— I^iemi  I.  446.  Cf  a  374,  /3  139.— 
xara'^a'iveiv  III.  888.  Cf  E  109,  fl  329.- 
xareoxea^a-i  IV.  329, 1682.  Cf  T 125.— xaTa;^£l»' 

IV.  25,  34.  Cf  *  282.— ^fSdmi  III.  274,  476. 
Cf  A  234,  240,  etc  —(israXkyiyeiv  I.  1271.  Cf. 
1 157,261,299.— unoXrea^ai  III.  996.   Cf.A401. 


—  86  — 

b)  WITH  VKRBS  NOT  USED  IN  HOMER  WITH  THE  SIMPLE 

ABI.ATIVAI.  GENITIVE. 

a)  With  simple  verbs:— drt^ai^  I.  615.— 
ilaivaiv  III.  597.  Cf.  Soph.  0.  T.  97;  Eurip. 
Med.  n.-l^r.rmiv  I.  296;  11.  331;  III.  561. 
Cf.  Eurip.  Phoen.  1260.-Xw(fdj^  II.  650;  III. 
783.  Cf.  Aesch.  Pr.  376,  654;  Soph.  Aj.  61.- 
'pmG^ai  11.  218;  III.  905;  IV.  1071,  1701.  Cf. 
Eurip.  Ale.  Il.—aaovv  III.  1126.  Cf.  Soph. 
Ant.  1162,  Phil.  919;  Eurip.  Or.  779.-<^ipar 
I.  1183. 

/iJ)  With  compound  verbs:— di^6;f6fr  I.  673. 
Cf  Soph.  O.  T.  ll^.-avaxYimeiv  III.  227;  IV. 
h^%.—ava^p6(jxBiv  III.  ^h^.—  avihai  I.  1304; 
IV.  1696.  Cf.  Soph.  O.T.  264;  Eur.  Med.  456. 
—^vaxoL'^Ba'^ai  IV.  1239.— aTtopj/uaSa/  I.  800.— 
dfpixdveiv  I.  l77.^iaxpiVBiv  III.  1 12S.— ex fioXelv 
I.  S45.-8^avihai  IV.  293.  Cf.  Eurip.  Bacch. 
762,  H.  F.  625. 

Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  has  the  simple 
ablatival  genitive  after  d^vaaeiv  (^  305)  and 
xara?,cd<pdv  {l  460).  Apollonius  uses  a  pre- 
position with  these  verbs  (III.  616,  1347). 
Expressions  like  ^'kdnrovoi  xe?.Ev^ov  (a  195) 
or  Urioe  xsTlev^ov  (5  380)  are  not  found  in 
Apollonius. 


^ 


■'^jlP 


-87   - 

C)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  FOUND  IN  HOMER. 

avTicndv  II.  600. — dnafiei^eG^at  III.  784. 
— dnoxarar'SeG^aL  III.  816. — dnoxiSvaa^ai  IV. 
133. — dno^.eix^iv  IV.  478. — dnovoocpL^eiv  IV. 
36._6taAiW3at  IV.  35.— f;c/^XmrIV.  1415.— 
ixnpofj,o?^8lv  IV.  1537,  1585. — sxpvea^aL  IV.  83. 
Cf.  Eurip.  Bacch.  258. — iEavareXXsLV  IV.  1421. 
—e^avihai  II.  461;  III.  69,  756;  IV.  318,  560, 
757. —  s^opvva^aL  I.  306. —  xaraxreatic^eJ^aL 
III.  136. — xaranpoxelv  III.  1117. — i^israx^d^ea- 
3ai  III.  436 — voacpi^sLv  (active  not  Homeric) 
III.  795.— vnoreXTisa^ai  II.  83. 

SUMMARY  OF  THE  ABLATIVAL  GENITIVE. 

a)  WITH  VERBS  ALSO  USED  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE  ABL.  GEN. 

a)  Simple  verbs — lo;  No.  of  ex,  24. 
j3)  Compound  verbs— 30;  No.  of  ex.  52. 

b)  WITH   VERBS   NOT  USED  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE  ABL-  GEN. 

a)  Simple  verbs — 7;  No.  of  ex.  13. 

/3)  Compound  verbs — 10;  No.  of  ex.  12. 

C)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  FOUND  IN  HOMER. 

Only  compounds,  except  vo<r<pl^€iv;  in  all  18;  No.  of  ex.  24. 
Total  of  verbs  75;  of  ex.  125. 

3)    LOCATIVE   DATIVE. 

The  dative  of  place  without  a  preposition 
IS  frequent  in  the  epic;  in  lyric  and  tragic 
poetry  the  prepositional  use  begins  to  pre- 
dominate; in  prose,  with  the  exception  of  a 
few   locatives   of  proper   names,  as  'A^yivyjat 


—  88  — 

the  prepositions  ev,  ini^Ttapdj  Ttpog  are  used. 
Cf.  Monro,  Sec.  145;  Main,  Locative  Expressions 
in  the  Attic  Orators. 

According  to  Linsenbarth,  the  locative 
dative  is  not  so  common  in  Apollonius  as  in 
Homer.  However  the  Homeric  usages  are 
well  represented. 

a)  WITH  PROPER  NAMES  OF  COUNTRIES,  ISLANDS  AND  CITIES. 

'AXoTtT?  I.  51.— Hi'Xoj  I.  157.— ni;^i  I. 
413.— 'Apya  I.  1317.— Kfw  II.  528. 

b)  OF  THE  GREAT  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  WORI,D  AND  OTHER 

I.OCAUTIES. 

al^spt  II.  363,  III.  lOOl.-^i'pan)  IV.  261 
(A  U3).—7i6vro)  11.  1127— oiycTf  I.  26,  1150. 
—vT^ao^  IV.  1208.— %ca  IV.  539.— f%oi  III. 
44,  250.-56^01$  I.  304,  447;  11.  655.— juiaaia 
I.  531.— ^i;;tt5  III.  659.— €(y;^aTt77  I.  213. 

The  following  local  datives,  found  in  the 
Argonautica,  do  not  occur  in  Homer  without  a 
preposition: 

iept  IV.  d43.—alYi  IV.  5S4.—  pyiyfilvL  II. 
5S4.—dxralg  I.  588,  IV.  245,  854.— iJ^aat  II. 
1218;  IV.  1242,— TtfoxoYiOi  IV.  27 h—fii^oSLYiatv 
aX6s  IV.  919.— tXrt  II.  S21.—6lafi6VYiaiv  III. 
1201,—Sovdx€aoiv  III.  6.— /Ja^ftT?  v2.y}  II.  699. 
— /3a3aat$  dpovpaig  I.  686.— 4»uTa;itip  III.  1399. 


4) 


>-' 


•^'V 


r 


-89- 

—xTiYjlGiv    III.  1268.— 3aXd//cj    IV.  28.— rfr'^ 
IV.  791.— xp>7T>7ptT(  I.  1185. 

C)  OF  THE  PARTS  OF  THE  BODY  OR  OF  THE  SOUI,. 

v6o)  III.  902;  IV.  735.— :^i;^^t5  I.  817;  II. 
1222;  III.  451,  786;  IV.  1746.— <^pF(T/rI.  508.— 
XepolvlU.  1236.— (Vvi  IV.  179.— onioiGL  III.  45. 

The  datives  after  dvdGGeiv  (I.  49,  507;  IV. 
305,  7&S),xoipavElv  (I.  34;  11.  1000;  III.  406) 
and  fiETanpsTteiv  (I.  100;  II.  786;  HI.  246,  335) 
may  also  be  regarded  as  local.  This  would 
make  in  all  63  examples  of  the  locative  dative 
in  Apollonius. 

4)  THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  GOAL. 

The  accusative  to  denote  the  '^termiiuis 
ad  quern"  is  common  with  IxvEo^iai,  Ixu  and 
Ixdvid  but  comparatively  rare  with  verbs  like 
dyw,  a^t,  sp^ofiOLL,  Yiyeouai  and  veo^ai.  Cf. 
Monro,  Sec.  140,  4.  The  examples  in  Apollo- 
nius are  the  following  (105  in  all): 

a)  With  simple  verbs  of  motion: — dyeiv  I. 
1316.  Cf  H  363,  eic.—liaiveiv  IV.  1212.  Cf. 
y  162,  Qic.—hvveiv  I.  195,  263,  627,  635,  832, 
1025;  II.  298,  923;  III.  1255;  IV.  206,  722, 
861,  1178,  1616.  Cf  r  339,  etc.— 5iW3a£ 
III:  1190;  IV.  863,  1543.  Cf  *  739,  etc.— 
UvaL  IV.  739.  Cf  a  176,  ei(^,-lxdveiv  I.  318, 
785;    II.    1280;    III.    387.     Cf   Z   370,    etc.^ 


i 


—  90  — 

IxEtv  {Ixh^ai)  I.  608,  709,  874,  1031,  1244, 
1333,  1402;  11.  350,  551,  730,  1068,  1143, 
1263;  in.  213,  1108,  1121;  IV.  33,  243,  378, 
505,  659,  767,  773,  819,  966,  992,  1232,  1234, 
1394,  1417,  1514,  1568,  1676.  Cf.  Z  225,  etc. 
—viaa£ai>aL  IV.  257.  This  last  example  is 
without  a  parallel  in  Homer. 

b)  With  compound  verbs  of  motiou: — 
atpLxavHv  IV.  847.  Cf.  £  159,  etc. — aquxveln^ai 
I.  1177;  11.  768.  Cf.  A  618,  etc. — eiaarpixdveiv 
IV.  540,  612, 731,  775, 1759.  Cf.  E  230,  etc.— 
elaa^ixvela^ai  IV.  302,  643,  1213.  Cf.  X  17, 
etc. — eiGf^x^a^^^i  III.  39.  Cf.  X  '12 .—siixvEla^ai 
111.312;  IV.  1472.  Cf.(-)439,etc.-f7tm;iai;fa;^af 

III.  1065.    VX,^U,-moixEa^ai  I.  644;  11.455; 

IV.  370,  1317.  Cf  A  50,  etc.— |t/erax(d^£(i'  I. 
1221;  III.  489,  801;  IV.  305,  531,  779.  Cf.  a 
22.-^fTfp;i:fa^at  III.  348,  438,  547;  IV.  837. 
Cf.  Z  280,  etc  -n^o(y(idXkea^ai  IV.  1044.  Cf  E 
879.-[^7to<5i;f/i/II.433;  IV.  1376.  Cf.  5  435,  etc. 

With  the  following  five  compounds  Apoll- 
onius  has  the  accusative  of  tlie  goal  without 
a  preposition,  where  Homer  uses  one:— drep;^- 
«T3a(  II.  1145.  Cf.  X  97.-8iaiMveiv  II.  535; 
IV.  1588.  CM  59.—  8ia6Xav  11.674,  1267, 
1285;  IV.  633.  Cf.  v  m.—sis^avveiv  I.  987 — 
i^i^dvsiv  I.  667. — Also  with  three  verbs  not 
found  in  Homer: — vmevat  III.  1076.    Cf.  Arist. 


—  91  -- 

Vesp.  4:&5.-^v7tBp6vy8a^ai  II.  QSQ.—siaanoiJaLPeiv 
I.  846;  IV.  625,  648,  1779. 

B.     SUFFIXES  .//£v,  (-,^0  AND  -^h  TO  EXPRESS 

LOCAL  RELATIONS. 

Excepting  ^eaao^i  (I.  1278,  II.  172), 
Homeric  forms  like  'Utd^f,  ovpavo^i,  w^i, 
^yipyj^i,  etc.,  are  not  found  in  Apollonius. 
Likewise,  the  old  case-suffix  fpiv,  which  is  com- 
paratively frequent  in  Homer,  occurs  only  four 
times  in  Apollonius  (always  with  a  preposition); 
viz.  I.  566=IV.  1661;  II.  494;  IV.  80,  with 
which  compare  y  353,  e  59,  ^  414,  p  74,  0  283, 
552,  etc.  Of  the  suffixes  -^Fr  and  -<Sf,  only 
the  forms  from  nominal  stems  are  given. 

l)    FORMS  IN  -'^ev  (5  I  IN  AI,l). 
a)   PROPER  NAMES  OF  CITIES  AND  COUNTRIES. 

' Apai^vpeyj^ev  I.  115;  'Apyo^ev  I.  118; 
'Apnvyj^Bvl,  152;  'ApxaSiyi^sv  I.  161;  'EcpvpyjS^ev 
IV.  1210;  KexpoTiiYj^ev  I.  94,  214;  KvMGo^ev 
IV.  434;  2\vxLY!^8v  II.  676;  Uispiyj^ev  I.  31  (Hes. 
Op.  1,  h.  Merc.  85);  :S.7idpryj^8v  I.  148.  Cf.  B 
671,  Z  291:  E  105;  /3  327,  S  10,  etc. 

Afo^Fr  occurs  twice  in  Apollonius:  II.  463; 
IV.  270.     Cf.  0  489,  etc. 

b)  APPEI.I,ATrvBS. 

1.  Of  place:— dyeXyi^ev  1. 356, 406;  d')(Of>^^ev 
I.  877  (B  264.  fi  439);  &ypv^evll.  M0;dyp6^sv 
I.  1172   {v  268,  0  428);  Svfio^ev  I.  7  (t  197); 


I 


—  92  — 

evvYJ^Bvll.  197  (i;  124);  ^evyXri^ev  JII.  1318; 
rt^ivYi^Bv   IV.    1577;    ovpavo^Ev  I.  547,    1280; 

II.  287,  518;  III.  1195,  1376;  IV.  639,  1285, 
1695,  (A  195,  208,  0  558,  et€.);  ndrpyj^ei^  II. 
543    (Pind.    N.  VII.  103);    neSd^ev   I.  1199; 

III.  1315  (j'295);  Ttoif^ivyj^evll.  ^93;  npv^vo^ev 

IV.  909,  1684  (Aesch.  Sept.  71,  1056);  l>i^ri^8v 
♦  III.  1400;  ;^6p(To^er  IV.  1262;  fieaaoS^ev  I.  1168, 

and  o^o^Ev  I.  91,  which  the  scholiast  para- 
phrases by  and  rov  avrov  ronov, 

2.  Of  time:— r^tS^f r  I.  594,  1053;  II.  729; 
IV.  497,  855,  1222.  Cf.  a  372,  y  153,  366, 
a  214,  yj  189,  etc. 

3.  Of  the  agent:— ^eo^Ev  II.  261;  III.  1004; 
IV.  413.  Cf.  7C  477;  also  Eiirip.  Med.  1270; 
Herod.  VI.  14. 

In  three  examples  the  form  is  strength- 
ened by  a  preposition:  ttTt'  Aiytvyj^ev  IV.  1775 
(ft  492);  8x  Aio^sv  II.  995;  ex  npv^vrj^ev 
II.  588  (0  716;  also  Aesch.  Sept.  191). 

2)    FORMS  IN  -^e  (45  IN  ALL), 
a)    WITH  PROPER  NAMES. 

1.  Of  place: — AIolvSe  III.  306;  Alfiovirv^B 
IV.  1032;  'ApmSt'>7^'5f  11.  1054;  Hi^^o^f  I.  209; 
II.  186  (;i581). 

2.  Of  the  person:— 'AXxirooj^Sf  IV.  1198 
(fl  338). 


—  93  — 

b)   WITH  APPEIXATIVFS. 

1.  Of  place:— dyop>7^;Sf  I.  328  (A  54,  B 
207);  aXaSe  IV.  135,  546,  1608  (A  308;  (3  389, 
et<?.);  UnEipdvhe  II.  736,  978;  IV.  1363  {x  423, 
a  84);  husrepov^s  'to  our  house'  I.  704  (3  39, 
o  513;  u  267);  ^d?.a^6v68  III.  9,  249,  450,  671 
(<?>  8,  Z  109,  161);  xpyivnv^e  I.  1258  {v  159); 
:K6Vxai'Ly]i'8e  II.  192;  f^ivxovk  IV.  1543;  VY;6p^e 
III.  939;  IV.  50;  vyjaovSe  II.  1115;  olxovk  III. 
1138  (a  17,  317,  360,  424,  etc.);  OvXv^t7t6i'?ie 
II.  605;  III.  1357;  IV.  779  (A  221,  394,  425, 
et€.);  ne^iovk  III.  1344  (A  492,  T  148,  *  8); 
ndrpyivf^e  IV.  190;  nekayoaSe  IV.  1231,  1268; 
noXivbe  III.  1153  (E  224;  a  189);  nd^^s^ovb' 
II.  921  (B  443,  589,  872,  etc.);  novrov^E  II. 
329,  415,  542,  686,  1104;  IV.  198,  1748  {l  495, 
X  48);  Ttora^dv^E  11.  1274  (4>  13,  120,  etc.); 
XEpaovb'  III.  199  (h.  Ap.  28). 

2.  Of  the   person: — avroxaGtyvy^ryiv^E  HI. 

647. 

In  IV.  1766,  the  word  is  reinforced  by  a 
preposition;  viz.  (lErd  v^db\     Cf.  x  851. 


—  95 


CHAPTER  V. 


1 


PREPOSITIONS    IN    CASE-CONSTRUC- 
TION. 

* '  Passing  from  the  cases  to  the  prepositions  we 
enter, ' '  as  Dr.  Gildersleeve  remarks,  *  *  upon  a  field 
which  has  been  worked  in  spots  until  the  ground  is 
pulverized  with  the  statistical  harrow,  while  in  parts 
it  lies  absolutely  fallow."  Cf.  A.  J.  P.  XXIII.,  p.  25. 

The  Argonautica  of  ApoUonius  is  still  virgin-soil^^ 
as  regards  the  treatment  of  the  prepositions. 


*  At  least  this  was  the  case  when  the  present  work  was 
undertaken.  While  it  was  in  progress  there  appeared  a  thesis 
by  A.  S.  Haggett,  ''A  Comparison  of  ApoUonius  Rhodius 
with  Homer  in  Prepositional  Usage  ^^  published  by  the 
John  Murphy  Co.,  Baltimore,  1902;  but,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
Raggett's  thesis  was  mentioned  neither  in  Bursian's  Jahres- 
bericht,  nor  in  the  Bibliographical  Record  of  the  American 
Philological  Association,  nor  among  the  notices  of  Recent 
Publications  in  the  American  Journal  of  Philology, —  the 
ordinary  sources  of  bibliographical  information  about  such  a 
work — It  escaped  my  notice  until  after  my  work  was  com- 
pleted and  presented  to  the  Faculty  of  the  University. — 
Owing  to  my  fuller  treatment  of  the  other  uses  of  the 
prepositions  the  present  chapter  is  the  only  one  which  might 
liave  been  affected  by  Raggett's  thesis,  had  it  come  to  my 
notice  sooner.  Before  going  to  press  I  made  a  special  revision 
of  this  chapter  and  compared  my  results  with  those  of 
Haggett;  but  with  the  exception  of  a  few  examples,  I  did  not 
see  any  reason  for  changing  my  treatment  of  the  subject. 
Hence,  where  I  differ  from  Haggett,  the  differences  are  all 
intentional.  Haggett  does  not  distinguish  between  prepo- 
sitional phrases  as  iirl  di^p  and  ewl  xp^^ovi  ^""i  7roXX6i'  and  iirl 
v6vT0Vi  is  aiel  and  is  evdiov;  avd  ttjXov  and  dirb  yairis;  etc.  His 
tables  show  the  total  of  all  the  prepositions  in  ApoUonius  to 
be  2047;  whereas  I  have  21 10,  which  in  itself  makes  already  a 
serious  difference  of  63  examples. 


-96- 

Before  taking  up  each  preposition  separately,  three 
general  questions  of  great  stylistic  and  syntactic  im- 
portance should  be  discussed. 

FREQUENCY   IN   GENERAL. 

The  aggregate  frequency  of  prepositions  varies 
according  to  time,  subject  and  writer,— being  less  in 
poetry  than  in  prose,  less  in  the  drama  than  in  epic 
or  lyric  poetry,  less  in  the  orators  than  in  the  philoso- 
phers. Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  Beitr.  z.  d.  Lehre,  v.  d. 
Griech.  Prap.,  p.  14  seq. 

Haggett,  in  his  summary  of  the  prepositions  in 
Homer,  gives  as  a  total  of  the  prepositions  in  case- 
construction  the  figure  8198  (II.  4746,  Od.  3452  ). 
Accordingly  Homer  has  an  average  of  one  preposi- 
tion in  every  3.4  lines,  that  for  the  Iliad  (3.3)  being 
slightly  higher  than  that  for  the  Odyssey  (3.5). 
T.  Mommsen  has  an  average  of  one  preposition  for 
3.14  lines  in  the  Iliad  and  one  for  3.95  lines  in  the 
Odyssey.  As  there  is  no  objective  rule  to  decide  the 
doubtful  cases  of  tmesis  or  of  the  adverbial  use,  it  is 
impossible  to  say  that  either  set  of  these  figures  is 
absolutely  correct  and  the  other  wrong.  The  differ- 
ence, however,  is  immaterial,  as  in  such  questions 
only  the  large  masses  count.  — Apollonius  has  1743 
examples  of  prepositions  in  case-construction,  mak 
ing  an  average  of  one  preposition  in  3.3  lines,  and  so 
he  remains  faithful  in  this  respect  to  the  laws  of  his 
department. 

In  connection  with  the  aggregate  frequency,  it  is 
important  to  notice  that  the  distribution  of  the  pre- 
positions is  far  from  being  uniform,  as  the  following 
passages  from  ApoUonius  will  show. 


-  97 


4«# 


a)     PREPOSITIONS    RARE 

I.  139—  150 
709—  720 

1215—1230 

II.  539—  548 

1195—1206 

III.  74_     89 

144—  153 
651—  666 
765—  776 

IV.  662—  669 
823—  839 

1235—1250 


Total:— Lines— 157 


b)  PREPOSITIONS  NUMEROUS. 


I.  536—  539 
617—  626 
740—  746 

II.  102—  113 
1166—1175 

III.  210-  218 
675—  685 
739-  745 

1277—1284 

IV.  625—  634 
964—  977 

1765—1775 


5  prep. 
8 


t( 


6 

8 
8 
6 
7 
7 
5 
9 
9 
8 


(( 


(( 


<< 


u 


(( 


l( 


«< 


4< 


<( 


Lines— 113;  prep.— 86. 


FREQUENCY  WITH  EACH  CASE. 

As  T.  Mommsen  has  shown,  the  numerical  relation 
of  prepositions  with  cases  is  a  criterion  of  style, 
period  and  department.  In  the  older  and  poetic 
language  the  dative  preponderates;  in  the  later 
language  (  especially  in  prose  )  the  accusative  is  most 
frequent;  while  the  genitive  ranks  first  in  the 
rhetorico-philosophic  elements  in  prose  and  poetry. 
The  relation  in  the  dramatists,  as  given  by  Mommsen, 
is  the  following : 


X              1         « 

GENITIVE 

DATIVE 

ACCUSATIVE 

Aeschylus 

Sophocles 

Euripides 

Aristophanes 

5 
3 
4 
3 

5 

2 

4 
2 

4 

2 
5 
3 

Prose  from  the  earliest  period  showed  a  tendency 
for  an  increase  in  the  accusative.  The  result  of  this 
tendency  may  be  seen  in  Polybius  for  whom  Krebs 
pp.  6-9  gives  an  average  of  2.2  gen.;  i  dat;  4.5  ace. 


—  98  — 

For  Homer  Haggett  gives  the  following  statistics : 

fTot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  gen.:  1160-24  46  per  cent. 
Iliad  I     ••      *•    •*    "        **      *'    dat.:  1979=41  70    **      " 
♦*      *•    '*    "        "       "     ace:  1607=33.84   **      ** 

fTot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  gen.:    663=19.21  per  cent. 

Odvssev<     *'      *'    ** dat.:  1470=42.58    "      " 

^      "'I    "     •*    "     "       "      "     ace:  1319=38.21    '*      ** 

It  is  easily  seen  from  this  that  in  the  Odyssey  the 
genitive  decreases  in  proportion  as  the  accusative 
increases,  foreshadowing  the  later  prose  usage.— 
Apollonius  followed  the  more  poetic  usage  of  the 
Iliad,  with  a  slight  reactionary  decrease  of  the 
accusative. 

A  ^„«     fTot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  gen.:  456=26.16  per  cent. 
Argo-    .     ,,      ..    ..    ..        u       ..    jj^j.  .  740=42.45    "      '• 

nautica  '^    .,      ..    ,,    .,       ..      u     ^^^ .  547=31.39    »      " 

As  Haggett  says,  '  *  we  naturally  expect  the  pre- 
ponderance of  the  dative  in  epic  poetry  because  of 
the  great  number  of  concrete  locative  situations  af- 
forded by  the  subject  matter.  Hence  i>  and  iTzi  are 
the  favorite  prepositions.'* 

* 

TABI^ES  SHOWING  THE  FREQUBNCV  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 

WITH  CASES. 

a  )    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONB  CASB: 


Genitive. 

Avri 

dir6 

iK 

Tp6 

irp6va.p  vpoirp6 

inroTp6  \    inriK 

Apol. 
Horn. 

3 

10 

69 

372 

163 
690 

2 

34 

2 
0 

I 
0 

I 
0 

13 
15 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE:   (Continued) 


Dative 

1               Accusative 

iv 

<T^V 

j        ei, 

irtpl  T    i.lKt>l  T€ 

Apol. 
Horn. 

298 
1893 

65 
188 

165 
823 

I 
I 

—  99  — 


b)   PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO  CASES:  GENITIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE: 


Sid 

8Uk 

Kard 

1     irapiK 

inrip 

Apol. 
Horn. 

gen. 

36 
,  97 

ace. 

29 

77 

gen. 
II 
12 

ace. 

10 

0 

gen. 

24 
68 

ace. 
64 
586 

gen 

5 
2 

ace. 
6 

8 

gen. 
29 

49 

ace. 
31 

C)   PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES: 


dti4>L 

dvd 

ivl 

Apol. 
Horn. 

gen 
II 
2 

dat 

32 
88 

ace. 
26 

135 

gen.  dat. 
0        0 
0        9 

ace. 

55 
143 

gen. 

47 
164 

dat. 

180 

S44 

ace. 
65 

413 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES:  (Continued) 


Apol. 
Horn. 


/Ltcrd 


Tapd 


wepl 


gen. 

dat. 

ace. 

gen. 

dat. 

ace. 

gen. 

dat. 

ace 

0 

36 

47 

4 

18 

18 

'9 

31 

10 

5 

215 

164 

67 

219 

133 

79 

85 

72 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES:    (CONTINUED) 


irp6s 

inrd 

Apol. 
Horn. 

gen. 

3 
27 

dat. 
0 
21 

ace. 

10 

279 

gen. 

13 
126 

dat. 

81 

187 

ace. 

25 
62 

Apart  from  quantitative  differences,  which  will  be 
discussed  later,  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  the  Homeric 
use  of  awi  with  the  dative  is  not  found  in  Apollonius. 
Also  /lera  with  the  genitive  and  np6>,^  with  the  dative 
are  avoided  by  Apollonius  because  of  the  frequent 
employment  of  these  constructions  in  prose.  Cf. 
I.utz,  p.  62,  99  ;  Krebs,  p.  6. 


—  lOO 


TABI^E  SHOWING  THE  AGGREGATE  FREQUENCY  AND  THE 
IIEI.ATIVE  PERCENTAGE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS  IN  CASK- 
CONSTRUCTION  IN  APOI,I*ONIUS  AND  IN  HOMER. 


Prepos. 

I. 
63 

II. 

68 

III 
72 

IV 
95 

TotinAp. 

iv 

298 — .170 

htl 

72 

66 

60 

94 

292— .167 

df 

37 

32 

43 

53 

165— .094 

iic 

34 

42 

41 

46 

T63     .093 

hth 

26 

30 

31 

32 

119 — .068 

icard 

20 

II 

26 

31 

88—  050 

IutA 

16 

18 

23 

26 

83=  .047 

At6 

19 

9 

17 

24 

69=  .039 

Afupi 

17 

15 

15 

22 

69=  .039 

irbv 

17 

12 

18 

t8 

65=  .037 

ItA 

12 

14 

13 

26 

65 =.037 

W€pt 

10 

12 

18 

20 

60=  .034 

dpd 

14 

13 

8 

20 

55-031 

hr4p 

8 

13 

7 

16 

44=  025 

wapd 

9 

14 

7 

10 

40=  .022 

vp6t 

2 

4 

3 

4 

I3fe=  .007 

irrl 

0 

2 

0 

I 

3=  .002 

wp6 

I 

I 

0 

0 

2=  001 

itiK 

3 

8 

4 

6 

21=  .012 

inriK 

4 

I 

4 

4 

13=  .007 

wapiK 

3 

s 

I 

2 

11=  .006 

trpSTap 

I 

0 

0 

I 

2—  .001 

irpoTp6 

0 

0 

I 

0 

i=.cxx)6 

hnnrpb 

0 

0 

0 

I 

i=.ooo6 

ydi.p.4>i  re 

0 

0 

I 

0 

i=.ooo6 

Total  in  Homer. 


i893(  II.  989,  Od.  904)=.23i 

1 121  (11.  642,  Od.  479) =.136 

823  (II  374.  Od.  449)=. 100 

690  (II.  406,  Od.  284) =.084 

375  (II.  266,  Od.  109)=. 045 

654  (II.  383,  Od.  27i)=.079 

384  (II.  233,  Od.  151)=  .046 

372  (II.  273,  Od.  99)=  045 

225  (II.  158,  Od.  67)=. 027 

188  (II.  113,  Od.  75)=  .022 

174  (II.  n8.  Od.  56)=  .021 

236(11.  157,  Od.  79)=.o28 

152  (II.  90,  Od.  62  )=.oi8 

80  (II.  53,  Od.  27)=  .009 

419  (II.  264,  Od.  155)=  .051 

327  (II.  168,  Od.  159)=  .039 

10  (II.  7,  Od  3)=. 001 J 

34  (II.  28,  Od.  6).oo4i 

12  (II.  I,  Od.  ii)  =  .ooi4 

15  (II.  13,  Od.  2)=.ooi8 

10  (II.  6,  Od.  4)=. 0012 

q\  Homer  has  diroxp^  once, 

oiand   Siairp6  three    times 

o j  which  are  not  found  in  Ap. 


I  (P  760). 


Total  l!388|39o|4i3!552|i743 


8198(11.  4746.  Od.  3452). 


The  tendency  in  quantitative  differences  between 
Apollonius  and  Homer  is  evident.  The  prepositions 
which  in  Apollonius  show  an  increase  are  chiefly 
poetic.  They  are :  oLfi<pi,  Std,  <rt»v,  oitip,  uic6^  and  the 
double  prepositions  dtix^  napix  and  Mx,  Those  that 
go  down  are  prosaic ;  viz. :  xaTd^  izapd  and  notably 
itpo  and  r/><i9. 


•»r 


—   101  — 

The  quantitative  differences  between  Apollonius 
and  Homer  in  the  use  of  the  individual  prepositions 
in  case-construction  are  still  further  shown  in  the 
following  table,  giving  for  each  preposition  the 
proximate  number  of  lines  in  which,  at  an  average, 
it  occurs  once. 

NUMBER  OF  LINES  IN  WHICH  PREPOSITION  OCCURS  ONCE. 


» I 


r 


PREPOSITION. 

IN  APOI.I/)NIUS. 

IN  HOMER. 

iv 

19.5 

14.7 

iwl 

20. 

24.8 

eh 

35.3 

33.7 

iK 

35.7 

40.3 

inrd 

49. 

74. 

Kard 

66.3 

42.5 

fijerd 

70.3 

72.4 

dT6 

84.5 

74.7 

dn(f>l 

84.5 

123.5 

<ri/v 

89.7 

147.8 

8id 

89.7 

159.8 

vepl 

97.2 

117.8 

dvd 

106. 

182.9 

inr4p 

132.6 

347.5 

wapd 

146. 

66.3 

irpds 

448. 

85. 

dvTl 

1945. 

2780. 

vp6 

2917. 

818. 

8Uk 

278. 

2317. 

W4k 

448. 

1853. 

irapiK 

530. 

2780. 

trp&rap 

2917. 

0 

trpoirpS 

5835. 

0 

inro  trp6 

5835. 

0 

Ttpl  r'  d/Ll0f  T€ 

5835. 

27803. 

dvoirph 

0 

27803. 

SiatrpS 

0 

9268. 

—  I02  — 


POSITION. 

In  the  Indo-European  parent-language  the  prepo- 
sitions seem  to  have  been  pre-positive  as  well  as 
post-positive.  In  the  Vedas  both  positions  are  found. 
In  classical  Sanskrit  the />(75/- position  almost  entirely 
superseded  the  /reposition, —  d  and  purd  being  the 
only  prepositions  that  stand  before  the  case.  In  the 
old  Persian,  on  the  contrary,  the  /r<?-position  pre- 
vails.    Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn.,  III.,  43-44. 

In  Greek  poetry  the  post- position  is  still  frequent. 
In  Homer  it  is  idiomatic  and  serves  often  as  a  metri- 
cal convenience.  In  the  tragic  and  lyric  writers  it  is 
an  artificial  imitation  of  the  older  poetry  and  is  used 
chiefly  for  poetic  efifect. —  In  Attic  prose  only  Tzepi  is 
used  thus,  being  either  a  phraseological  survival,  or 
being  influenced  by  £v£z«,  whose  meaning  it  shares. 
Cf.  Brugmann,  Griech.  Gram.^  433. 

According  to  Haggett,  Homer  has  645  examples 
of  the  post-position  (II.  386,  Od.  259),  which 
amounts  107.85%  of  the  whole  number  of  preposi- 
tions. Of  these  examples  255  are  cases  of  pure 
anastrophe,  while  in  390  instances  the  preposition  is 
put  between  the  noun  and  a  qualifiying  adjective  or 
dependent  genitive.  Apollonius  has  192  cases  of 
post-position,  i.  e.  8.94%  of  his  whole  number  of 
prepositions  in  case-construction  In  1 11  examples 
the  preposition  stands  immediately  after  the  noun  ; 
in  29  a  particle  is  inserted  and  in  5  ( I.  9  ;  II.  820 ; 
III.  738 ;  IV.  492  ;  1355  )  more  important  words  in- 
tervene. Apollonius  has  47  examples  of  interposition 
between  noun  and  adjective.  The  examples  in  which 
tlie  preposition  is  placed  between  the  adjective  and 


I 


\ 


/ 


\   III 


—   103  — 

the  noun,  of  which  Apollonius  has  215,  and  for  which 
interposition  Homer  also  shows  a  marked  fondness, 
do  not  belong  here. 

The  ratio  of  post-position  in  Homer  after  the  dif- 
ferent cases  is:  gen.  22.2%,  dat.  45.4%»  ^cc.  32  3%. 
Apollonius  has  57  examples  with  the  genitive,  108 
with  the  dative,  and  only  27  with  the  accusative, 
giving  the  following  ratio  :  gen  29.3%,  dat.  56.5%, 
ace.  14.1%. 

TABI,E    SHOWING    THE    FREQUENCY    OF    EACH    PREPOSITION 

IN  POST-POSITION  AND  THE  PERCENTAGE  OF  ITS  TOTAI, 

IN  APOI,I.ONIUS  AND  IN  HOMHR. 


APOLLONIUS. 


iv 68=22.9  percent 

^t/.... 33=  II. 3 
uir6...i3=io.9 
£Tr«?p..I3=29.5 
dT6...i2=i7.9 

T€pi..  12=20. 

iK 10=  6.2 

d/ii0/.  8=12.1 

€i» 7=  4.3 

lurd..  6=  7.2 

dw£...  2=  3.6 
«td....  2=  3.1 
wapd..  2=  5-2 
Kard..   1=  I.I 
irapiK    1=     .9 
ffi/v..,.  1=  1.5 
dvrl.,.  o 
wp6.„.  o 
diatrpd  o 
vp6s...  o 


It 
i( 

4« 

(I 
it 
(I 
l< 
<( 
t( 
<( 
(I 
I( 
t  ( 
It 


Total,  191 


HOMFR. 


138  (II   71,  Od.  67)=7.3  per  cent 

142  (II.  108,  Od.  34)=i2.6 

63(11.  45,  Od.  i8)=i6.8 

10(11.6,  Od.  4.)=  12.5 

44(11.  28.  Od.  i6)=ii.8 

20  (II.  II,  Od.  9)=«.5 
38(11.  20,  Od.  i8)=5-5 

16  (II.  9,  Od.  7)=8.i 

48  (II.  20,  Od.  28)=  5. 8 

19(11.  II,  Od.  8)=4-9 

14(11.  8,  Od.  6)=9.2 

15  (II.  10,  Od.  5)=8.6 

21  (II.  13,  Od.  8)=4.9 
34  (II.  10,  Od.  24)  =  5.2 

o  (cf.  vp^K  X  I46)=6.6 

8  (II.  2  Od.  6)=4.2 

5  (Il-)=5o. 

4(Il.)=i.2 

2  (Il.)=66.6 

3(11.  2,  Od.  i)=.9i 


t( 
«t 
11 
11 
11 
It 
It 
<( 
It 
II 
ti 
ti 


ft 


It 


ti 
(f 
ti 
It 
It 
If 
11 
(I 
it 
t  < 
It 
It 
It 
It 
It 
It 
It 
t( 


645  (II.  386,  Od.  259) 


This  table  shows  that  while  «/Af '',  ^^*'*i  ^'^  ^^P^  and 
vHp  gain  in  Apollonius,  07:6,  avd^  dtd,  xard  and  (tov  lose. 

By  far  the  most  frequent  place  of  the  preposition  is 
before  the  case.    Of  the  whole  number  of  prepositions 


■\ 


—  104  — 

(1743),  Apollonius  has  1551  before  the  case ;  1125 
are  examples  without  any  insertion  whatever  between 
the  preposition  and  the  noun;  in  87  instances  the 
preposition  is  separated  from  its  case  by  particles 
(  jiiv,  Si,  ri,  yap)  or  by  enclitics  (/x«e',  ixi^  etc.);  in  215 
passages  the  preposition  is  placed  after  a  qualifying 
adjective  but  before  the  noun.  Homer  has  600  ex- 
amples of  this  inter-position.  Apollonius  separated 
the  preposition  from  its  case  by  an  attributive  genitive 
or  by  some  other  important  word  ( usually  a  verb  ) 
in  102  instances.  Here,  however,  the  separation  of 
the  preposition  from  its  noun  is  not  so  noticeable  be- 
cause generally  an  adjective,  in  the  same  case  as  the 
noun  precedes  the  preposition ;  cf .  I.  549  ;  II.  90, 
406.  550,  824,  1038;  III.  683,  880,918,  1353.  etc! 
Only  rarely  is  the  order  of  words :  preposition,  inde- 
pendent words  of  importance,  case  ;  cf.  I.  830.  1315  ; 
II.  1 1 15;  IV.  1642,  1734.  For  the  rhetorical  inter- 
position of  the  object  in  oaths  or  entreaties  (like 
Latin  per  te  deos  oro  )  compare  III.  984  Ttp6<i  a'  aur^y 
'£jtdTTjy  iisdiaffojim  ijde  Toxijuiv  |  xai  Jtoy ;  IV.  385  ix  Si 
ffs  Ttdrprj^  I  aurix*  ifxat  tr*  iXdffscav  *£p(woe^. 

When  several  nouns  in  the  same  construction  are 
governed  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  may  be 
used  only  with  one,  as:  I.  222.  308,  329,  701.  1056, 
1 178;  II.  188,  402,  637,  666,  102 1,  1086;  III.  41, 
198,  560.  578,  701,  744,  757,881,984.  "47,  1381! 
1393 ;  IV.  44,  172,  272,  550,  631,  730,  787,  793, 
974»  1 192  ;  or  it  may  be  repeated  with  each,  as:  L 
536-537,  818-809;  II.  333-334,  365-366,  826-827, 
998:  IV.  331-332.  364-365,  681.  Similar  examples 
in  Homer  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 


—  105 


II 


I.     PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE 

A.     WITH  THE  GKNITIVE. 
—  dvri  — 

The  preposition  avri  (Sanskrit  dnti\  Latin 
ante)  is  an  old  locative  case,  ^'in  the  presence 
•of,  "opposite".  These  primary  meanings  are 
found  in  the  Inscriptions,  e.  g.  avri  fiatrvpov 
"in  the  presence  of  the  witnesses"  (Law  of 
Gortyn).  Cf  Delbrueck,  Vergl.  Syn.,  Vol.  I. 
Sec.  290.  In  the  literature  this  construction 
disappears,  except  for  the  example  cited  by 
Joost,  Xen.  Ana.  IV.  7,  6  dv^"  oiv  hryjxoreg.— 
In  epic  poetry  the  adverbs  dvriov,  ivavriov, 
avra,  iadvra,  dm^iyjv,  and  in  prose  ivavriov 
have  replaced  dvri  in  its  local  sense,  while  avri 
itself  assumes  the  metaphoric  meanings 
"instead  of,  "in  place  of,  "in  return  for", 
"  in  exchange  for",  etc. 

The  examples  in  Apollonius  mean  "instead 
of  and  fall  within  the  line  of  Homeric  usage: 
II.  448  dvrl  Se  rod  ^dvarov  fioi  a<j!)ap  ^edg 
iyyvaTiL^ar,  II.  851  ol  5'  dvri  ^€ov8eog  AioXcSao  \ 
"ISfiovog  €iaeri  vvv  ^Ayafii^aropa  xvSaivovaiv;  IV. 
30  avr'  ifie^ev  ravaov  nXoxov  dfii  x^^tovaa. 
Cf.  i;  307,  etc. 


—  io6 


1 


~d7t6  — 


In  the  Homeric  poems  ano  (Sanskrit  dpa^ 
Latin  ab)  is  chiefly  used  with  the  ablatival  geni- 
tive to  denote  "away  from",  "at  a  distance."  It 
never  is  equivalent  to  imo  with  passive  verbs 
(cf.  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec.  430) ,  nor  does  it  express 
time  with  the  exception  of  ©  54  ano  5'  avrov 
{heinvov]  ^opjjaaoi'ro;  cf.  La  Roche  ibid.— The 
range  of  metaphoric  uses  also  is  not  so  large  as 
in  the  post-Homeric  literature. 

In  ApoUonius  the  temporal  use  and  the 
use  with  passive  verbs  are  wanting;  while  the 
examples  used  in  a  metaphoric  sense  remain 
within  ths  lines  of  Homeric  usage. 

I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

tf)  With  verbs  of  motion. 

(a)  From  a  place:— 'Ay ftpo:  HI.  356  d^)' 
•EXXd5o$  S^'U.oi  ays^^Bv,     Cf.  P  222. 

'AidtTw:  1.989  oLTt!  ovpsog  di^aiteg',  II.  1261 
an  ovpeog  aiaaovra.     Cf.  N  65;  x  99. 

'AvaxoL^o^ai:  HI.  1037  d^'  oino  nvpxaiyjg 
avaxd^eo,     Cf.  H  819,  *  158. 

'AvE^X^Hai:  IV.  1775  an'  AlyivYj^ev  dvep- 
XOfihoiaiv.     Cf.  fl  492,  t  38. 

Baivio:  IV.  114  ano  vrjog  s^^aav;  IV.  885 
^alvov.,.dn6  x^vog.   Cf.  K  336,  P  112,  <P  529. 


-  107  — 

Ba/l/lo):  IV.  901  and  vriog  .  .  .  nELOfiar'  .  .  . 
(SaXia^at.     Cf.  H  793,  X.  468. 

El^i:  HI.  534  and  fjteydpoio  .  .  .  iovreg;  IV. 
1581  dyxidvog  .  .  .  dno  npovxovTog  iovaiv,  Cf. 
I  38,  T  175  etc. 

©pGKTXG):  IV.  768  ^Iptg  dn'  OvXvfinoio  ^opovoa, 
Cf.  A  532;  4^  32. 

"Iyj^l:  III.  587  an'  ovpavov  dyyeXov  yjxev; 
IV.  80  n68ag  yixev  dn'  ixpio^iv.    Cf.  M  205;  3^  189. 

'IxvEo^ai:  II.  1143  d<p'  'EXXdhog  .  .  Ixea^at, 
Cf.  r  233  A  306. 

Kuy,  I.  77  dn'  EvfSoiyjg  Kdv^og  xle.  IV.  752 
drto  ^eydpoLo  xiovrag.     Cf.  P  113;  n  156. 

*Opvv[iaL  HI.  48  dno  ^povov  wpro;  HI.  439 
dno  ^povov  6pi^i;T'  'Irjcov.  Cf.  E.  13,  A  645, 
H  635,  n  515. 

'Opovo:  IV.  1243  dno  vyjog  opovaav.  Cf. 
N  505,  H  615. 

*Pf(j:  HI.  760  5d;cpi;  S'  dn'  6(p^aX(i(dv  .... 
I)e€v;  HI.  1352  d<^p6g  dno  orof-iarog  x^^^dhig  pes; 
IV.  1529  dno  xpoog  sppee  Uxvyi.  Cf.  A  249, 
H  170,  *  385. 

Ti^yj^t:  IV.  1390  and  ori^apoiv  ^eaav  &fXG)v, 
Cf.^276,  <?)  118,  etc. 

4>ipG):  I.  535  yacYig  dno  itarpihog  ofifiar 
Iveixev,     Cf.  B  838,  M.  96;  x  48. 

4>opio^at:  I.  1278  rijXe  5'  an'  dxr^g  .  .  . 
^opeovro.     Cf.  P  301,  2  256. 


I 


—  io8  — 

Xfo:  I.  1067  ano  /?ylf<^dpor  oaa  ^dacpixi 
XBvav.     Cf.  *  385,  h  114. 

Homer  has  no  close  parallels  for  I.  125 
ai^  ^Afxahing  .  .  .  d^6t4^a$  tyiv  ohov,  1.  1107  ano 
ara^fi(^v  iXdaavtEg,  Homer  has  ix  in  H  87, 
293. — ^11.  1216  ttTtd  xparog  ard^at  ^6vov;  IH. 
375  ofxapryiaavreg  dip'  'E/l/ld&)g;  IV.  1647  and 
XBp<yov  I  v^a  .  .  .  dvaxpoveaxov.  This  last  verb 
is  post-Homeric. 

(/3)  From  persons: — ^I.  821  di^  drfp;{;®|tifroi;$ 
©pvixov  dno,  Cf.  A  556.  HI.  965  noLaai  dno 
a^eicdv  ikiaa^ev. 

b)  With  vfrbs  of  separation. 

^Asipcd:  HI.  1366  yaiyjg  aTto;  similarly  III. 
1395.     Cf.  T  325;  ^  375. 

Alvvfiai:  IV.  162  aTto  Spvog  alvvro  xikLg. 
Cf.  A  580,  N  550,  <&  490,  etc. 

'ApTtd^cj:  II.  188  aro^arog  ;tf ipov  r' dno . . . 
%na^ov.     Cf.  N.  527. 

Elpyu:  IV.  1206  XitiEvuv  yairig  t'  aTto 
ryfXo^L  vYiag  kkpysiv, 

Ai5(i):  II.  538  yaiYig  t'  aito  hL7tk6a  netafiar* 
eXvaav;  H.  1042  aTto  a^erepov  xoXsolo  kvad^evog 
rcTjafiuiva,     Cf.  H  214,  P  318;  v  77. 

^Vriyvvin:  IV.  1636  dno  ari^apov  axo7ti?j)io 
pYiyvvfiBvog  nerpag.     Cf.  H  587. 

2«6):  IV.  1365  aeiadfiBvog   yvluv  &no  . . 
alfiriv.     Cf.  N  135;  h.  Merc.  20. 


•* 


s 


—  109  — 

'fl3f6):  IV.  104  dno  ;^^7/6$  scdOav  vyja.  Cf. 
E  19,  835,  A  143,  320,  T  489. 

Under  this  category  belong  two  examples 

in  which  the  genitive  denotes  a  part  from  the 

whole  I   691  xrepeuv  ano  ^olpav  IXovaav,  II. 

454  ^opeovTBg  i^g  dno  [lolpav  i^ci^yjg,    Cf  2  327; 

s  40,  V  138. 

The  separation  is  figurative  in  I.  815  dno 

fii^rpog  I  Xu^Yjv  .  .  .  nal^eg   afivvov.     Cf.  N  440; 

/3  59,  p  538. — III.  1014  dno  aryj^ioiv  dpvaaaa 

'^l^v^i^v.    Cf.  Hes.  Op.  550  dpvaad^evog  noTaiidv 

dno,     A  similar  example  in  Homer  is  A  598. 

Other  examples  in  Apollonius  are:  IV.  109,926, 

1303.     With  IV.  926  compare  x  ^16. 

c)    To  denote  the  direction  from  which  light  and  sound 

proceed, 

I.  437  ?ji(in6iievov  ^veiov  aTto;  I.  1231  dn 
ai^Bpog  avyd^ovaa;  III.  1016  dno  ^av^olo 
xapYiatog  ....  arpdni:ev  ''Epog  ^T^oya  (figur.); 
IV.  1144  otTio  xpvamv  ^vadvGiV  dfiapvaaeTo 
^eyyog.  Cf  M  70,  N  243,  2  214;  t  63,  4^  43; 
also  h.  Merc.  278,  etc.  Similarly  is  IV.  724 
dn'  ovSeog  dace  ^aT^vaav,  i.  e.  looking  from  the 
threshold. 

d)  To  denote  the  extent  from  a  position, 

I.  945  r,Epk%ovi:ai  ,  ,  ,  dno  ari(3apuv  6ficiVy 
cf.  B  448. — IV.  1400  aTto  xparog  Si  xeXaiVYiv 
axptg  in  axvy^anv  xelr'  anvoog,  Cf.  0  16,  213; 
^  294. 


—  I  lO  -  - 


i 


I 


e)  To  denote  position  away  from,  apart  from. 
I.  60  olog  6j{  oXkioiv  .  .  .  apt(TT>7(i)i'.  In  this 
example,  as  also  in  HI.  907=912  trdpcjj/  ano 
^ovvQv.ih^  prepositional  phrase  is  redundant. 
For  examples  without  the  preposition  compare 
I.  1240;  IV.  910.  Cf.  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  hom. 
Dial.,  p.  210.  A  better  example  of  position  is 
I.  937  TvrSor  (XTto  ^^vyiriq  noXv^Yjiov  r^neipoio  \ 
eig  aXa  xexKifievyj  Iv^aog].  Cf.  h.  Ap.  24.  Here 
belong  IL  253  and  ^vfiov  and  11.  865  an'  iXniSog 
where  in  place  of  a  local  position  we  have  a 
mental  attitude.  Cf.  A  562;  similarly  K  324; 
7l  344.     Soph.  El.  1127. 


a. 


IN  A  METAPHORIC  SENSE. 

a)    To  denote  the  origin  or  descent. 
I    231=11.  359    tt<^'   alfiarog    €vj(^€r6Dvro 
6[i(itvaL;  III.  920  dtp'  alfiarog  ifiXdaryjaav.     Cf. 
f  18,  T  163  (Ameis);  h.  Cer.  213. 

6)  To  denote  the  source. 
Here  belongs  one  example  of  the  person 
after  whom  something  is  named:  I.  625. 
XiKivov  am;  cf.  h.  Ap.  396;  Herod.  VII.  74. 
Also  one  example  after  a  verb  of  hearing  a 
thing  fi-om  some  one:  I.  766  iknofievog  .  .  .  nv' 
and  G^eiuv  iaaxovaai  (3d^iv;  cf.  ^  12,  (i  187. 
Another  example  of  the  source  is  IV.  1186 
^viov  5'  ajto  ryiTio^L  xYixie  Xiyvvg. 


—  Ill  — 


3 

ex 


Closely  allied  in  meaning  with  dno  is  ix. 
Of  the  two  prepositions  ex  has  the  larger 
variety  of  usages,  most  of  which  coincide  in 
poetry  and  in  prose.  Chiefly  poetic  and  Ionic 
is  ex  as  a  substitute  for  hno  to  denote  the 
agent.  For  examples  of  this  use  in  Herodotus, 
compare  Lundberg,  p.  13. — Poetic  is  also  the 
use  of  ex  as  equivalent  to  Ttapd  with  the  person 
in  the  singular.  As  ex  and  dno  are  often  used 
synonymously,  we  find  occasionally  ex  in 
ApoUonius,  where  Homer  has  dno  and  vice- 
versa.  On  the  whole,  the  correspondence  in 
the  two  authors  is  remarkably  close.  The 
form  ex  is  used  before  a  consonant  and  e^  before 
a  vowel.  The  different  uses  may  be  classified 
as  follows: 

1.    LOCAL. 

a)  Of  motion  from  a  place, 

(a)  From  countries,  cities  and  other 
geographical  divisions,  such  as  mountains,  seas, 
rivers,  etc.:— II.  611  hi,  'Mihao  ais^eci^ai.  IL  1096 
%i  Mrig  eveovro]  similarly  II.  424;  III.  1060.— 
II.  1167  'EX/ldSog  e^  avrijg  veofi,  I.  69  e^ 
'Onoevrog  opasr.  Cf.  A  269,  B  557,  863,  E  645, 
Z  529,  H.  363,  467,  I  253,  439,  A  625,  N  793, 
P  350;  /3  326,  S  633,  o  42,  etc.— I.  207  ix  i' 


f 


—  112  — 


1^ 


apa  4>Qx>76>v  xiev  *l^irog.  Cf.  B  852,  K  356, 
537;  €  282.— II.  390  f$  kUg  ehiv;  similarly  IV. 
779,  992,  1363.— IV.  885  ix  8e  (3v^olo  svvaiag 
Eikxov,    IV.  628  yaLYi<;  ix  fivxdryig„A7iopvvix€vog, 

I.  385  <Jrv(p€Xi^av...v€i6^ev  i^  Upyjg,  II.  1086 
iq^iyjxe  xakaX,a,v  ix  vsipeoiv;  similarly  III.  1266. 
— ^I.  553  i^  vnaTov  opeog  xiev;  similarly  I.  1100; 
n.  978.— IV.  380  ix  Si  as  Ttdrpyjg  .  .  .  iXixjEcav 
"Epivveg.  III.  213  ix  neSioLO . . . Ixovro;  similarly 
III.  473, 1364. — 1. 1281  7^6g\ix  nepdrv^g  dvioikja; 

II.  165  rii^iog  ,  .  ,  \  ix  nspdridv  dvi6v.     I.  894 
Xaoj^  dyeipaig  \  a:iXuv  ix  noXiijv;  HI.  1236  ix  Si 
nokriog  ri^aaev.   IV.  1267  ix  Ttovroto.Jxofiiaasv, 
I.  1160  [a^pat]  al  viov  ix  norafii^v  vno  SeisXov 
riepi^vTat.     III.  569  ini  x^ovog  ix  norafiolo . . . 
neidfiar'  dvd\lofi6v.     IV.  198  itovrovS'  Ifiev  ix 
Ttorafiolo.     II.  914  noXv^apoiog  ix  neU^oio  \  d'^ 
dvi6v,    I.  986  ix  h"  dpa  roiye  \  v^a  Xvrov  Tiifiivog 
nporepov  i^riXaaav  op^iov.     For  Homer  compare 
r  49,  0  505,  I  330,  544,  N  17,  II  392,  408,  P 
743,  S  207,  *  35,  274,  n  663;  €  422,  446,  469, 
n  25,  I  41,  X  72,  0  175,  n  18,  etc.     For  the 
repetition   of  the   preposition   after  the  com- 
pound verb  in  I.  986  compare  B  690,  Z  42,  H 
337,  436,  tp  394.    5  37^  ^  106,  x  376,  etc.— 
Examples   of   smaller  localities   are   I.    1148 
[vSup]  dvi^paxB  Sv^dhog  ,  ,  .  ix  xopv^g,     IV. 
1135  fpipev  ix  nvp6g,     I.  1109  Tivad^svoi  *Ifp% 


*=^ 


V 


—  113  — 

ix  neiafiara  nirprig,     11.  166  Xvad^evoL  vedrrig 

ix  neicfiara  Sd^vy^g,     II.  827  ix  Sovdxuv  dvsTtr 

dX^evog,     IV.    924    dnenrvev  ai^ofiivy^   ^U^  \ 

dxpc^v  ix  axonelcov.    II.  356  ix  fieydXyig  npoxodg 

Im  ^dpayyog.     IV.  632  ix  S'  dpa  rolo  \  rcfivag 

eioeXaaav.    Quasi-local  are  II.  303  rd  t  [^ri'hx'] 

l£  'Afivxoio  Xey^Xaaiyjg  ixofiiaaav,  and  11.  224  ex 

no^ev  d^pdaroLo  xaraiaaovaat  6:^8^pov.     Cf  N 

28,  T  137,  *  243;  ^  128,  p  210,  r  445,  v  21,  etc. 

(iS)    From   buildings,  parts  of  buildings, 

ships  and  the  like:— 1. 306  S6fio>v  JJ  ^pro  viea^ai; 

similarly  I.  1212;   II.  816;    IV.  708.— III.  249 

ix  ^aXdfiov  MXafiovSe . . .  fienovaap;   similarly 

III.  671,  739.— II.  468  rov  S'  ix  fieydpoco  xtdprog- 

similarly   III.  285,  442;  IV.  743,  876,  1119^ 

1220.— I.  804  ix  Si  (leM^pov  |  .  .  .  dneaaevopro 

yvpalxag,     I.   640    ix  vyjdg  dpiaryjsg  npoeyjxav  I 

Ai^aXiSyjp;  similarly  III.  316,  1199;  IV.  659. 

I.  307  ix  pyjolo  . . .  ehtp.  IV.  673  r^vre  fi^?xi  \  ix 
ara^fi^p  .  .  .  ehip,  I.  976  ryjp  f.iip  viov  i^  en 
narpog  |  .  .  .  dpriyayep  'Vhom  he  led  even 
recently  from  her  father's."  For  Homer  com- 
pare r  142,  Z  377,  0  507,  A  227,  X  472;  a  441, 
/3  5,  y  441,  S  300,  310,  ri  339, 3  257,  l  548,  x  5l' 
V  116,  0  19,  p  455,  a  198,  t  60,  etc. 

(y)  From  parts  of  the  body:— IV.  1308 
«t'  ix  narpog  xe^Xyjg  ^dps  ['A^^j.>7].  II.  666 
lSp6g  I  ell3erai  ix  :{ay6va)v  re  xai  avx^vog,     IV. 


i^ 


—  114  — 

704  (la^oi  I  nXT^fifivpov  Tioxiyjg  €x  vrjivog,  II.  50 
arri^ec^v  i^  al^a  xehdaaai;  similarly  II.  207;  III. 
289;  IV.  901.— III.  1303  <pUya  ^voioGivreg  \  ex 
aro^idrcdv.  Homeric  examples  are:  T  221,  A 
109,  140,  E  110,  582,  657,  K  10,  15,  A  398,  N 
529,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  131. 

(5)  In  such  phrases  as  "rising  from  the 
couch",  "drawing  the  sword  from  the  scabbard", 
"drinking  out  of  a  cup".  I.  1105  cdpvvro  5' 
f£  Evv^g;  similarly  II.  431,  1239;  IV.  871,  1110. 
III.  1380  ix  xoXeolo  ^ipev  ^iq>og;  similarly  IV. 
207,  1054.— III.  1035  lei(3a>v  ix  Unaoq.  Cf  A 
534,  H  336,  T  62,  X  190;  /3  2,  5  730,  e  1,  x  23, 
4  349,  etc.;— A  194,  M  190;— I  469. 

(f)  Here  belong  two  examples  of  ix  with 
the  person  in  the  singular.  This  use  corre- 
sponds to  ei$  with  the  person  in  the  singular. 
A  typical  example  is  II.  277  or'  ig  ^iviia  xai 
ix  <pLv^og  m€v.  In  III.  721  ix  xelvolo  {^Irjaovog] 
5'  ixdvsi  I  ''Apyog,  the  preposition  might  also 
denote  the  agent.     A  Homeric  example  seems 

to  be  *  217. 

B)  Of  implied  motion. 

II.  700  ix  hk  vv  navTi^v  \ . ,.(iYjpia . . .  |  xalov. 
II.  1171  ix  vYiog  texl  a^tOiv  elfiara  Svmt. 
With  a  verbal  noun  IV.  255  nloov  . . .  |  i^  Alyjg 
iaaea^L,  Of  the  direction  from  which  a 
sound  comes:     III.    1212  aiovaa  \  xev^iiCSv  Jg 


«?< 


♦ 


—  115  — 

vTtdrov,  Also  of  a  native  place:  III.  704  elyiv 
i^  'AibEQ  .  .  .  'Eptvvg.  IV.  1149  at  5'  laav  ix 
nefHuv  dlayjiSeg.  For  examples  from  Homer 
compare:  B  625,  *  154;  a  417,  0  267,  n  247, 
p  455,  etc. 

c)  Of  the  position  from  which  the  operation  takes  place, 
I.  801  7tep3f(Txo2^  inavkovg  \  ix  vyjCSv.     Cf. 
2  210  and  La  Roche  ibid.  I.  1115  ix  5'  irspyjg.,. 
[^aivero],  i.  e.  "on  the   other  side  appeared." 
I.  1361  dxTYiv  ix  x6?i7toio  .  .  .  iGiSh^ai.     Cf  A 
275;  8  524.— II.  402  'Afzapavr^v  \  rrjU^ev   i^ 
opicdv    nshioio   re   Kipxaioio  \  <J?aGig  .  .  .  elg    aXa 
l3dX^ei,    Cf  e  283.— II.  1107  oi  U  nvi  darpa . . . 
fpaiver'  ISea^at  \  ix  ve^ii^v.     Cf  E  864,  A  62. 
d)   Of  the  direction  with  verbs  of  looking, 
III.    745    ehpaxov   ix    VYiibv.     IV.    568    ix 
novroLO . . .  |  Sepxo^ievot  Kepxvpav,  IV.  898  eiopfiov 
hehoxYi^evai    ix    TtepicdTf^g.     Cf  A  337,   H    154; 
also  T  375,  11  715,  etc. 

e)  Of  the  extent  or  measurement  from  a  point, 
I.  222  xpdarog  i^  vrdroLO  xai  avxevog  .  .  | 
hoveovro , . . e^Eipai,  I.  743  ix.., oifiov  \... ^vvoxri 
xexd:{aaTo.  1. 1310—1313  rolatv  Se  rXavxog  . . . 
a?i6g  i^etpadv^Yi  |  .  .  .  |  iJ^.^  Se  T^axvriev  re  xdpyj 
xai  aryj^e'  deipag  \  veio^ev  ix  'kayovidv,  II.  736 
ex  h"  avTyjg  [dxpyjg]  .  .  .  xaraxexlirai  Yinsipovhe. 
III.  1271  ooGov  r'  ix  ^al^lhog . . .  vvaaa  \  yiyverar, 
cf  0  16  oaov  ovpavdg  iar    dm  yaiYig,     IV.  180 


—  ii6  — 

[Xpvaeov  aurov]  2xil(^  emEi^evog  iSfio)  \  aix^voq 
If  vnaroLO  nohyivexk^.  IV.  1346  s^oa^EvaL  i^ 
vndroio  I  ai';^ero$.  IV.  1608  Sei^ag  8e  ol  si 
vTtdroLO  I  xpdarog  . . .  ear  ini  vrj^vv  | . . .  ^axdpeaac 
,,Mxro,     Cf.  H  177,  n  640,  2  353,  X  397,  etc. 

a.    TEMPORAL. 

I.  861  d^^oT.iYi  K  Eig  Yjixap  del  s^  Yiiiarog  yiev  \ 
vavraiyjg  III.  1340  i^  iovg,  IV.  1772  eig  Irog 
ic  iTfog.— II.  911  8^  ov.  III.  302  ex  Se  rod. 
IV.  431  if  In  xeivov,  \  e^  ok  A  6,  493,  0  295, 
I  106,  H  86;  a  188,  /3  27,  90,  ^  245,  ete. 

3.    METAPHORIC. 

a)  Of  a  preference  or  discrimination. 

I.  620  oiy\  ^'  ex  naCEidv  yEpapov  TtEpifdtfaro 
narpog  \  'T^inv'kELa.  11. 1150  rov  (iev  [xpiov]  . . . 
IppE^Ev ...  1 4>i;f  16)  ex  ndvruiv . . .  Aa'.  I.  1352  pvaC 
oTtaaaav , . .  dplarovg  \  vleag  ex  hri^oio.  Cf.  A  96, 
0  680,  2  431,  etc. 

b)  Of  the  source  or  origin. 

(a)  When  the  source  is  a  person: — I.  283 
TO  yap  oLov  Iyjv  en  ^oinov  eeXSidp  \  ex  ae^ev.  I. 
1071  ex  Aiog  Yiiiap  enriXv^Ev;  similarly  II.  196 
^hfparov  ex  Aiog  yiev\  II.  527  ex  Aiog  oiJpai;  II. 
995  ex  Aio^Ev  nvoial .  .  .  |  yiIv'^ov,  II.  1122  to  he 
(ivfiov  ex  Aiog  vhup  \  l^^ev.  IV.  446  ex  oe^ev 
ovXofiEPai  r  Ipi^Eg.  IV.  1082  evlaxero  if  e^ev 
opxoig.  Here  belong  the  examples  of  learning 
or  hearing  a  thing  from  a  person:  III.  182  Jf 


t  yt 


■V^ 


'r 


V 


—  II7-- 

avrolo  .  .  .  huEvreg.  III.  677  ihdYjg  ex  narpog 
eviTLriv.  III.  903  Eiaaiovaai  \  if  EfiE^av  Note- 
worthy is  the  example  of  naming  a  place  after 
some  one:  IV.  1762  diuEL^aro  5'  ovvo^ta  Q)7p>7$  | 
if  e^Ev.  For  Homeric  parallels  compare:  A  63, 
525,  B  197,  e  140,  251,  K  68,  H  19;  a  283,  [i 
136,  0  374,  p  518,  etc.;  also  h.  Merc.  477;  Xen. 
Ana.  II.  6,  17. 

{(i)  When  the  source  is  a  thing: — III.  294 
[Ttrp]  a^ka^arov  if  oXiyoio  \  haXov  dvEyp6[.i£vov. 

III.  498  86aELV  6'  if  o^iog  yevvcdv  onopov; 
similarly  III.  1027. —  III.  1347  ex  nora^olo 
podidv  I  .  .  .  d(pvaodfjEvog.  IV.  157  ^dnrova  ex 
xvxEidvog.  IV.  674  nporEpyjg  if  i?.vog  e(i?ydarYiaEv, 

IV.  1426  ex  Se  vv  XEivcdP  \  bEvSpEiJV  .  .  .  e^E<pavEv. 
IV.  1446  pcdydhog  ex  TtErpyjg  niEV.  IV.  1734  ex 
he  yvvYi  ^6Xolo  nE?LELv. —  Here  belong  three 
other  examples  denoting  the  origin:  II.  931  ex 
rov  he  Avpyj  tieXel  ovvofia  x^P^-  I^- 1079  xTiayyifj 
8'fiov  tieXel  if  6(xd8oLO.  III.  1301  Secvog  5'  if 
avrov  neTiErat  j3p6^og.     Cf.  x  350,  etc. 

c)  Of  the  material  out  of  which  something  is  made. 
II.  845    vriiog    ex  xorivoio    <^d/layf.     III.  1324 
rvxrYiv  if  dhd\iavrog  em^vvEGXEv  ex^r^Yjv.     Cf. 

X  152. 

d)  Of  the  progenitor. 

II.  1153  TG)v  if  dfi^orEpov  sifih  yhog.  III. 
919  if  atToIo  Atog  yhog.  Cf.  E  544,  H  113, 
<I>  157,  *  347;  v  192,  etc. 


if 


—  i[8  — 

e)  Of  the  agent, 
.901  Ttarra  yBvomo  \  €;c  jwaxapor;  gumi^fiy 
II.  608  /.lopaiuov  yjev  \  fx  (laxdficdv.  I.  1098  ix 
yap  Tvig  [Tfa^]  aveuoi  .  .  | .  neneipyiraL,  11.  426 
ix  ydp  T37$  [Ki;7tp(f5o$]  xXvrd  Tielpara  xelrai 
de^Xuv,  II.  798  8^  o^eui'  ehoaav  riaiv.  III. 
431  [dvdyxYj]  yj  i^is  xai  h^^d^e  vela^ai  ijiex^pasv 
ix  (iaail^og,  which  the  scholiast  exphiins  by 
d^iyfie^a  npog  ae  (iiao^evreg  vno  rov  (iaaikkdg. 
Cf.  B  33,  70,  669,  E  384,  P  101,  etc. 

/)  Of  the  cause:  ^Hn  consequence  of  ^'  '  ^ on  account  of  ^\ 

I.  498  veixeog  i^  okoolo  Siexpi^sv.     I.  520  ix  5' 

dve^ioio  I  eifiioi  ixXv^ovro  nvaaGOfiivyig  aXog  dxpai; 

similarly  11.  1248;   III.  345;  IV.  215,  607.— 

I.  1073  i^  dx8(>iv  epyoio,..e^v6ovro.    II.  432  ix 

xa^droio  |  ao^^^  dvatpvatocov.    III.  &27  ix  S"  apa 

rov    velxog    neXev,     lY.  613    ?u7iciv   ix   narpog 

ivmijg.     IV.  1725  ix  be  vv  xeivrig  \  ^oXn^g  .  .  . 

yvvdixeg  |  avSpdai  byipmavrai.    Cf.  H  111,  I  566, 

A  308;  y  135,  S  343,  ^  29,  o  197,  w  388,  etc. 

g)  Of  conformity'  ^^  according  toy 

III.  1006  ix  [lop^ng,     Cf  K  68. 

Metaphoric  are  also  III.  616  xovpriv  ^'  i^ 
dx^c^v  dSivog  xareXutpeev  vnpog  "refreshing  sleep 
gave  the  maiden  rest  from  her  anxieties*'. 
Homer  uses  the  simple  genitive  in  l  460  xdS  5e 
jc'  ifiov  xijp  Xcd^i^aeie  xaxc^v.  II.  828  Ix  .  .  . 
d^pdaroio  '* unexpectedly";  cf.  and  anovSyjg 
"earnestly"  H  359,  M  233. 


1. 


'!#» 


4 


'i> 


—  119  — 

TtpO 

The  primary  meaning  of  npo  ( Sanskrit  pri, 
Latin  pro)  is  "forward",  "in  advance  of", 
"before".  Homer  uses  it  chiefly  in  the  local 
sense.  In  Apollonius  Ttpo  is  used  in  case- 
construction  only  twice,  and  in  both  passages 
it  is  local.  I.  781  Ttpo  noXyjog  II.  811  Ttpo  dcreog, 
Cf.  0  351,  T  292,  X  110,  fl  783;  x  105,  u  468. 

It  is  not  surprising  that  Apollonius  avoided 
the  temporal  Ttpo  (K  224,  A  50=8  469.  o  524, 
p  476),  because  this  usage  had  become  prosaic. 
Cf.  Lutz,  p.  60;  also  Sobolewski,  p.  105.  That 
he  did  not  use  Ttpo  in  its  metaphoric  sense  of 
hnip  or  7t8pL  "in  behalf  of"  (A  156,  373,  0  57) 
may  be  accounted  for  by  the  very  small  per- 
centage which  Ttpo  holds  among  the  prepo- 
sitions in  Apollonius. 

In  the  sense  of  Ttpo  (local) ,  Apollonius  used 
three  double  prepositions,  none  of  which   are 

found  in  Homer. 

a)  TtpoTtap. 
I.  454  TtoTiLOv  npoTtap  alyiaTiOlo;  IV.  1286 
bo^LXov  TtpoTtap   aiyia^lo.     Cf.  Hes.  Th.  518; 
Eurip.  Phoen.  120. 

(3)  Ttponpo. 
III.  453   TtpoTtpo   5'   dp  6<p^a?i(i(^v   en   ol 
(VSaX/lfTo  ndvra. 

y)   VTtOTtpO. 
IV.   178  (jTtOTtpO  TtoSoV. 


—  I20 


VTIEX 


This  compound  preposition  means  ^^from 
beneath",  ''away  from  under'*,  and  is  almost 
exclusively  used  in  a  local  sense.  There  is  no 
notable  divergence  in  Apollonius  from  the 
Homeric  usage. 

1.    OF  PLACE- 

I  745  ^vvo'^Yi  x8^d?.aaro  j(^iridvog  \  vep^ev 
vnex  f.ia^olo.  I.  913  Xvaev  vnex  nerpyig,  I.  1166 
rvr^ov  vnex  ^pvyirig  Ttape^fTpfor.  I.  1204 
vnex  nporovuv  ipvoyirai,  II.  670  vne^  aXog 
elXxov  iper^d.  IV.  931  SeX^lveg  vne^  a>.6g  .  | . . 
iXioacdVTai.  III.  575  rvr^ov  vnex  eXeog  x^P^¥ 
inixeXoav,     III.    1182    vnex   yevvuv   sXdaaaa, 

III.  1318  vnex  nifog ...  | ;ta^6(T3>7J^.  IV.  1657  Inex 
^eXeoiv  ipvaavro.     Cf.  A  465,  0  504,  S  232,  ete. 

2.    OF  PERSON. 

IV.  949 aX^yj  vne^  dTiXYjg  ^e^erai  [afpdipav]. 

IV.  1222  ^Xv^e  5'  oipog  | . . .  vnex  Aiog.     Cf.  P 
581,  589;  X  37. 

3.    METAPHORIC. 

III.  608  vnex  xaxoTyjrog  aXv^vj,  Cf.  vnex 
xaxov  in  N  89,  0  700,  T  300;  f£  107. 


♦ ' 


121 


I:' 


w 


B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 


iv 


Form: — The  preposition  iv  was  probably 
at  one  time  a  locative  case  without  suffix, — ivi 
being  the  form  with  suffix.  To  iv  and  ivl 
correspond  eiv  and  eivi,  which  seem  to  be 
metrical  lengthenings  of  the  former.  The 
numerical  relation  of  these  forms  in  case-con- 
struction in  Apollonius  as  compared  with 
Homer  is  as  follows: 


ivl 

ip 

€lv 

elvi 

Apol. 
Horn. 

157 
6oi 

133 
1251 

8 
36 

0 
5 

These  figures  show  a  special  fondness  on  the 
part  of  Apollonius  for  ivi,  while  he  avoided  elvi 
altogether. 

Meaning: — iv  denotes  primarily  rest  in  a 
place.  Hence  in  sense  as  well  as  in  case- 
construction,  it  stands  between  ix  and  eig. 
Besides  a)  the  radical  sense  "in",  iv  has  the 
following  local  meanings: 

b)  "among",  with  the  plural  of  persons. 

c)  "on",  of  superposition. 

d)  "into"  or  "upon"  with  verbs  of  motion 
(constructio  praegnans).  Closely  connected 
with  these  local  uses  is  the  quasi-instrumental 
use  in  such  phrases  as  ivi  ;f fpciv  bovpara  vid^iYi- 


i 


—  122  — 


aavrsg;  celov  S"  fV;^fta$  ^^  7ta?Mirtaiv  or  iv 
ofp^Ti^olat  i^ovrsg.  The  examples  in  which  iv 
is  used  metaphorically  are  rare  in  epic  poetry, 
and  denote  chiefly  the  occasion,  the  condition 
or  state.  Likewise  the  temporal  use  of  ev  is 
little  represented  in  the  epic  literature. 

I.    LOCAL. 

WITH  VERBS  OF  REST  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  The  place  in  which  something  is  or  happens. 
(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries, 
islands  or  cities: — IV.  425  Ai>j  h  dfi^idTiO)  .  .  . 
xd^ov;  IV.  434  Airi  evi  xdXXine  ri^ao).  III.  1177 
ov  'D.yvyiYi  svi  (dri^ri  |  .  .  .  nepvev.  II.  522  iv 
ie  Keo  xarevdoaaro.  IV.  1687  KpriZYi  evi  hi] 
xvE^g  Yjvli^oi^o.  IV.  614  rov  iv  TuTtapii 
Aaxepei'^  \,„erixrev.  I.  83  Ai^vyi  hi  Tap;|^i;(JarTo; 
IV.  1483  Ai[3vYi  hi.,.  sXovro.  I.  770  MatmXo) 
iv  .  .  .  iyyvdii^ev.  I.  536-537  &ar'  u^eoi 
*ot/3ct)  x^9^^  ^  ^^^  Yiv'^ol  I  Yi  nov  iv  'Oprvyixi .  • . 
aryjcdfieioi.  I.  1305  T>7i'6)  iv  dfx^ipvrYi  nepvev. 
I.  94  liYiXeix;  hi  ^^ri  hi  h^^ata  vals  Tiiaa^eig; 
cf.  A  155  iv  4>3t'p,  h  555  'I^dxij  hi  olxia  vaiav: 
Find.  Pyth.  III.  101,  and  scliol.  to  Nem.  V.  25 
TlviXevg  i'  iv  ^^lyi  ipi^6?jixL  vale  Xiaa^eig, 
Hence  there  is  no  need  for  construing  hi  with 
vaU,  as  Gerhard  and  Wellauer  have  done  for 
the  reason  that  the  caesura  of  the  verse  falls 
between  case   and  preposition.     The  Bucolic 


i-r 


I 


—     123    — 

Diaeresis  satisfies  the  requirements  of  the  meter, 
so  that  there  is  no  cause  for  changing  the  read- 
ing of  the  Manuscripts  he  to  ivL  These 
remarks  apply  equally  as  well  to  IV.  1687. — 
I.  45  4>i;Xdxv?  hi  byjpdv  s^.einro.  For  examples 
from  Homer  compare  B  766,  V  244,  N  453;  a 
395,  h  556,  e  123,  ^  80,  X  325,  v  260,  etc. 

Q3)  With  appellatives  signifying  the  great 
divisions  of  the  world  and  other  localities: — 
I.  128  ivl  7ip6rYiai  Mvxy;vai(jiv  dyopioiv  |  .  .  . 
dne^T^xaro:  similarly  I.  673  aryj  h'  dp  ivi  ^eaari 
dyopfi  (assembly).  A  mixed  example  is  II. 
1021-1024,  describing  the  perverted  customs 
of  the  Mossynoeci  on  the  Pontus,  oaaa  fiev 
d[i<pahiYi  pe^eiv  ^e/xigy  yi  ivl  Syi(i%  \  n  dyop^j  rdhe 
ndvta  bofioig  hi  ^lYi'^avouivrai  \  oaaa  5'  ivi 
fieydpoig  7t€7tovi^[iE^a,  xeiva  S^vpa^e  |  d^eyecdg 
fjieaariaiv  ivi  ^e^ovaiv  dyvialg. — I.  499  iv  al^epi 
rexfiap  expvaiv.  I.  831  Aiyairi  oaai  \^v^aoi]  elv 
aTii  vaisrdjovaiv,  similarly  III.  1293;  IV.  562, 
588,  790,  981,  1635.— IV.  1713  dlaei  hi  crxttpw 
re(ievog  .  .  .  \7t0ie0v.  III.  114  evpe  hi  rovy^  .  . . 
^Xep^  iv  dTiOYi.  II.  910  w  iv  [drrpo]  ...ayiag 
evvd^ero  vvxrag;  similarly  III.  134;  IV.  1129, 
1137. — I.  126  ivi  ^Yioarig  \  ipep^ero  Aaimeiyjg. 
III.  1031  Tc5  S'  hi  [(36^po)]  ^^:^vv  I  dpveiov 
a^d(eiv.  I.  1323  [lolpav  dvaTOJiaeiv  XaXv^mv 
iv  dneipovi  yai^',  similar  examples  are:  II.  151, 


I 


—  124  — 

872,  1018;  III.  204,  855;  IV.  480,  986,  1498.— 
IV.  916  Kvnpig  er  iv  hiraig  dvepeylaro  [Bovtt^v], 

II.  820  xelro  ydp  elafterft  ^')raxid(]eog  er  noraiiolo', 
IV.  316  elaiiib'valai  8'  sv  dGnsra  n^sa  XeItiov. 
IL  278  G)g  5'  or'  irl  xvYiiiolai  xvreg  .  .  .  |  >?  alyag 
xepaovg  7,e  npoxag  i^revovreg;  similarly  II.  1213; 

III.  851. — II.  972  iv  xo^Tto) .  .  .  |  xsXaav.  I.  965 
aarsog  evXifxevi  npvuvT^aia  vy;dg  dvd^^ai;  IV.  1123 
rovg  5'  Evpsv  . . .  |  'TXXixio  iv  T^iuevi.  III.  42  tl  en 
[fii^X^^  '^dvrahaiha7.a  j^d7^xevev.  11.387  tv?  f^tr 
t'  ivi  [vYiabi]  vr,6v  .  .  .  Tto/j^aa^';  similarly  IV. 
452,  544,  1726.  IV.  331  kfpy?  ^ev  iv  [i^/ydw] 
lepov  eaxev  ehe'^Tiov  \  iv  h'  erepYi  .  .  .  (ialvov  is  a 
typical  example  of  iv  with  a  verb  of  rest  and 
of  motion  in  the  same  sentence. — II.  1006 
epGYievi:i  vo^u  evi  noif^iaivovGiv.  L  1006  ivi 
^vvoj(^Y}  ?.ifievog  .  .  .  reravro;  similarly  II.  318; 

IV.  627. — I.  375  iv  5'  6?.XL)  ^eardg  aropeaavro 
^dXayyag.  III.  976  Ttdrp'}?  evt  vaierdaaxov. 
III.  1206  ne^o)  evt  (io^pov  opv^ag;  IV.  1394 
neSov,  G)  evL  Xdh(^v  .  .  .  ^iero  fiyjXa.  I.  81 
nXayj^^evrag  Ai(3vyig  ivi  neipaai.  II.  131  J)$  he 
fieXiGcdov  Gfi^vog  .  .  .  fjteXiGGoxofioi  nerpYi  evi 
xanviooGiv.  II.  939  cS  evt  [^naTafidi]  xovpyj  \ 
Ay^ruig  .  ,  ,  \  ov  5f^a$  .  .  .  dva^v^et;  III.  57 
Ttoradw  evt  ^aGiht  vYJa  xartG^^t;  III.  168  fjpcjeg 

.  .  ,  iv  7iora(.io}  xa^^  eXog  T^eXo^yifievot- — I.  16 
evt  Ttovro}  .  . .  vogtov  oXeGG^;  similarly  III.  743; 


r 


4 


! 


4 


—  125  — 

IV.  1705. — II.  1193  ivi  novrov  GreividnCiGvviaGt. 
IV.  13  xefidg,  yjvre  (ia^etYig  Tdp(peGtv  iv  ^vTiOxoto 
xvvi^v  i<p6(3^Gev  ofioxTirj.  II.  843  xej(yrat  tovh^ 
dvepog  iv  ^dovl  xeivri  tvfi(3og.  III.  170  y}  ivi 
X(^PV  •  •  •  ^hpf^ocdvrtg  "sitting  in  their  place";  III. 
1163  ore  Syj  irdpoig  i^avTtg  e^ixro  iv  x^PV- — ^• 
529  ibaGavro  . . .  ipeGGefxev  <5  ivi  x^P^':>  similarly 
III.  944,  980;  IV.  1396.  For  Homeric 
examples  compare  A  105,  358,  F  34,  A  483, 
I  634,  0  20,  631,  2  36,  4>  77,  239;  a  186,  y  103, 
5  335,  yj  244,  t  25,  36,  57,  200,  x  210,  v  188, 
o  441,  p  136,  etc. 

(y)  Of  buildings,  parts  of  buildings  and 
the  like: — I.  148  h6[iotg  evt  Tvv^apeoto  .  .  .  rexev; 
similarly  I.  225;  II.  437,  459, 1022, 1154.  I.  818 
dXX  olat  xovpat  T^i^irif^eg  ev  re  SofiotGiv  \  ev  re 
X^polg  dyopYi  re  xai  elT^xnivriGt  [leTiOvro,  is  a 
mixed  example. — IV.  1022  ert  [xot  [lirpYj  [levet, 
0)g  ivi  narpog  S6uaGtv.  IV.  810  ov  5>7  vvv 
H^eipuvog  iv  y]^eGt  Kevravpoto  vYitdbeg  xo^eovGt. 

III.  656  ore  rtg  vv^^yi  '^aT.epov  itoGtv  iv  ^aXd- 
^otGtv  fivperai]  similarly  III.  671,  798,  1127. — 

IV.  1093  6p(pvaiYi  ivi  ;^aXx6i^  dXerpevovGa  xaXiii, 
I.  285  xeveolGL  keXei^^o^at  iv  ^eydpotGtv; 
similarly  I.  810,  909;  II.  304,  778,  1023;  III. 
228,  305,  1116;  IV.  8,  1083,  1160.— II.  1028 
iv  I'^idTG}  jiaGi7.evg  ^oGGvvt  ^adcroji^;  cf.  Xen. 
Ana.  V.  4,  26.     III.  939   vYidvhe  ^ed$  l^t,  n;^ 


—    126  — 

m  xovpriv  Siisig,  III.  278  npoSo^o)  evL  ro^a 
ravvaaag;  similarly  III.  648,  838;  IV.  471. — 
I.  1174  ip  TtpofioTi-^  . . .  yovvar'  exafi-^ev;  III.  215 
larap  5'  iv  npofioXftai^ — II.  381  hvpareoig 
nvfiyoiatp  ip  olxta  rexri^papreg.  IV.  1283  fivxal 
arixolg  Ipi  <pavrd^uprai.  I.  121  ara^fiolaip  ip 
'l^ix^oio  [iiioyyias  AioXiSrig];  II.  123  (5$  S"  or 
ipi  ara^fiolGLP  ansipopa  (li^Xa  i^^yjaap  Kvxoi, — 
Here  belong  three  examples  of  ip  with  the 
genitive  in  the  elliptical  construction,  i.  e.  with 
the  characteristic  place  understood:  I.  960 
'Idopeg  ISpvaaPTo  |  Upop . .  .  'lyjoopiyjg  ip  ^A^^pyjg; 
cf.  X  282;  also  Aesch.  Sup.  228,  416;  Arist. 
Kan.  774. — IV.  1159  ov  fisp  ip  'A^lxtrooio  ydfiop 
(lEPsatPB  releaaai;  IV.  1722  ip  'A?.xlv6olo  (Soo- 
xraaiag  opouaai;  cf.  >7  132;  Herod.  I.  36.  The 
examples  in  Homer,  coming  under  this  cate- 
gory are  numerous.  Cf.  H  339,  A  132,  H  642; 
^  15,  n  441,  i;  1,  etc. 

(5)  Of  beds: — I.  264  ip  Xexeeaot  xa2.v^l^' 
d^€Pog'y  IV.  1069  xovpi^g  nipi  ^y^ndaaxop  \  omv 
ipl  Xf;Kf€(T<T(.— 1. 872  TOP  6'  ipi  ^iixrpoig  'T4^(7tvly^g 
eldre;  II.  1238  rovg  5'  ipi  Xixrpoig  (in  concubitu) 
rir^s  3fd.— Cf  X  503;  a  437,^337,  x  497,  etc. 

(f)  Of  vehicles  and  the  like.— III.  309  ip 
ap^aoip  'EeXioLO  Sipevaag.  IV.  219  6  S'evrvxru 
ipi  bi^po)  Aii^ryjg  Innoiai  fxeTBTtpensp.  I.  1111 
Ttavporipovg  irdpoiP  ip   pyji   Xinopreg;   III.  525 


f 


L- 


^ 


f 


127  

ipy^rvoia^'  ipl  vyjI — .1.  622  Xdpmxi  5'  ip  xolXyi 
(iLP  vnep^'  aXog  vixe,  II.  132  do'k'kBeg  w  ipi 
ai(i^2.o)  ^ofi(3yib6p  xXopBOPtat  [jueXiaaai'].  III. 
801  ^(opiafiop  ...  ri  Ipl  noXXa  <|)dp/[^am  .  .  . 
exBLTo.  III.  858  x£:^ipyiP  ix^idha  ^rjyov  \  Kaonivi 
iv  x6x^(f>  afiYicyaro.  III.  1298  G)g  S'  or'  ivi 
roYjrolGiP  BvpptvoL  x^dpoLOLV  I  ^vaai .  .  .  dva^ap- 
fiaipovaip.  I.  746  x^^^^h  •  •  •  «^  aani^L  ^aip€r\ 
C£  B  87,  0  345,  0  367,  U  402,  ^  248,  etc. 

(^)  Of  parts  of  the  body.— II.  956  Itiepr^aiv 
ip  dyxoivYiaiP  SdfiaaaBP.  IV.  1732  elaaro  ydp 
ol  Saifioviyj  /3c5;ia^  .  .  .q)iv  dyoarG),  III.  1160 
vypd  5'  ipi  (37ie(pdpoLg  exev  o^fiara,  IV.  696 
oaae  i^vg  ipi  ^Xe^dpoiCLP  dveax^^ov,  II.  281 
d;cp'y?$  ip  yepveaat  [idryjv  dpdfSyjCfav  oSovrag.  III. 
63  OGGOP  ifiolatp  ipi  a^hog  enXero  yvioig.  IV. 
1142  dr^ea  . . .  Xevxolg  ipi .  ,  .  xoT^noig  \  ia^opeov. 

III.  644  ipi  xpabiri  a^eaoi  dXyo$.  III.  728  ^yi 
ydf>   fioc  ip  o^^aX^olat    (paeipot  r.dig;  similarly 

IV.  853,  1145.— III.  93  at^cog  eaaer' ipo^fiaatv, 
III.  457  ip  ovaOL . . .  opcipet  avbyj.  III.  635  ^oXig 
S'  iaayelparo  ^v[idp  \  6g  ndpog  iv  arippocg;  IV. 
1059  ip  areppoLg  dx^oiP  elXiaaero  ^viiog. — I.  478 
^opov  ^e^v  ^apoaXeov  x>7p  oibdvei  ip  ar^^sacL; 
similarly  III.  397,  759;  IV.  1721.— Cf  A  83, 
238,  I  554,  E  213,  316,  2  555,  T  169,*  417,  etc. 

Here   belong  also  ^pyjv  and  ^vfiog.     The 
examples   are   mixed,   i.   e.   partly   local  and 


128  — 

partly  metaphoric: — iv  ^peoi  ^v^dg  Idv^ri; 
similarly  IV.  782,  794,  1671.  Cf.  0  202,  413, 
K  232,  Pill,*  386,  *  600;  n  73,  i;  38,  etc.— 
III. 551  xeap  8b  fioi  wg  ivi  3i;/ic5  .  .  .  nponoaGerai; 
similarly  III.  700;  IV.  1045.  Cf.  B  223,  I  459; 
;t  11,  etc. 

Noteworthy  are  two  examples  in  Apollonius, 
for  which  Homer  seems  to  have  no  parallel; 
VIZ.  I.  460  siv  iol  aiVw  nop^vpeaxev  Ixaara  "he 
pondered  everything  within  himself*'.  III.  23 
avhixa  TtopipvpovaaL  ivi  a^iaiv  "thinking  differ- 
ently within  themselves". 

(>7)  The  instrumental  use  of  h: — This  use 
of  h  with  the  dative  is  the  more  plastic  form 
for  the  simple  dative.  Both  uses  are  well 
represented  in  poetry,  while  in  Attic  prose  the 
latter  construction  prevails.  Some  of  the 
examples  here  given  are  on  the  boundary  line 
of  the  local  and  of  the  instrumental  use;  others 
are  more  clearly  instrumental. 

1st.  Examples  which  are  local  as  well  as 
instrumental:  I.  254  hi  xrepeeaaiv  sTivaMg; 
similarly  III.  1030;  IV.  214.— I.  1034  6  5'  ivi 
^afid^oLGiv  sXvG^eig.  Homer  uses  the  simple 
dative  in  H  640,  *  319;  ^  479,  etc.— I.  561  ivi 
X^pc^iv . . .  nyjhd^.t''  dfitpienEOx;  II.  1057  7t?Lardyyjv 
ivi  x^poi  rivdoauv;  similarly  III.  1263;  IV.  222, 
1153,  1175,  970,  1053.     Cf.  A  14,  238,  0  221, 


♦ 


t% 


—  129  — 

etc.—  II.  399  ivi  vyji  Ttape^.     Cf.  M  16;  a  211, 
13  226,  y  131,  V  317. 

2nd.  Examples  that  are  more  clearly 
instrumental:  II.  332  xaprvvavreg  ialg  ivi 
X^fxylv  ipsTfid  "plying  the  oars  with  their 
hands";  similarly  II.  712;  III.  140;  IV.  904.— 
I.  814  iv  o^^a^fzolai .  .  .  opocoro]  IV.  1617  repag 
alvov  iv  6^^a:;{,fiotGLV  iMvreg.  Cf.  A  587,  T  306, 
2  135,  190;  ^  459,  x  385,  £  343,  etc.  For  the 
dative  compare  (1)  Apollonius  I.  519,  631;  III. 
1009;  IV.  128,  476,  1038,  1668;  (2)  Homer 
r  28,  169,  E  770,  K  275,  N  99;  /?  155,  y  373, 
S  47,  226,  269,  etc.— II.  44  en  ^aiSpog  iv 
o^fiaaiv.  Cf.  Boiling  on  the  Epic  Fragment 
from  Oxyrynchus,  A.  J.  P.  XXII —III.  343  ^ 
S'  ivi  yofitpoig  laxsrai  [yYivg'\  "the  ship  is  held 
together  by  bolts".  III.  206  iv  dhei^yiroiai 
xareL^vaavre  (BoEtaig.  IV.  888  ravvaavreg  iv 
Ifidvreaat;  cf  the  scholiast. 

d)  Place  ''among,''  or  ''between''. 

In  Apollonius  as  in  Homer  this  use  is 
limited  to  plurals  denoting  persons  or  an 
assembly  of  persons.  I.  441  and  HI.  605  are 
plural  in  sense,  and  II.  597  is  personification. 
The  examples  are: — ^I.  1213  ov  iv  ^pvouEOOiv 
Ine^vev.  II.  238  ot  ivi  Qp'^xeaaiv  avaaaov. 
Cf.  A  109,  A  470,  H  45,  etc.— I.  343  ^fievoL  iv 
(ihaom;  similarly   I.  441,  464;  II.  309,  881. 


Cf.  H.  417,  M  206,  209,  2  569,  etc.— I.  656  ijf 
ivl  r^Giv  .  .  .  wyo^svBV.  I.  1338  ^dg  hi  roloiv 
anaaiv.  II.  10  toIov  5'  iv  navreaci  .  . .  h<paro 
(iv^v,  similarly  III.  443;  IV.  1276.  Cf.  n  378, 
etc.;  also  Aescli.  Pro.  973;  Arist.  Nub.  1366. — 
XL  597  iv  S'  dpa  fieaaaig  IlXyiyaaL  Sivyjeig  elx^v 
poog.  II.  748  rov  ^ev  h  b^tyovoiai  l,ocdvavTyiv 
ovofirjaav,  II.  1281  cdprj  h'  fjfiiv  ivl  o^ia 
fiyirtdao^ai'y  similarly  IV.  1191.  Cf.  K  435; 
4  144,  etc.  III.  605  ivl  XaXx(07t>7$  yeveii  rdfie 
Ivypd  rerix^oLt'  Cf.  I  634;  y  103,  etc. — III. 
667  yj  h'  ivl  natGlv  ^ar\  Cf.  a  114.— III.  812 
oa'  ivi  (^uolGL  neTjovrai,  Cf  Aesch.  Pro.  442. — 
III.  1105  AiYiTYig  h'  ov  rolog  iv  dvbpdaiv,  Cf  p 
354. — IV.  88  ^£ovg  ivi  aolmv  iraipoig  .  .  .  reOtv 
fiv^Giv  inuaropag  . . .  noiriaat.  Cf.  ^  703,  etc. — 
Without  Homeric  parallel  is  III.  314=835  iv 
noaiv  in  the  sense  of  iunoh6v\  but  compare 
Pind.  Pyth.  VIII.  43;  Soph.  Ant.  1327;  Eurip. 
Ale.  739. 

c)    To  denote  superposition. 

Kuehner-Gerth  and  Sobolewski  are  princi- 
pally responsible  for  this  category.  Greek  or 
Roman  writers  would  hardly  have  formed  this 
sub-division.  The  distinction  rests  with  us, 
and  it  comes  from  our  trying  to  express  with 
greater  logical  accuracy  the  position  of  things. 
Whether  we  should  render  the  Greek  iv  by 
"in"  or  "on"  depends  largely  on  our  idiom. 


I 


♦ 


^. 


, 


—  131  — 

We  can  say  "to  hunt  in  the  mountains'*,  but  we 
can  not  say  "to  sacrifice  in  the  beach".  "On  the 
campus"  and  "in  the  campus"  show  no  difference. 
Either  is  correct,  but  one  may  be  more 
habitual  than  the  other.  Idiomatic  differences 
exist  in  all  languages.  Thus  the  German  "aw/ 
dem  Lande  wohnen",  is  in  English  "to  live  in 
the  country".  The  most  important  cases  are 
those  in  which  a  distinction  in  meaning  is  to 
be  expressed;  as,  "fish  live  in  the  sea",  but  "a 
log  floats  on  the  sea". — In  the  following 
examples  from  Apollonius  we  would  translate 
iv  by  "on".  I.  728  iv  h'  dp  ixdorcd  \  ripfian 
SaiSaXa  7toX/ld  SiaxpiSov  ei  ixexaaro,  i.  e.  on 
either  end  of  the  Argo  were  separately  wrought 
many   curious   works.      Cf    Lalin,  p.  2,  b. — 

I.  1090  xexXt^evov  (laTuaxolg  ivl  x6eaaLV  "reclin- 
ing on  soft  skins".  II.  26  Afoi/,  ovr'  iv  opsaatv 
dvipsg  dfi^inhovrai;  similarly  11.  478,  525, 
1102;  III.  857,  968;  IV.  265,  287,  518,  1680.— 

II.  927  iv  aiyia^o)  ^rsve?j)v  Td<pov  dfi^snhovro, 
II.  1235  evr^  iv  'OXviino)  Tirrivov  yjvaaatv,  IV. 
232  evpovreg  It*  eiv  kXog  oUfian  v^a,  IV.  280 
xvpfiiag,  olg  evi  ndaat  oSol  .  .  .  eaoiv,  "maps,  on 
which  were  all  the  roads".  IV.  882  ;ta^fi;va$ 
t'  d^^snevovro,  r^g  evt  ,  ,  .  vvxr^  deaav.  IV. 
1717  ipyjfialip  ivl  \>e^eLv  dxT'^,  For  Homer  com- 
pare A  29,  34,  *  316;  a  108,  yi  287,  r  520,  etc. 


—  I32— 
WITH  VERBS  OF  MOTION,  IMPI^YING  SUBSEQUENT  REST: 

When  motion  is  expressed  by  iv  with  the 
dative  instead  of  t-ig^  ini  or  npog  with  the 
accusative,  we  have  what  is  known  as  the 
'' constructio  praeg7ians'\  i.  e.  the  rest  or 
position,  consequent  upon  the  motion,  is  antic- 
ipated; e.  g.  iv  yatri  neaeeiv  (IV.  388)  '^'to  fall 
(to  the  ground  and  remain  lying)  on  the 
ground".  This  use  is  chiefly  epic.  For  the 
examples  in  Aeschylus  see  Lalin,  p.  3-4. 
Apollonius  adheres  to  the  Homeric  usage. 

BttU'6):  1)  Of  going  aboard  a  ship  II.  962 
ivl  vrii  .  .  .  l^riaav.  Cf.  B  610.  2)  Of  landing 
IV.  332  iv  5'  irepYi  [vyjoo)]  .  .  .  palvov. 

MX'ku:  II.  107  iv  xoviYiai  (id2,8v.  Cf.  E  588; 
X  352,  etc.;  similarly  III.  1307  rov  S'  iv  ;^3^o^i 
xd(3(3aXev  oxXdg.  Metaphoric  are  II.  256  ^ri 
fioi  ravra  vou  evi  fiaXkeo]  IV.  1109  yi  h^  snog  iv 
^v^G)  nvxivov  lidXer.     Cf.  E  513;  i;  65. 

Aexo^ai:  III.  585  5f;^3at  ivi  ^BydpOLOLV 
i^eortov;  IV.  186  Hix^oLt  5'  ivl  ;^fpcrtr  i-^oiv;  IV. 

1133  (J  ivl  x6Xno}  U^aro.   Cf.  2  331,  *  89;  p  110. 

Ai;u)  (hvvi^):  I.  638  'T^inv'keia  hvv'  ivl 
Tei;;^eat  rarpog.  IV.  769  hv  h"  ivl  novro)  Aiyaioi 
f  Ipt$].     Cf.  K  254,  *  131;  o  496,  etc. 

EfXew:  I.  1247  ivl  ora^^olOL  vo^^eg  eXaav 
llin^^al     Cf.  ^  210. 

'Ep€iS(j:  1.  1234  a>$  rd  Ttpwra  pooj  Ivl  xdXniv 
Ipetdev. 


«»y 


—  133  — 

©aat^G):  III.  251  ^dfiL^ev  \  iv  ueydpoig;  cf. 

II.  453  0?  xal  npoa^ev  in''  yj^iari  xelas  ^dui^ov. 

@p6(Jxco:  IV.  487  ivi  ara^^olai  ^opovrsg, 
Cf.  E  161. 

'lSpi;(i):  IV.  1548  <t>ot/3ou  xrepag  ISpvov  iv 
X^ovL     Cf.  y  38,  e  86. 

''1^6):  I.  788  xXia^G) evi . ..elaev;  similarly  II. 
36;  III.  49;  IV.  689.   Cf.  I  200, 0 150,  *  202,  etc. 

Mi;po^^af:  11.  371  xokiti^  iv  ev^ioovri  .  .  . 
(ivperai;  cf.  schol. 

TiriyvvfiL:  IV.  694  (pdayavov  iv  ;t^ort  Tirj^ag; 
IV.  1091  yT^rivaig  evi  .  ,  .  xevrpa  nyj^e.  Cf.  Z 
10,  K  374,  X  276,  etc. 

Uinro:  I.  506  eneaev  5'  ivl  x^iaoiv  cjxeavolo; 
similarly  I.  757,   1027,  1056;  II.  1014,  1038; 

III.  1312;  IV.  388,    1290.     Cf.  A  482,  E  370, 
400,  0  538,  n  258,  etc. 

TIpo-<^ep(x) :  III.  1114  iv  o^^aTi^olGtv  iTisy- 
;^eta$  npo^epovaa, 

2x>7pt7trw:  11.668  Irt  ;/a/>7;K>7^d$(T;c>7p67troi^Tf. 

Ti^yifii:  II.  233  xaxii  iv  yaarepi  ^ea^ai. 
Cf.  A  441. — IV.  159  avTYi ivl  x^9V  "^n^^vlyevvv^ 

X6(o:  III.  757  [i'Scop]  TO  ^>7  veov  ie  Xe/?)7Tt,| 
ns  Tiov  iv  yav2.(^  xsxv^oit-     Cf.  v  261. 

In  IV.  930  TtlayxrYiatv  ivl  aniXd^saaiv 
ipvaaai  the  preposition  means  between. 


—  134  — 
9.    TEMPORAL. 

I.  1080  mLTCkoiihri  h"  hi  vvxri;  similarly 
m.  798,  862;  IV.  60.— III.  327  npor ipoi  hi 
%aTi;  similarly  IV.  236,  1477, 1500.— IV.  217 
^vTjoxoifi  hi  fXYivL  IV.  244  rfil  ivi  Tfirdri^, 
For  examples  of  this  use  in  Homer  compare 
n  643,  2  251;  (i  76,  p  176,  a  367,  x  301;  also 
h.  Merc.  67,  155,  400.  A  blending  of  the 
local  and  temporal  use  gives: 

3.  THE  HETAPHORIC  USAGES  TO  DE  nOTE 

a)   The  occasion* 

A  good  example  to  show  this  transition  is 
I.  818  bXX  olai  xovpat  T^yiin^eg  ev  re  io^oLCiv  sv 
re  x^P^^^i  ayopy?  re  xai  eiTianivYiat  ^eXovro,  "only 
the  captive  maidens  were  honored  in  the  house, 
at  the  dance,  at  the  meeting  and  at  banquets". 
Other  examples  are:  I.  200  h  araSiYi  Se^y^^evog 
dvn^epea^ai.  I.  215  x^9^  ^^^  hvevovaav.  I. 
290  ov8'  h  ompo)  madfiYjv;  II.  306  oUv  r'  h 
ovelpaat  ^vfiov  laivcdv.  I.  467  xvSog  hi  nroX- 
ifioiaiv  dapo/ittt. — Cf.  A  258,  Q.  568;  e  395, 
5  497=;i  384,  T  581,  etc.  Another  metaphoric 
usage  is  that  of 

^)   The  cofidiiian  or  state, 

I.  160  hi  ^vvoxv  TtoXeiioio,  "in  the  pressure 
of  war".  I.  1211  roioiaiv  h  T^^eatv  avrog 
l^ep(3ev.  Cf.  I  143,  285.  II.  66  xaxii  8i^aavreg 
h  ala-jj.     Cf.  X  61,  etc.     II.  214  [;tapti']  xai 


y 


4 


\ 


—  135  — 

dpyaleoLatv  dvdnro^ai  h  xajidroiaiv,  ''even  in 
hardships  I  return  thanks".  II.  333-334  inei 
<pdog  ov  vv  ri  roaaov  \  eaaer'  h  evx^dXiiOLv,  oaov 
r  hi  xdpret  ;^apo)r  ''since  safety  will  depend 
not  so  much  upon  entreaties  as  upon  the 
strength  of  your  hands". — II  643  vfierepvi  dper^ 
6VL  ^dpGog  dsEcj.  II.  646  evre  ne^isa^e  e^kehoi 
dpya^ieoLg  hi  hei^aaiv,  "when  you  are  bold  in 
painful  fears".  Cf  n  212,  <p  88.— II.  1132= 
III.  476  h  xax6rYiri.  Cf.  V  20,  H  40,  51;  r  360. 
—IV.  1735  iiix^Yi  he  oi  h  ^LUryjri.  Cf  B  232, 
H  314,  331,  n  130;  3  313. 

Noteworthy  are  I.  1113  rolac  Se  Ma;cp<d5e$ 
Gxomai  xai  ndaa  nepaiyj  \  Opyjcxiyig  hi  ;|<ep(Ttr 
salg  npovpaiver'  iSea^ai;  IV.  202  vvv  5'  hi 
X^poiv  nalhag  eovg  ndrprjv  re  ^I'kYiv  yepa^ovg  re 
roxYJag  laxo^iev;  III.  549  ^ivevg  ye  ^eii  hi 
Kvnpihi  voarov  ne^pahev  eaaea^ai,  Cf.  I  97, 
0  741;  X  69;  also  Soph.  0.  C.  1443,  0.  T.  314; 
Arist.  Lys.  30  h  ralg  yvvai^iv  eariv  h  ocdryipia. 
In  IV.  998  ^eX^v  Se  ^oii  evt  ^(opyj^ea^ai, 
purpose  seems  to  be  expressed.  The  phrase 
is  equivalent  to  eg  noXe^ov  ^cdprj^ea^t  226,A 
E  737,  0  376,  K  78,  T  36,  etc.  As  Homer  has 
no  instance  of  hi  to  express  the  purpose,  and 
no  other  example  occurs  in  Apollonius,  I  am 
enclined  to  believe  that  hi  in  IV,  998  should 
read  em. 


—  136  — 

—  avv  — 

B.  Gildersleeve  (A.  J.  P.  XXIII.,  p.  15)  calls 
«Tuv  **a  false  Smerdis  on  the  list  of  the  prepositions". 
T.  Mommsen  (Beitr.,  p.  29)  says:  "Mir  ist  der 
linguistische  Ursprung  und  also  auch  die  Urbedeut- 
ung  des  Wortchens,  wie  bei  vielen  andern  Praposi- 
tionen,  dunkel.*'  Generally  speaking  it  means 
•*with",  **in  company  with"  "  with  the  help  of " 
or  **  attended  by  ".  When  used  with  a  person,  it  is 
sociative ;  otherwise,  it  is,  as  a  rule,  modal  or  instru- 
mental. As  in  Homer,  so  also  in  Apollonius  ffOv  ap- 
proaches occasionally  the  local  sense  of  fj^erd  c.  dat. 
as  in  I.  415  (  ^^829),  I.  869;  IV.  861.  In  as  far  as 
Apollonius  has  (tuv  more  frequently  with  the  person, 
he  conforms  with  the  use  in  the  Odyssey  ;  but  in  the 
preponderence  of  the  plural,  he  agrees  more  closely 
with  the  Iliad.  Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  Beitr.  p.  55,  and 
187.  The  combination  of  a  person  and  thing  with 
trov  does  not  occur  in  our  author ;  nor  has  he  an 
instance  of  two  nouns  in  different  numbers  governed 
by  only  one  <tov.  In  four  passages  (I.  1200;  III. 
1287;  IV.  1228,  1589;  cf.  S'498,  /  194;  V  118,  etc.,) 
ffov  is  used  after  adro^-^  in  place  of  the  simple  dative, 
of  which  Apollonius  has  twelve  examples.  Cf.  T. 
Mommsen,  Beitr.  p.  66,  188.  The  variant  form 
$ov^  which  occurs  nine  times  in  Homer,  is  found  twice 
in  Apollonius,  and  only  where  the  meter  calls  for  it. 

As  (Tuv  belongs  chiefly  to  the  higher  class  of  poetry 
(  Mommsen,  pp.  3-7  ),  it  is  not  surprising  to  find  an 
increase  of  this  preposition  in  Apollonius  in  propor- 
tion to  its  frequency  in  Homer.  It  may  be  classified 
as  follows : 


\  HI* 


f  r  y 


4 


\ 


tf 


'J 


\ 


-  137  — 

I.    SOCIATIVE,  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Aaompaniment, 

I.  70  dptOTj^ecrcTf  avv  avh^aaiv  6(ppa  veoiro. 
I.  131  avv  xal  ol  *'Tyla$  xlev;  similarly  I.  263, 
415,  557,  754,  756,  869,  888,  992;  II.  122,  305, 
458,  466,  705,  815,  1166;  III.  240,  450,  703, 
869,  1000,  1164,  1238;  IV.  22,  72,  734,  861, 
1019,  1039.  Homeric  examples  are:  A  227, 
307,  325,  Z  372,  A  140,  P  407,  2  65,  4>  460, 
^V  829,  n  430;  a  191,  362,  ^  183,  (3  32,  85, 
8  751,  ^  52,  80,  etc. 

d)  Partnership  or  co-operation. 

I.  111=11.  1191  avv  hk  01  "Apyot,  I  TeD^er. 
III.  539  avv  ho[\LQvi  Tteipyj^eiyjv;  similarly  IV.547, 
822.  Cf.  r  439,  Z  314,  I  49,  A  792;  >?  235, 
^  493,  V  391,  V  2,  etc. 

Here  belongs  the  metaphoric  expression 
^to  lie  with',  found  in  the  following  examples: 

III.  839  ovncd  /lexrpa  avv  dvSpdat  nopavvovaa. 

IV.  1105=1117  XExrpov  8e  avv  dvept  nopaaiv- 
ovaav.  IV.  793  re  a>vv  d^avdracg  r^e  ^vyjr'^atv 
iaveiv  IV.  1152  avv  d'kT.YikoiaLV  e^i^av.  Homer 
uses  Ttapd  c.  dat.  instead.  Cf.  e  154,  yj  347, 
X  464,  ^  219. 

a.    nODAL. 

The  best  examples  of  this  use  are:  I.  512 
avv  dfilSpoaiYi  .  .  .  av^ii;  cf.  B  787;  co  193;  Aesch. 
Sept.   487.  — 11.  1069  avv  xeXdSo);  cf.  A  161; 


—  138  — 

I  151;  Aesch.  Pers.  470.— III.  126  ^^  xeveaTg 
avv  x^9^'^^y  cf-  ^  3^9- — Examples  which  border 
on  this  as  well  as  on  the  following  category 
are:  I.  241  avv  r ev x£(y t^  OLtaaovr ag;    similarly 

I.  1059;  III.  499.— I.  1207  ""TTiag  x^^^h  ^^^ 
xaXniSi  .  .  .  St^)7To  xp/iVYig  hpov  poor.  III.  176 
xard  vYia  avv  evrsat  fiifive^'  exYi^^oi;  similarly 
IV.  1122,  1533.— III.  862  avv  op^vaiom 
pkpEaaiv.  III.  899  avv  noTiieaiv  oveiaaiv  olxct^^ 
hoia^e.  III.  1197  /?>?  ^'  k  ipw^'^^^  •  •  •  '^'^^^ 
rig  ^p  avv  naaiv  xp^^^^f-  m*  ^^'^^  ^vv  Sovpi 
xai  daniSt  [3alv  ig  df^Xoi;.  III.  1287  (391  5' 
avr^i  Ttporepidae  avv  dani^i.  Cf.  A  170,  A  419, 
E  297,  I  80,  194,  K  182,  H  498,  n  248;  X  359, 
V  118,  258,  etc. 

3,    INSTRUriENTAL. 

II.  1224  avv  Evreai  neipyi^^vai.  IV.  1096 
avv  tevx^<^iv  i^eXdaaifiL  Ko^xovg. — Cf.  E  220, 
Z  418,  A  386,  N  719,  etc. 

4.  CONCOniTANT:  ••TOGETHER  WITH." 

I.  617  avv  r'^aiv  iovg  eppaiaav  axoirag, 
1. 1200  i^rietpe  avv  avroig  exf^aai  yaiyjg  [i^drriv], 

II.  828  avv  oarm  Ivag  exepaev,  II.  1120 
xparepo  avv  Sovpari  xv^arog  opfiY}  \  viYJag  4>p$otot 
fi€T'  Yiiovag  ^dXe.  III.  689  fiyj  a^E  narrip 
^ELvoLai  avv  dvSpdaiv  avrix  oXiaaYi.  IV.  1228 
eXitwv  ...  xai  atEivag  avroig  avv  'Ex^vdai 
v^aovg,  IV.  1589  a^vrog  \  avrC)  avv  rpiTtoSi 
axeiov  ETtXEro,     Cf.  n  803,  P  57;  (i  408,  etc. 


♦  V 


—  139  — 

5.    TEHPORAL. 

IV.  1005  avv  Aiyirao  xeXev^o),  Here  avv 
seems  to  have  the  same  meaning  as  d[ia 
(temporal);  i.  e.  "at  the  arrival  of  Aeetes." 
The  example  has  been  variously  interpreted. 
Cf.  Haggett,  p.  29.  The  difficulty  arises  from 
the  doubtful  sense  of  xE?iev^og  in  this  particular 
passage.  Herwerden  (Mnemosyne,  XI.  p.  120) 
suggests  xeXeva^o),  taking  avv  in  the  meta- 
phoric  sense  of  xard  "according  to".  It  is  not 
impossible  that  the  phrase  means  "with  the 
expedition",  hence  "with  the  fleet  of  Aeetes". 
What  Gildersleeve  said  in  regard  to  avv  in 
general,  viz.  that  it  is  "a  false  Smerdis  on  the 
list  of  the  prepositions",  may  be  said  more 
particularly  of  this  example. 

C.   WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

—  Eig  — 

Form:  —  Morphologically  si<^  bears  a  close  relation 
to  iv.  Originally  there  were  the  two  forms  iv  and 
^v<^,  related  to  each  other  as  U  and  ^c.  The  doublets 
h  and  tv?  were  employed  to  differentiate  the  specific 
in  and  inio  relations,  ^v  being  restricted  to  the  dative 
and  cvy  to  the  accusative.  Exceptions  to  this  restric- 
tion are  seen  in  Pindar  (01.  X.  90;  Pyth.  II. 
21,  157;  Nem.  VII.  46),  where  ^v  governs  the 
accusative ;  cf.  Latin  in  with  the  accusative  and  with 


-  I40  — 


tlie  ablative.  The  form  ^v?  was  in  turn  bifurcated, 
owing  to  the  influence  of  following  sounds,  into 
^9  before  consonants  and  ^a-  before  vowels,  for  which 
the  Inscription  of  Gortyna  still  gives  evidence.  In 
Ionic- Attic  at  a  later  period  cv?  became  £jV  by  loss  of 
the  V  with  compensatory  lengthening.  The  doublets 
i?  and  £iV  were  both  used  for  a  time,  until  finally 
m  became  the  standard  prose  form. 

In  Apollonius  the  form  k  occurs  1 1 2  times  in  case- 
construction ,  while  ef?  is  found  only  53  times,  giving 
the  proportion  of  2  to  i ,  as  is  also  the  case  in  Homer. 

Meaning: — Besides  its  local  meanings,  "to", 
*  *  into' ' ,  "  toward' ' ,  ei^  developed  in  the  later  language 
a  number  of  metaphoric  usages.  Krebs  (p.  1 10 ) 
says:  *'Bei  der  Fliichtigkeit  seiner  Natur  verliert 
sich  e/y  mehr  als  jede  andere  Praposition  in  eine  reich 
ausgebildete  Phraseologie'*.  Most  of  these  meta- 
phoric usages  are  not  represented  in  epic  poetry,  and 
Apollonius  remained  true  to  his  department.  He 
uses  £^9: 

I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  The  place  to  which  or  into  which  a  motion  tends, 
(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries, 
islands,  cities,  seas  and  rivers:  III.  61  f$  "^ kila 
v(L\}i:i7Jkyii:ai\  similar  is  the  example  with  a 
noun  which  implies  motion:  IV.  1508  €$  " kiha 
yiverat  olfiog, — IV.  652  eg  Ai^T^iyiv  inepyiaav 
v^aov.  II.  692  el  S*  dv  oniaaG)  \  yalav  eg 
AlfiovLYiv  aaxYi^ia  vdarov  ondacYi,  III.  601 
ne^netv  eg  'Axct-dha  yalav;  similarly  IIL  1080; 
IV.  1327.— I.  336=11.  416  eg  'E;iXaSa  voarog; 


—  141  — 

similar  examples  are  eg  'E^l^dSa  yalav  Ixea^ai 
L904;cf.  II.  639,893;  III.  992;  IV.  98;  eg  'EXXciSa 
. . .  xc^ag  dyeiv  II.  1139;  of.  I.  416;  III.  29,  339, 
1059. — IV.  608  '"R^ihavov  npoxvXivberaL  d^poa 
ndvra;  cf.  IV.  626— III.  2  eg  'ioi^xdv  dvyjyaye 
xCyag;  cf.  also  III.  89,  1113  1134;  IV.  1161.— 
IV.  1490  eg  Al^vyiv  dnevaaae.  I.  623  eg 
OivoiriV  ipwavro.  I.  419  eg  'OprvyiYiv  .  .  .  Scopa 
xofiLoaG^;  cf  IV.  1703.— II.  1156  veviie^'  eg 
'Opxo^^^ov.  II.  986  TIoi^Toi'  eg  " A^etvov  .  .  . 
vne^evyerai  dxvyjv. —  For  Homeric  examples 
compare:  B  667,  752,  T  75,  Z  207,  I  381,  K  28, 
A  22,  fl  753;  a  18,  85, 172,  y  159,  v  160,  ^  295, 

X  128,  etc. 

(/3)   With  appellatives  signifying  the  great 
divisions  of  the  world  and  other  localities: — 

I.  635  eg  aiyia'kov  npoxeovro,  I.  1108  eg  ain- 
Sivyjv  dvayov  (36ag  ovpeog  axpriv.  IV.  759  eX^elv 
eig  dxrdg.     11.  368  eXiaasrai  eig  oka  similarly 

II.  403,  746.— IV.  100  eg  hf^ov  dTiCog  dv^yei 
vyja  .  .  .  ekdav.  L  1010  nohag  5'  eig  (Sev^g 
[dX6$]  epet^ov.  III.  589  eyjv  eg  yalav  iovrag. 
Different  is  III.  1358  eg  yalav  .  .  .  neoovreg 
"falling  to  the  ground",  for  which  no  Homeric 
parallel  can  be  found.  The  same  may  be  said 
of  I.  1051;  IV.  597.  Homer  has  ev  c.  dat.  after 
TtiTtro. — II.  831    eig    eTiog    op^yj^evrog   xanpiov, 

III.  1196  (391  p'  eg  epyi^aiYiv.     II.  1081  eg  ripa 


) 


—  142  — 

xiSvar^  dirtyi;  III.  1382  dv6j(^ovrag  ig  riepa; 
similarly  III.  1396;  IV.  949.— I.  1263  eg  Se 
xeXev^v  .  .  .  ^E6v.  TV.  636  ^ipe  .  .  .  x6^nov 
ig  Ci}xeavolo.     I.  1110  y]peaav  ig  Xifxiva  Qp^ixiov, 

I.  916  exsXaav  vijaov  ig  'H/lfXTp)7g  ^ Ar7^avrihog\ 
similarly  IV.  521. — II.  1091  aiaaovreg  .  .  . 
7i€pdT>7$  eig  ovpea  yaiyig;  similarly  II.  1242. — 

III.  1269  ig  Tieiiov  ro  ^Api^tov  r^eiyovro;    also 

IV.  809. — II.  934  g?  5'    ig  neXayog    7t£<^6p>7To. 

II.  934  >lai<^og  .  .  .  raviovro  \  ig  noSag  dfjt(pO' 
repovg.  II.  1167  viofi'  ig  nokiv  Ar/Jrao;  cf.  III. 
1404  ^£f  K  ig  TtToXfcf^pov.  IV.  597  nkaev  .  .  . 
Xi^VYig  ig  npojpdg  noXv^ev^iog,  I.  1051  ig  Si 
nvXxxg  6(id8o}  niaev,  I.  1007  ig  aXjivpov  .  .  . 
vSap  I  Svnrovreg;  similarly  IV.  1599  ig  vSara  .  . . 
^xe,  I.  1188  ^yj  3'  Ifisv  elg  vXviv,  III.  41  ig 
XOiXxeijiva  xal  axfiovag  .  .  .  ^el^nxsi,  "he  went 
to  his  forge  and  anvil";  cf.  S'  273.  I.  1236 
XaXxov  ig  nxm^ta  <pop€Vfi8vov  [i'Scop].  IV.  1566 
vija  ixofiiaaafiEV  ig  roSe  TiifivYig  x^^t^^- 

(y)  Of  buildings,  parts  of  buildings, 
enclosures  and  the  like:  —  I.  577  ^uiJX' 
ipinovrai  .  .  .  elg  avXiv;  similarly  I.  1173. — I. 
853  'T4'i7tvXy^g  ^aaiXriiov  ig  Sdfxov  cSpro  Ahov- 
iSyjg;  smiilarly  III.  177,  528,  538;  IV.  348,  440. 
Here  belong  the  examples  of  ig  with  the 
genitive  to  denote  the  characteristic  locality  of 
a  person:    I.  337   ^wal   6"   a(i(iL   neXovrac  ig 


m-i 


♦ 


1"*' 


—  M3  — 

Alrjrao  xelev^i;    III.  212   ig    Airirao    xiovreg, 

II.  353  ev^a  fiiv  eig  'At^ao  xaraijidng  icri 
xeXev^og.  III.  419  r68e  x(kig  dTtoiaeai  eig 
(SaaiXijog.  IV.  1002  MYjSeiav  .  .  .  eov  ig  Ttarpog 
dyea^ar,  also  IV.  1077;  cf  *  48,  fl  160,  482; 
^  195,  et€.;  also  Herod.  I.  92,  113;  V.  51. 
Noteworthy  is  the  example  with  the  possessive 
pronoun:  I.  708  eig  eov  copTo  veea^at;  cf.  ^  574. 
— IV.  1602  Innov  ig  ei'pia  xvx'kov  dy^vog 
aiieXkri,     IV.  689  d^ixovro  KipxYig  ig  fieyapov. 

III.  738  vyjov  olaofiai  eig  'Exdryjg;  III.  841  ^iv 
eig  'Exdryjg  nepLxa?i?Ja  vyjov  dyoiev.  IV.  104 
eig  yap  ^iv  [v^a]  ^Yiaavreg.  This  last  example 
may  also  be  tmesis.  Homeric  examples  for 
this  category  are:  A  222,  Z  490;  a  276,  h  674, 
X  60,  n  328,  407,  p  442,  etc. 

(5)  Quasi-local  are  the  examples  of  ig 
with  nouns  denoting  meetings,  contests  and 
the  like: — I.  654  iovaai  eig  dyopr^v  "going  to 
the  assembly";  similarly  IV.  214.— III.  1239 
''iG^^iov  elac  ,  .  ,  ig  dywra  "he  went  to  the 
Isthmian  contest".     III.  1278  ^alv'  ig'ae^Xov. 

IV.  1154  fiYj  Ttplv  ig  dXxyjv  . . .  inL^pLGetev  ofiiXog 
"before  the  crowd  might  rush  to  the  fight '*. 
III.  1384  ineiyo^evovg  ig  apyja  "rushing  into 
fight''.  IV,  1742  elfii  5'  ig  avydg  reXiov.  IV. 
805  ^eovg  6'  eig  Salra  xd'Xeaaa,  IV.  454  ig 
'koxov  'pev;  in  N  277  purpose  is  signified.    1. 109 


—  144  — 

arT>7  (iLV  TpiTGivlg  dpiari^Ldi^  ig  oiil^ov  (opaev 
"A^rivaiy!;  similarly  III.  1165;  IV.  183.— III. 
820  Iva  . . .  avryjaeiev  ig  cjTtYiv;  similarly  III.  907 
avvov  xexXo[iai  elg  myiv  "1  summoned  him  into 
my  presence''.  Cf.  0  13,  I  487,  P  129,  T  34,  45, 
173,  ^  685,  n  204,  520;  y  420,  etc.  Under 
this  subdivision  belong  a  few  figurative 
expressions:   IV.  404  ig  arnv  [i^Go^ev;  similarly 

I.  477;  IV.  1014.— I.  363  eig  epyov  npCSrog 
rpdne^';  II.  886  sypea^'  elg  epyov.  IV.  385 
olxotr'  eig  lpe/3o$.  III.  903  (lyj  narpog  ig  ovara 
(iv^og  IxYirai.  III.  298  otTta/ldg  he  fieTerpundro 
Ttapeidg  ig  jiT^oov.  The  expression  ig  ;telpa$ 
tivbg  Ixea^at  "to  fall  into  one's  hands''  occurs 
three  times  in  Apollonius:  II.  1170;  IV.  415, 
1041,  with  which  compare  K  448.  Other 
examples  in  Homer  are  11  327;  a  421,  fj,  372, 
etc. — The  phrase  elg  ev  "into  one  place", 
which  occurs  four  times  in  Apollonius  (I.  39; 

II.  322;  IV.  135,  1333),  is  the  equivalent  for 
the  Homeric  ig  x(^ov  eva  A  446,  0  60.  Similar 
IS  II.  606  Tterpat  5'  elg  eva  ;^c5poi/  .  .  .  ippi^oi^ev, 
which  borders  on  the  brachylogical  use  of  elg, 
i.  e.  the  '^ constructio praegnans'\  seen  more 
clearly  in  the  following  examples:  I.  647  3?  ye 
\:^^X^^  f^sf^oprrat .  .,ig  avydg  r^eXiov,  cf  A  789, 
*  305.— IV.  336  elg  dxrag  nTiri^vv  Xinev  "he 
left  a  force  at  the  headland".    Cf  0  276  i^dvYi 


I 

4    - 


-  145   - 

Xig  T.vyeveiog  \  elg  bh6v\  "^  148  ^yiTC  lepemeiv  ig 
nyjydg;  y  36  d7teSeipor6!.iy}aa  \  ig  l36^pov.  Cf 
also  Herod.  III.  11,  V.  12,  108,  VIII.  57. 

(e)  Examples  in  which  mere  direction 
toward  a  place  is  signified,  chiefly  after  verbs 
of  looking  or  their  equivalent: — IV.  310  [vi^aog} 
ig  alytaTiOvg    dvexovaa;    a    similar  example  is 

I.  938  elg  aXa  xex?afievy;,  "extending  toward  the 
sea'';  also  II.  732  elg  dXa  Sepxofievyj,—  lU.  744 
vavrat  elg  'EXtxnv  re  xai  darepag  'Uptwvog 
eSpaxov  ix  vyjcdv;  cf  I.  248  ig  al^epa  x^'^P^^^ 
aeipov,  I.  725  ig  ieXiov  dviovra  \  oaae  [idXoLg. 
III.  951  ig  Se  xe?iev^ovg  \  ry^Mae  nanraiveaxe. 

II.  684   avydaaaa'^aL   ig   o^fiara   xa;id   ^eolo. 

III.  560   ig   Se   neTieiag  \  xai  xipxovg   Xevaavreg, 

IV.  681  elg  re  (pvyjv  elg  r'  6f.^iara  nanraivovreg. 
Cf.  B  271,  A  81,  M  239,  N  7,  0  371;  i  166, 
fi  247,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  24. 

b)    The  person  into  whose  presence  motion  takes  place. 
This  use  with  the  noun  in    the  singular 

is   poetic.     Examples  in    prose    are   rare;    cf. 

Thucyd.     I.  128,  4.    11.  37,  3.    III.  3,  6.    IV. 

67,  2;  also  the  example  from  Isaeus  VII.  14 

iX^v  elg  rriv  ifiYjv  fiyjrepa.     The  examples  in 

Apollonius  are: 

(a)   With  proper  names: — II.  777  neiper' 

ig  A^rriv  roaaov  n7^6ov\   III.  1172  eg  Aly^rriv 

levai,     IV.  762  ig  AioXov  i?iMv.     IV.  773  elg 


—  14^  — 

^'HcjKXKTTor  k^riaaro,  I.  1330  i^e^i^xet  I  .  .  . 
Te^^HCiv   eg    ^Irjaova.     I.   12    Ixsro   4    TIeXiyiv, 

I.  1296  eg  'Ayvid^yjv  Tl^vv  36pe.  11.  277  or' 
eg  <J^iv^a  .  .  .  Ioiep.  For  Homeric  examples  see 
H  312.  0  272,  I  480,  0  402,  U  574,  X  499; 
y  317,  ^  175,  ^  127,  etc. 

{(3)    With    pronouns   in   the   singular: — 

II.  467  elg  e  xo^iaaat;  IV.  772  opder  re  fiiv  dg 
i  veea^ai.  Cf.  *  203;  ^  436.  In  II.  49  eig 
avrov  ex  o^f^ara  direction  is  signified;  cf. 
3  170.  In  a  figurative  sense  I.  250  a^?,yi  6' 
eig  irepriv  oXo^vpero. 

(y)  With  plurals: — III.  1147  eig  erdpovg 
xal  vrja  .  .  .  opro  veea^ai.  This  example  is 
noteworthy  because  person  and  thing  are 
governed  by  the  same  preposition;  cf.  X  331 
ini  v^a  ^oriv  eX^ovr'  ig  eraipovg. — IV.  1479  eg 
5'  erdpovg  avi6v;  cf.  A  141,  X  492,  etc.  Of 
direction  III.  503  eg  d?i?^yiXovg  opoorro;  cf.  H  484. 

a,    IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  603  oaaov  eg  evbiov  xev  evaroT^og  o^xdg 
dviaaai  "as  far  as  a  vessel  can  sail  up  to 
midday".  I.  690  inepx^l^^^^^  ^^i;  oto/t^ai  eig 
erog  "in  the  following  year".  I.  861  dfi^oXivj 
S*  eig  yj[iap  del  e^  yjfiarog  ^ev  \  vavriXiYig  "from 
day  to  day  the  voyage  was  put  off".  Similarly 
IV.  1772  eig  erog  e^  ereog  "from  year  to  year"; 
cf.  Theocr.  18,  15.— I.   1151   eg    )^g>  .  .  .  vyjaov 


i  ^ 


—  147  — 

Xinov  "toward  dawn  they  left  the  island"; 
similarly  IV.  1620,  1688.— III.  1389  ^ifivei  eg 
cjpatV  Cf.  A601,  T703;  1 135,  X375,  ^384, etc. 

3.    IN  A  ilETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Purpose: 

II.  64  napyjyopeovreg  eg  dXxriv  "exhorting 
him  to  fortitude".  II.  1051  ovx  e^no^ai  iovg  \ 
r oaaov  enapxeaaeiv  eig  ex^aaiv.  III.  1176  nope 
U  a<piv  . .  I . .  AiyjrYig  xoi^^Ttovg  eg  de^Xov  oSovrag. 
IV.  1459  dpiievoL  eg  r68e  epyov,  Cf.  A  226, 
E  737;  T  429,  etc. 

b)  A  limit  or  measure: 
I.  1193  roaavi  .  .  .  ^lYixog  re  xal  eg  Tid^og 
Yiev  ibea^at.  II.  221  yijpag  ,  ,  .  eg  reTuog  eXxo; 
II.  314  Aiog  voov  .  .  .  X9^'^^'^  ...  4  teXog,  III. 
1381  ovra  . .  |  . .  7to/lia$  ^lev  er  eg  vyjSvv  TjcLyovag 
re  I  rifiiOeag  dvexovrag.  Cf.  11  640,  2  353, 
X  397,  etc.;  also  h.  Merc.  462,  h.  VII.  29. 
Without  Homeric  parallel  is  eg  with  the 
numeral  in  II.  976  rerpdSog  eig  exarov  Sevoiro 
xev  "it  would  lack  but  four  to  one  hundred". 

—  Ttepi  r  dfi(pi  re  — 

This  combination  of  nepi  and  dfi^i  occurs 
once  in  ApoUonius  and  once  in  Homer  in  case- 
construction;  viz:  III.  633  nepi  r'  dfi^i  re 
roixovg  \  ndnrrivev;  cf.  P  760  Tto^Xd  8e  revx&x, 
jfCL^  neaov  nepi  r'  dfi^i  re  rd^pov. 


i,\S  — 


II.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO  CASES. 

(GENITIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE.) 

—  hid 

The  preposition  <>.^  means  "througli",  first  in  a 
local  then  in  a  causal  sense.  In  composition  with 
verbs  it  has  frequently  the  meaning  "apart",  "in 
twain  '*.  Its  numerical  relation  with  the  cases  as  well 
as  its  different  usages  vary  much  in  poetry 
(especially  epic)  and  in  prose.  In  Homer  the 
relation  of  the  cases  is:  4  gen.,  3  ace. ;  in  the  Orators: 
I  gen.,  3  66  ace.  Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer, 
having  36  examples  of  the  genitive  and  29  of  the 
accusative.  While  in  Homer,  as  also  in  Apollonius, 
this  preposition  is  confined  almost  exclusively  to  the 
local  use,  in  prose  and  in  comedy  the  metaphoric 
uses  to  denote  cause,  origin,  author,  quality,  means, 
manner  and  the  like  preponderate.  Cf  lyUtz,  pp.  63- 
69;  Sobolewski,  pp.  109-12 1;  Krebs,  pp   65-69. 

A.    WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
ONLY  IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

(a)  Of  linear  motion  "through"  a  place 
and  beyond  it,  kd  being  equivalent  to  htex  and 
Sianpo;  cf.  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec.  434.  In  some 
of  the  examples  motion  is  implied: — I.  237 
laav  fierd  v^a  St  acreog;  also  III.  871,  884. — 
11.  686  ^Yj  ^'  Ifisvat  Ttovrovbe  k'  ref>og;  similarly 
I  777;  IL  935, 1036;  III.  141,  275, 1357, 1378; 


*  ^ 


♦ 


—  149  — 

IV.  966,  1169,  1285.— IV.  123  5t'  drpamTolo 
(16^'  lepov  dTiCog  Ixovro.  II.  779  ore  hevpo  k' 
'AaiSog  r,7teipoio  \  ne^og  6(3yi)  IV.  1567  v^a  .  .  . 
ixo^iaaa^ev  ..  .Si'  r.Tisipov.  IV.  1662  Sid  xXyjlSog 
iovaav.  II.  187  Sid  ve^kdv  .  .  .  diOGovaai.  IV. 
913  r^x^  ^^  Ttoptpvpeoio  Si"  olSfiarog.  L  789 
eoavfihcjg    xaXyjg    Sid   naordSog    ehev    dyovaa. 

II.  329  St  avrcdv  \  nerpdcdv  novrovSe  goyj  nrepv- 
yeaai  Sirirai]  also  11.565. — IV.  1543  Sid  p6);^^oto 
SvYirai,  IV.  632  enrd  Sid  arofidrcdv  hi  poor. 
IV.  847  G8var  ...Si  vSarog.  I.  377  5t'  avrduv 
\j)aUyyG>v']  ^opeoiro.  Cf.  B  458,  E  752,  I  478, 
E  288,  r  49,  X  309;  0  183,  293,  etc. 

(/?)  Of  diffusive  motion,  remaining  within 
a  space  but  spreading  all  through  it: — III.  211 
T^epa  7iov?iVv  e<p'^xe  5t'  dareog.  I.  1137  iorj  .  .  . 
nld^otro  Si  repog.  IV.  1458  Sl  msipoio  xiovteg', 
also  IV.  1472. — III.  761  oSvvyi  Ofivxovaa  Sid 
Xpoog.  Cf.  X  118  etc.;  also  h.  Merc.  231,  h. 
Cer.  67,  130. 

In  IV.  199  Sid  vYjog  dfioi(3aSig  dvepog  dvyjp 
i(6^evog  the  sense  of  Sid  fades  into  that  of  iv. 
Cf.  L  400.  Similarly  in  the  quasi-local 
examples  III.  1312  3td  ^Xoyog  a^ap  iTiva^eig 
and  IV.  872  anaipovra  Sid  (pTioyog. 

A  figurative  local  use  is  to  be  found  in 

III.  792  fie  Sid  arofiarog  ^opeovaai.  The  closest 
Homeric   parallel   H  91  is    not   so   bold   and 


). 


—  ISO  — 

shows  the  accusative  instead  of  the  genitive. 
Cf.  Xen.  Cyr.  1,  4.25. 

The  uses  of  5id  with  the  genitive  denote 
the  time  or  the  instrument  are  post-Homeric 
constructions,  and  are  for  that  reason  not 
found  in  Apollonius. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

This  use  is  poetic  and  mainly  Homeric. 
No  distinction  between  the  accusative  and  the 
genitive  can  be  drawn  except  that  5id  in  the 
sense  of  "between"  (I.  2,  etc.)  is  confined  to 
the  accusative: — I.  2  Sid  nerpag  \  Ki;ay£a$  .  .  . 
'^Tuaaav  'Apyci;  similarly  II.  214,  422;  IV.  784, 
1000.  Cf  *  846.— I.  922  Std  fih:^ea  novrov] 
UfievoL.  IV.  644  Si  e^vm  ftvpta  KeXridv  \  xai 
AtyvQv  nepoiivrsg,  IV.  272  hid  ndaav  oSevaai  \ 
EifidTty^v  'Aoiyjv  re.  IV.  290  ^ci^vv  8id  xoXtwv 
Iyiolv.  IV.  374  ^aydvoi  avrixa  rovSe  fiiaov 
Sid  TuoLifiov  d^ijaai.  III.  1052  arv^eXriv  Sid 
veiov  dpoGOvig.  IV.  1763  Sid  fivfiov  olSna 
^.inovreg  \  Aiyivy^g  dxT'^atv  ineax^^v,  I.  9 
ph^pa  xiciv  Sid.  IV.  306  KaXov  Se  Sid  orofia 
neipe;  similarly  IV.  647.  Cf  H  91,  P  283, 
*  122,  etc. 

As  an  example  of  diffusive  motion  can  be 
cited  only  III.  709  opro  S'  ioyj  \  XenraXsYi  Sid 
S6(iar\  cf  A  600;  ^  50. 


«  k 


't 


—  151  — 

J.    IN  THE  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

In  Homer  this  use  is  confined  to  the 
Odyssey  and  chiefly  to  0,  K  and  £1  of  the 
Iliad;  cf  Vogrinz,  p.  215.  The  examples  in 
Apollonius  are — Sid  xv€<pag  I.  518,  651,  1255; 
II.  155,  729,  1287;  III.  1361;  IV.  70,  1069. 
Sid  vixra  II.  42;  IV.  868.  Cf  B  57,  K  41, 
142,  etc. 

3.  IN  THE  CAUSAL  SENSE  "OWING  TO". 

I.  423  GYiv  Sid  iiYJriv,  also  II.  75.  Cf  A 
73,  K  497;  ^  520,  etc;  also  h.  Cer.  414. 

—  Siix  — 

In  the  use  of  this  preposition  Apollonius  differs 
considerably  from  Homer.  He  has  it  21  times  in 
case-construction,  whereas  Homer  has  it  only  12 
times  (all  in  the  Odyssey,  except  O  124).  Homer 
uses  it  only  with  the  genitive;  Apollonius  has  it  11 
times  with  the  genitive  and  10  times  with  the 
accusative.     It  occurs  only  in  the  local  sense, 

A.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
IT.  746  Sie^  dxpyjg  dvepevyerai;  also  II. 
752.— I.  1157  Si6^  iiUg  diaaovaav,  cf  I.  1328; 
II.  351,  806.— 11.  644  Sie^  'AtSao  8ef>8^p(^v\ 
areTCkoi^Yiv,  III.  158  /?>7  Sk  Siex  [leydpoio.  III. 
887  Siex  neSiidv  8?idovaa;  similarly  III.  915. — 
IV.  161  no2.vnpefivoio  Sie^  v^vQ  rerdvvaro. 
Homer  has  only  the  two  phrases  Siex  (isydpoio 
X  388,  p  61,  a  185,  t  47,  etc;  and  ^tex  npo^vpoio 
0  124;  a  101,  etc. 


\ 


— 152  — 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

1. 1014  fiie^  aXog  olSaa  vfovto;  also  IV.  457, 
657.— II.  622  v^a  Siex  neXayog  oevev.  II.  560 
V  Insira  8iix  Tthpa;  s^Aasiav;  simiLarly  11.618; 
IV.  304,  858,  961;  cf.  ^td  nhpag  s.  M.  III.  73 
(I  dvaelpag  .  .  .  (Suoiai  f)i8x  7tpoa?Jg  <p6p6v  vi^cdp, 

—  xard  — 

The  radical  sense  of  xard  is  "down".  Collateral 
with  this  is  the  meaning  of  extension  "through*'. 
These  two  local  uses  are  practically  the  only  ones  in 
epic  poetry,  the  metaphor ic  use  to  denote  conformity 
excepted.  While  the  meaning  "down"  predom- 
inates in  the  use  with  the  genitive,  "through"  is 
expressed  chiefly  by  the  accusative.  In  Attic  prose 
these  local  usages  disappeared  almost  entirely  and  in 
their  place  developed  a  number  of  metaphoric  uses  to 
denote  time,  cause,  occasion  and  the  like.  Cf.  Lutz, 
pp.  69-81.  Apollonius  avoided  all  these  later  prose- 
constructions. 

In  point  of  the  frequency  of  zar«  with  its  respective 
cases,  the  accusative  ranks  first  in  all  departments  of 
the  literature.  The  proportion  m  Apollonius  is  as 
I  to  3,  which  is  also  that  for  the  Orators.  In  Homer 
it  is  as  I  to  8,  and  in  the  later  historians  it  varies  as 
much  as  I  to  25.  Cf.  Westphal  for  Xenophon  and 
Krebs  for  Polybius. 

A.    WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

The  only  use  with  the  genitive  in 
Apollonius  as  in  Homer  is  the  local  use.     The 


♦  ^ 


v; 


k 


♦ 


14 


\ 


^i 


If 


—  153  — 

examples  in  Apollonius  express  (a)  motion 
^*down  from'',  (/3)  motion  'Mown  upon"  and 
(y)  position  "down  beneath"  or  "in".  This 
last  use  is  not  Homeric. 

(a)  To  denote  the  origin  or  starting  point 
from  which  the  motion  proceeds.  The  genitive 
is  ablatival  and  the  line  of  motion  usually 
vertical: — 11. 286  xard  5'  ai^spog  oikro:  similarly 
II.  429;  III.  1264;  IV.  510,  840,  1704.— IV. 34 
(iXe(pdp(j)v  be  xar^  dS-poa  8dxpva  ^6Vt:v.  IV.  911 
^eorolo  xard  (^vyov  hSope  noi^ro}.  I  565  xd8 
Si*  airov  [lotov^  Xiva  x,^vav.  I.  1261  ;caTd 
xpordrpcdv  d?^ig  l^pug  xrjxiev.  III.  70  xar^  avrCdv 
[opkidv^  )<eL^appot . . .  (popeovro;  IV .  4:44 '/\Xi(idroio 
xwt  ovpeog  Yiyays  3>7pa.  IV.  1600  rixe  xojrd 
npv[LVYig\  similarly  IV.  1594  a^pd^B  xard 
npVfxvYjg.  Here  belongs  IV.  638  ''Epyj  GxoneXoio 
xa^'  *Epxvviov  idx^yjaev,  where  motion  of  the 
sound  is  implied.  For  Homer  compare:  Z  128, 
A  196,  811,  N  539,  0  74, 169,  T  52;  ^  399,  etc. 

(/?)  To  denote  the  "terminus"  to  which 
the  motion  tends:  —  IV.  654  xar'  aiyiaTuolo 
xEj(^vvrai.  III.  1021  xar  ovSeog  o^^ar  epetSov 
(the  direction  of  sight  is  practically  a  motion 
of  the  eye).  IV.  158  <pdpfiax  palve  xar^ 
o^^aXfiuv;  IV.  1523  noT^Xyj  xar  6^^a?.ii(^v 
Xier  a;t^^5;  cf.  E  696=n  344;  also  T  217; 
n  123,  T  321,  421,  *  100,  etc.     More  difficult 


—  154  — 


* 


to  classify  and  without  Homeric  parallel  is 
IV.  315  l4ov  vYiaoio  xar'  axpordryig  eviovro. 
Cf.  Haggett,  p.  33. 

(y)  To  denote  position  "down  beneath"  or 
"in"; — I.  155  AvyxBvg  .  .  .  ixexaaro  \  d^imaiv, 
ei  irsov  ye  neXsi  xXeog,  dvepa  xelvov  ^>7tSia)$  xai 
vep^e  xard  x^^^i  avyd^ea^ai.  IV.  1326  xard 
vri^vog  .  .  .  ipepovaa;  also  IV.  1352,  1371. 
Though  post-Homeric,  this  use  is  still  poetic; 
cf.  Krueger  Sec.  68,  24  A.  1. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

As  xaTd  with  the  genitive  denotes  the 
starting  or  finishing  point  in  a  line  of  motion, 
so  the  accusative  usually  describes  the  whole 
of  that  line's  motion.  The  line  need  not  be 
vertical,  and  so  xard  comes  to  be  used  like 
dvd  or  5id. 

a)  Of  motion  to  signify, 

(a)  "Over"  or  "through'',  like  3ed:— Two 
very  good  examples  to  show  that  xatd  is 
almost  synonymous  with  S(d  are:  I.  2  IlorToio 
xard  aro/wa  xoX  lid  nhpag  .  .  .  ^Xaaav  'Apyw; 
also  IV.  1000.— III.  1241  she  .  .  .  xar'  aXaog. 
III.  873  Tp6x(^v  eifeiav  xar  dfia^irov;  similarly 
III.  1237.— III.  1335  ^dX'kev  dpripofievyiv  aki 
xard  ^aXov  oSovrag.     I.  575  xar  Ix^ta  aYj[iav- 


> 


—  155  — 

r^pog  .  .  .  i^ETtovrat  III.  411  rovg  Jyldw  .  .  . 
arv^eTiYjv  xard  veiov  ''Apyjog,  IV.  363  xard 
novrov  .  . .  ^opBviiai\  IV.  1319  nXa^ofievoL  xard 
novrov, — III.  113  ^yj  5'  Ifiev  OvXvfinoio  xard 
nrvxoLg*  IV.  473  alfia  xar  {nrzikYiv  vnoioxsro. 
Cf  A  483,  A  276,  278,  K  136,  A  68,  n  349, 
2  321,  T  25,  X  146,  *  559,  *  330;  ^  406,  429, 
^  473,  7t  150,  a  97,  etc. 

(/3)  "Upon",  of  inflicting  wounds.  This 
use  is  frequent  in  Homer;  but  ApoUonius  has 
only  two  instances,  having  had  little  occasion 
for  it  in  a  descriptive  poem: — I.  429  xard 
nXarvv  avx^^oL  xo-^ag.  II.  Ill  ovra  .  .  .  xard 
-kandpnv  TaXaolo.  Cf  E  66,  73,  579,  Z  64, 
E  447,  n  343;  <&  406,  etc. 

(y)   "Under":— IV.  964  xard  (3ev^g  .  .  • 

Ivvov,    Cf  Z  136,  etc.    Other  more  noteworthy 

examples  are:   II.  1037  nva^d^evog  nrepvyag 

xard   VYia\    cf.    x  122. — III.    809    helyL    oT^ov 

arvyepolo  xard  <ppevag  jj/l^'  'AtSao;  cf.  T  125. — 

IV.  145  xar   o^fiara  veioero]    cf  h.  Ven.  156. 

d)  Of  extent  ''over'\  or  of  place  ''within''  ''among'' 

"on"  or  "at", 

IV.  1769  xar  dy(hva  .  .  .  hripioi^vro.  III. 
1353  xard  naaav  dvaaraxveaxov  dpoi^pav. 
I.  621  xard  Svjfiov  avacasv;  III.  639  ^vaG^o 
iov  xard  Ivjfiov  .  .  .  xovpyjv,  IV.  968  ipcrievra 
xard   Spia  TtOLfiaivecxev,     I.  974   xard  5(o^ar' 


—  156  — 

dx^parog  ^€v  axoLTig]  II.  499  xara  ^w^ar'  .  .  . 
evrd^ovro.  III.  168  xa^'  eXog  XeXoxyifJ^^voi. 
IV.  1216  Ux^vrai  .  .  .  xaS-'  iepor  'ATtoXXcji^og. 
IV.  414  xara  ^uXov  dXe^eo  hovpara  KoXx^^^- 
III.  753  (p^LG^ai .  .  .  xard  veiov  "Apyjog-,  also  III. 
777._II1.  176  xard  v^a  ,  ,  .  iiiuve^'.  II.  773 
dliolyjaav  . .  .  xard  v^oov;  similarly  III.  324. — 

I.  247  £>g  ^daav  . . .  xard  nrokiv\  also  IV.  1066. 
— II.  995  dX(Jmg  ^A?yX^ovLoio  xard  nrv^oig 
evvyj^eloa.  [III.  684  Ivep^e  xard  oryj^og 
TtenorYiro  [^v^og].  I.  1253  t^v^i^T^Yiro  xard 
oril3or'  'Hpaxl^i;  similarly  III.  534,  926,  1217. 
—  IV.  1645    ovpiy^   aluaroeaaa  xard  o^vpov. 

II.  824  xard  7t7.arv  (ioaxero  rl(pog.  III.  1053 
xard   (aXxa$   dvaaraxT^i^t  Fiyavreg]    similarly 

III.  1332.  Cf.  A  487,  B  99,  130,  211,  E  332, 
Z  391,  0  54,  A  77,  M  318,  N  707,  0  682,  n  96, 
T  231,  X  146;  a  247,  375,  (3  140,  383,  etc. 

J.    IN  A  riETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Fitness  or  conformity. 
I.  8  xard  (3d^iv,  I.  371-372  axdnrov  h' 
al-^a  xar  Bvpog  oaov  nepi^dXkero  ;|<«po$  |  rM 
xard  npi^pav,  I.  299  fiolpav  xard  ^v^ov 
dvid^ovad  nep  SfinYjg  rX^^t  <J)ep8tv.  I.  382  xard 
xaipov.  II.  756  xard  x>l6o$.  I.  333=1.  839, 
1210;  III.  1040;  IV.  360  xard  xoa^ov.  II.  1162 
xard  fiolpav.  III.  552  xar  oiuvov.  I  660  xard 
Xpeiio;  III.  189=IV.  530,  887  xard  xp^og.     Cf. 


J 


—  157  — 

A  136,  286,  B  214,  E  759,  0  146,  K  169,  A  48, 
M  85,  P  205,  a  622;  3  489,  ete. 

5)  Distribution. 

I.  358  TtendXax^^  xard  xXi^l^ag  iperfid. 
II.  999  xexptfiBvai  xard  ^v7.a,  Cf.  B  362, 
I  521,  etc. 

—  Ttapex  — 

This  double  preposition,  formed  from  napd 
and  €x,  governs  either  the  accusative  or  the 
genitive,  according  as  the  stress  falls  on  the 
first  or  second  element. 

A.    WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

I.    LOCAL. 

II.  975  ^efS'pa  .  .  .  Tiape^  e^ev  dvhxoL 
(3dX:^iov;  cf.  K  349.— IV.  550  rrjabe  nape^  hUg] 
cf  I  116. 

J.    HETAPHORIC,  "CONTRARY  TO". 

II.  344  fiYi  rTiYir  oiidvolo  ndpet,  sri.  vyii 
nepYJaar,  cf  III.  552=111.  742  7tape|^  ov  narpog. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
1.    LOCAL,    'ALONGSIDE  OF". 

II.  1012  G6ovro  Ttape^  Ti/SapyjvtSa  yalav; 
cf  I  7;  fi  276,  443.  Quasi-local  is  also  11.  1115 
Ttape^  bXiyov  ^vdroio. 

J.    HETAPHORIC,  ♦* CONTRARY  TO". 

I.  130;  323;  IV.  102  napex  voov;  cf  K  391, 
T  133. — I.  1315  Ttapex  .  .  .  Aiog  .  .  .  (iovXriv; 
cf  h.  Ven.  36. — II.  341  firj  r?iyjre  nape^  ifid 
^eoipara  (i^var,  cf  h.  Merc.  547. 


—  158- 

Form:  —Trzip  and  l>^£ip  (poetic)  are  etymologically 
the  same  as  Sanskrit  updrt  and  Latin  s-ufier.  The 
form  t>-££'/>  occurs  five  times  in  ApoUonius,  as  also  in 
Homer;  and  only  in  the  phrase  o7r£\p  aXa^  where  the 
long  syllable  is  necessary  for  the  meter. 

Meaning:: — The  fundamental  meaning  of  ItTtip  is 
**over",  ** above".  With  the  genitive  it  denotes 
chiefly  position  '*over**  or,  in  a  geographical  sense, 
'* beyond'*,  where  the  prospective  might  justify  one 
to  say  •* above";  and  sometimes  motion  *'over"  or 
*' across"  a  space  or  an  object.  This  last  use  is 
more  common  with  the  accusative.  In  ApoUonius 
oTcip  signifies  a  few  times  motion  "along  side  of", 
which  is  not  a  Homeric  usage.  While  these  local 
meanings  prevail  in  epic  poetry,  in  the  later  language 
the  metaphoric  usages  to  denote  **in  defence  of  ",  "in 
behalf  of"  come  into  greater  prominence.  Cf. 
Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  435;  Sobolewski,  pp.  134-136; 
Lutz,  pp.  89-97;  Krebs,  pp.  40-43.  Likewise,  the 
accusative  diminishes  very  much  in  the  later 
language,  as  the  following  figures  show:  Aristophanes 
— gen.  24,  ace.  2  of  which  one  passage  is  disputed; 
the  Orators — gen.  1270,  ace.  21;  Polybius — gen.  533, 
ace.  39;  Xenophon — gen,  130.  ace.  13.  Cf.  Sobolew- 
ski, lyUtz,  Krebs  and  Westphal  respectively.  ApoUo- 
nius agrees  with  Homer  in  the  numerical  relation  of 
OTtip  with  its  cases.  Homer  has:  gen.  49,  ace.  331; 
ApoUonius:  gen.  29,  ace.  15. 


4 


—  159  — 
A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

I.  IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  Position  ''above"  or  "over'': — 1.776 
Soficdv  vTtsp  dvreXXovra,  II.  171  vnep  vefpeidv 
r.sp^evov.  II.  580  vTtEp  X6<pa?.yig  yap  df.irix^'^^^ 
Yiev  6?i6^poq\  similarly  IV.  1348  earav  vnep 
xe^aX'^g.  II.  1087  xova^ov  reymv  vnep  eiaat- 
ovreg,  IV.  139  wg  6'  ore  rv(poiJ.evYig  vXi^g  vnep 
al^aTidEaaa  \  xanvolo  arpo^dXtyyeg  dnsipiroi 
elXiaaovrai.  IV.  1269  yairig  vnep  oaaov  e^ovGa. 
Cf.  B  20,  59,  N  200,  2  226,  *  68;  S  803,  ^  68, 
etc.  Here  belong  three  examples  in  which 
vTiip  means  practically  "on":  II.  94  x64^e  .  .  . 
vTief)  ovarog.  II.  103  y^?.aa  ineaovfievov  xeipaX^g 
vTtep.  II.  108  rov  ^'  aoaov  lovrog  \  Se^irepri 
axai^g  vnep  6<ppvog  YiT^aae  X^^P'-  ^^-  A  528, 
N  616,  0  483. 

(/3)  Position  "beyond": — I.  940  xeivtat 
5'  vnep  vharog  Alarjnoio.  II.  362  r^g  [axpYjg^ 
xai  iinep  ,  .  .  nepioxi^ovrai  deylAat.  II.  398  oiv 
vTtep  [Bv^^pidv]  .  .  .  KoTiXOi  exovrai  (dwell);  cf. 
Herod.  VII.  69.  — IV.  286  nyiyai  yap  vnkp 
nvoLYJg  ^opeao . . .  fiopiivpovaiv.  IV.  1576  nsT^yog 
Kpyiryig  vnep,  IV.  1624  dyxi^vog  vTtsp  npovx- 
ovrog  iSovro.     Cf.  *  73;  v  257. 

{y)  Motion  "over"  or  "across": — I.  1084 
vnep  ^av^olo  xapiqatog  AiaoviSao  Tuytar^ 
dXxvovig,  II.  585  vrjog  vnep  ndayjg  xarendTifiEvov, 


•-^ 


—  i6o  -- 

III.  1362  Tia^Ttov  avaXhyiaxovrEg  vnk^  j(^^ov6g, 

IV.  1424  I'Ttep  yaiYig  op^oarahov  r^e^ovro.  In 
II.  271  and  III.  1112  vnep  novroio  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  Imp  oka  p  575;  H  320.  Cf.  further 
0  382,  etc.  Significant  is  IV.  1691  '^akoi^v 
vnkp  ^akfxcjvL^og  axpYig,  i.  e.  '^  alongside  of;  cf. 
^  300.  This  seems  to  have  been  the  start  for 
the  un-Homeric  vnep  c.  ace.  to  denote  motion 
"alongside  of". 

a.    IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE. 

(a)  "In  behalf  of':— 11.  636  i^g  i^vx^g 
dXiycdv  vnep.  IV.  380  Selvi^v  vnep  .  .  .  6rX)7<T6). 
IV.  406  KoXx^ig  )7pa  fpepoiev  vnep  Geo,  Cf.  A  444, 
Z  524. 

(/3)  "About",  "concerning":  — IV.  531 
ni;So  IpYiv  nevaofievog  fisrexca^e  rrjah'  vnep 
air^g  vavTiXiYig.  IV.  1175  ov  voov  i^epeov 
xovpyjg  vnep.  This  usage  seems  to  be  post^ 
Homeric. 

(y)  In  entreaties,  like  npog  c.  gen.: — III. 
701  Xlogo^'  vnep  fiaxdpcjv  aeo  r  avr^g  rihe 
roxYHJv.     Cf.  0  660,  665,  X  338,  D.  466;  o  261. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
1.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  Motion  "over'  and  "beyond":— 1.236 
vneip  aXa  vavriXXea^aL;  similarly  I.  918;  II. 
1140;  III.  1071;  IV.  299.— III.  198  vnep  bovaxdg 
T€   xai   vbup  I  ;gfp(Toi^d'    i^anefiyiaav.     III.  219 


J 


—  i6i  — 

vnep  ovSov  .  .  .  e(iav.  III.  1191  Yp.iog  .  . .  Uero  \ 
.  .  .  vedrag  vnep  d;fpfag  Ai'^ionriLdv .  IV.  1692 
KpYiralov  vnep  fieya  Xatr^a  ^eovrag.  Cf  E  16 
*  227,  n  13;  y  73,  8  172,  yj  135,  c  254,  260, 
V  63,  etc. 

{(3)  Motion  "alongside  of": — I.  568 
ItaaiYiv  .  .  .  vnep  hoXixYiv  ^eov  dxpyjv.  I.  599 
KvvaarpaiYiv  vnep  dxpyjv  \  yjvvaav.  This  use  is 
post-Homeric. 

(y)  Position  "above'':— II.  378  Fevy^raiyiv 
vnep  dxpijv  [vaierdovai].  Also  this  use  is  post- 
Homeric.     Cf  Xen.  Ana.  I.  1,  9. 

2.     IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE  -CONTRARY  TO". 

I.  1030=1V.  20  vnep  ^topov  and  IV.  1252 
vnep  Aiog  ahav.  Cf.  T  59,  Z  333,  487,  H  780, 
T30,  336,  *  517;  a  34,  35,  e  436,  etc. 

III.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE 

CASES. 

As  its  connection  with  d,a^w^  I,atin  amdo,  shows, 
d,a^i  denotes  primarily  in  a  local  sense  a  surrounding 
from  do^k  sides.  This  limitation,  however,  disappears 
in  most  cases,  and  «//^c  comes  to  have  the  same 
meaning  as  Tzepi^  i.  e.  "around  about",  "on  a// 
sides*'.  Of  the  two  prepositions  dfi<ft  is  the  more 
poetic  and  the  rarer.  It  is  not  found  in  the  Orators 
(I.utz,  p.  63,  Note),  nor  in  Polybius  (Krebs,  p.  98), 


—    I62  — 

nor  in  Aristotle  (Hagfors,  p.  70).  In  Plato  it  is  rare. 
In  Thucydides  it  occurs  onl>  twice  (Debbert,  p.  29). 
Aristophanes  has  five  examples,  one  c.  dat,  and  four 
c.  ace.  (Sobolewski.  p.  229).  Xenophon,  differing 
here  again  from  the  other  Attic  prose- writers,  has  it 
147  times,  twice  c.  gen.  and  145  times  c.  ace. 
(Westphal,  p.  3). 

Herodotus  and  the  Tragedians  approached  more 
closely  to  the  epic  usage,  and  they  construe  repi  with 
three  cases.  Cf.  Lundberg,  pp.  24-25;  Lalin,  pp. 
18-21;  Schumacher,  pp.  6-16. 

Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer  in  general  usage; 

but  differs  from  him  in  the  numerical  relation  with 

cases,  as  the  following  figures  show: 

Apollonius:  gen.  11,  dat.  32,  ace.  26. 
Homer:     •'       2,     "     88,    *•    135. 

The  increase  with  the  dative  is  not  surprlsiiig, 
because  this  is  the  most  poetic  of  the  three  con- 
structions. The  increase  with  the  genitive  is  due  to 
the    tendency    to    replace    the    prosaic    -spi    by    a 

poetic  a!x<pL 

A,    WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

ONLY  IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE  ''ON  ACCOUNT 

OF",  "FOR".  ••ABOUT": 

I.  120  T%    6'    a^^i  .  .  .  ifioyriGe,     I.  1150 

hair     dfi^l   ^€dg    ^hav.     I.  1214    ^oog    dn^i 

yBidfiopov  dvtioidvra;  similarly  II.  89  r.vre  ravpo)\ 

<l)op(3dSog    a/i^i    ^oog  .  .  .  SyjpidaG^ov. — I.  1343 

d^^'  i(iev  .  .  .  byipiaaa^ai.     II.  637  dfi<pl  he  rolo\ 

xai  rod  ofiug,  xal  aslo,  xai  dXXov  heibt  iraLfuv. 

II.  971  'Innokvr^  (uicr^pa  . . .  iyyvdXi^ev  \  dfi^i 


^  ^ 


4 


:.    ( 


J 


k 


* 


—  163  — 

xaoiypyjryjg.  III.  1100  d^<|)' ai»r%  [^vvapeaaaro 
Mivug].  IV.  491  d^<^'  avrolo  ^eTiovro.  IV. 
1469  oi)  e^ev  dficp'  irdpoio  fieraXX^aai  rd 
haara.  The  two  examples  in  Homer  are 
n  825  and  ^  267;  of.  also  Aescli.  Ag.  62,  1083, 
1141;  Sept.  1012. 

Noteworthy  is  the  examj^le  in  an  entreaty, 
where  dfi^i  is  synonymous  with  erexa,  vnep  or 
yog:— 11.  216  ^oifjov  r  d^cpi  xai  avr^g  ehexev 
''Epy^g  'Alaao^ai.  Homer  has  no  parallel;  but 
compare  Eurip.  Supp.  280. 

B.     WITH   THE  DATIVE. 

I.    IN  A  LOCAL  5ENSE  TO  DENOTE  POSITION 

•♦AROUND",  ••AT",  •NEAR",  -AflONG", 

••ON"  OR  •♦IN": 

(a)Of  a  place  or  object:— I.  618  gvv  rriaiv 
tovg  eppacaav  dxoirag  \  d^Kp"  evvri  (i.  e.  in  bed). 
I.  1033  duipi  he  hovpi  oareov  eppaia^yj.  11.  703 
du^i  he  haiofzevoig  [jiyjpioig]  evpvp  j^opov  earri. 
Gavro.  II.  733  du(pi  he  rriaiv  [nerpaig]  xvfxa  . . . 
(Spifiei.  in.  137  dfi^i  h'  ixdaro)  [xvxkco]  hL7t:^6ai 
d^i^lheg  . . .  elXioaovrai.  Cf.  2  344,  X  443,  ^V  40; 
3  434,  etc.— Quasi-local  are  also  III.  117  d^^' 
darpaydTioiOL . .  J^l^iocovro  "they  amused  them- 
selves around  the  dice",  i.  e.  they  played  dice. 
The  simple  dative  occurs  in  ip  430;  in  *  88  the 
preposition  is  causal.  Apollonius  has  also 
dfx^i  c.  ace.  with  t^l^Laoiiai  in  11.  813,  and  napd 


i 


—  164  — =- 

c.  dat.  in  I.  458.— III.  623  ohro  b'  du^i  f^deGotp 
avTYj  d6^?.6vovGa',  similarly  IV.  364. — IV.  731 
oJtt  t'  a(i<pi  ^oolg  moyi^aav  de^loig, 

(/?)  Of  parts  of  the  body:— 1. 221=11.  680 
dfz^l  8e  vuroig,     I.  721=111.  1281  r^^'  (^^ixoiGi. 

I.  1172  dix^i  be  nooGlp.  Cf.  B  45,  F  328,  A 
527,  N  36;  X  586,  ^  23. 

(y)  Of  persons: — I.  1306  d^r^aaro  yalav 
d|U<|)'  avrolg  [i.  e.  vldai  Bopeao].  I.  1327  d^Kpl  Se 
ol  [r^iavxu]  .  .  .  d^pE6v  vboyp.  IV.  136  du<pi  he 
Ttaiaiv  I  vyjnidxotg  .  .  .  poi^Q  7ta?.9iOfievoig  ;tetpa$ 
(id?.ov  dGxoi?.6io(yai   [?.exU8eg'].     IV.  957    d^^l 

[yuj/atxt]  xivvperat  6p(pavd  rexva  \  x^poGvvYi 
noGLog.    Cf.  M  396,  N 181;  y429,  p38,  4)223,  etc. 

3.    IN  A  riETAPHGRIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)   The   cause    ''on    account   of",  "for": — 

II.  838  d^(pl  8e  xYibeiYi  vexvog  fievov  dGxoi^^ocdvreg 
"they  remained  sorrowful  on  account  of  the 
burial  of  the  dead''.  III.  318  vnobbeiGag  dfi<pl 
GToXo}  AiGovibao,  III.  459  rdp/^ft  5'  du^' 
avru.  IV.  575  (iovldg  dficp'  avrolg,  IV.  1029 
d^^L  t'  df^?vOf$  .  .  .  drv^oftai.  Cf.  F  157,  I  547, 
£1  108;  5  153,  X  546,  etc.  Here  belong  two 
examples  of  the  inner  cause:  II.  96  6  5'  dfi<p' 
obvvYi  yvv^  Yipinev,  cf.  h.  Merc.  172.— IV.  1065 
h^eirig  .  .  .  nenapuevov  d^f'  oSvvyiglv;  cf.  ^V  88. 
The  simple  dative  occurs  in  E  399. 


( 
A 


J 


\ 


-165- 

(i)  The  object  of  contention  "'for": — 
I.  747  dfi(pi  be  (iovGlv  Tr^?.t36ai  udpvavro.  III. 
1385  dii^^  ovpoiGLi'  eyeipo^ievov  7to?J^ioio.  Cf. 
r  70,  M  421,  H  447,  0  587. 

(y)  With  verbs  of  hearing  and  the  like: 
"about",  "concerning": — III.  678  ebdy:g  ex 
narpog  evinriv  I  da^l  r  e^oi  xai  naiGiv.  IV. 
356  TLva  Ty;vbe  GviuprvvaG^e  iievoivYiv  \  dfKp" 
ifioL  IV.  1331  dfi^i  be  vogto)  \  ovn  fid?J'  dvnxpv 
voeu  ^driv.  Cf.  TI  647;  b  151,  etc. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
ONLY  LOCAL  IN  APOLLONIUS  AS  IN  HOMER. 

(a)  Of  a  place  or  object: — I.  1178  aa^)' 
^Apyav^6veLov  6po$  npoxodg  re  Kloio  [d<ptxopro], 
I.  1184  d^Kpi  Ttvpyjia  biveveGxov.  I.  1248  d^<pi 
be  X^P^^  cpoira  xex^riycxig.  II.  376  df^i^i  Gibyjpea 
epya  ^eTiovrai.  II.  516  dii^i  r'  ipv[ivYjv  \  "OSpi^r 
xai  nora^ov  lepov  poor  "ATtibavolo.  II.  767 
Kvl^Lxov  du<pl  AoXlovlyjv  ereT^eGGav,  11.  813 
balr  dfj,<pi  .  .  .  e^^toovro.  II.  850  a[.i(pi  be  ri^vye 
^dXayya    na'kaiyeveog    xorivoio  \  aGrv   (3a?.elv, 

III.  881  dfi^i  dXGea  xai  Gxomdg  noT^vnibaxag 
[aypoiLevai].  IV.  51-52  dT^cdiievvi  dfi^i  re 
vexpovg,  \  di.i<pi  re  ^i;(T7ia/lea$  pi^ag  x^ovog.  IV. 
535  xev^erai  alri  \  d^(pi  nokiv  dyavyjv  'T^iXyjiba. 

IV.  550  d{j.(pL  re  yalav  |  AvGoviyjv  vriGovg  re 
AiyvGrtbag  . .  |  . .  'ApycJ>7$  Ttepiikaia  Grifiara  vrjog  \ 
VYj^epreg  ne^arat,  IV.  1452  iivlai  \  d[.t^^  bXiyviv 
(ze?iirog  yXvxepov  2,i(3a  nenrYjvlaL.  Cf.  B  461, 
533,  A  425,  H  135,  434,  435,  I  530;  X513,  etc. 


—  i66  — 

(/3)  Of  persons: — I.  843  d^^i  ie  rovye 
VBYivtheq..  .eVkiaaovro  xe;^apwfrat.  I.  883  dve^a^ 
d^fpl  xivvpofievai  npo/^sovro.  II.  452  rov  5'  dfi(pi 
Ttspixrirai  iyepe^ovro.  III.  1215  d^(pibe  r^vye] 
[^Exdvyjv]  o^ELYi  v?.ax'?}  x^o^^oi  xvveg  i(p^eyyovro. 
Cf.  r  231,  A  419,  M  414,  n  601;  X  570,  etc. 

(y)  Of  parts  of  the  body: — I.  427  ()ondX(f) 
fiiaaov  xdpyj  du^i  uerona  \  7tkii^ev\  IV.  44  neTtkov 
. . .  d^^i  iieruna  |  areCka^evYi  xai  xa7A  naprjia. — 
III.  121  yXvxepop  Se  ol  d^<pi  napeidg  \  XP^^V 
^dXXsv  spev^og;  similarly  III.  461;  IV.  1277.— 

III.  761    dfifpL   T    dpaidg  \  Ivag  .  .  .  Svvei    d^og, 

IV.  1347  i^u(7fxivaL  .  .  .  df.i^i  re  vCyra  xai  i^vag; 
similarly  IV.  liQ9.  C£  K  573,  n  580,  2  414; 
^  153,  etc. 

—  dvd  — 

The  preposition  «•>«  belongs  chiefly  to  the  depart- 
ment of  poetry.  Attic  prose- writers  avoid  it  almost 
entirely.  To  use  the  words  of  Gildersleeve,  '  Viva  is  dead 
to  the  prose  of  everyday  life  and  xard  reigns  in  iti 
stead.*  *  Lutz  (  p.  4 )  cites  only  three  examples  from 
the  Orators  (  Andoc.  2,  Dem.  i  ),  to  which  Sobolewski 
(p.  66  )  has  added  another  from  Demosthenes.  Like- 
wise, of  all  prepositions  in  Polybius  «>«  has  the  least 
number  of  occurrences;  cf.  Krebs,  pp.  33-34. 
Herodotus  and  Xenophon,  who  approach  nearer  to 
the  poetic  diction,  use  it  somewhat  oftener  ;  cf.  Lund- 
berg,  pp.  16-17  ;  and  Westphal,  p.  3.  **  The  large 
use  of  «v«,"  as  Gildersleeve  remarks  in  the  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  Vol.  XXIII.,  p.  26,  **  gives  at 


^> 


■< . 


<M 


J 


"Mi      J^k 


—  167  — 

once  an  antique  hue  and  we  may  expect  to  find  it  in 
conscious  poetry. ' '  In  this  regard  we  are  not  disap- 
pointed in  Apollonius,  who  in  proportion  to  the  bulk 
of  his  work  uses  it  more  frequently  than  Homer. 
He  restricts  its  use,  however,  to  the  accusative  (  with 
the  possible  exception  of  II.  701,  where  it  might  be 
construed  with  the  dative,  although  tmesis  is  evi- 
dently intended  ),  and  employs  it  only  in  a  local 
sense.  In  lyric  poetry  and  in  the  lyric  parts  of 
tragedy  «'>a  is  used  with  the  dative.  Homer  also  has 
nine  examples  of  this  use,  and  in  three  passages 
(/5  416,  t  177,  «  284),  he  seems  to  use  it  even  with 
the  genitive,  according  to  Delbriick,  Monro,  Vogrinz 
and  others.  As  this  construction,  however,  does  not 
occur  elsewhere  in  the  literature,  it  seems  preferable 
to  take  avd  with  the  verb  in  those  three  passages. 

Of  the  two  apocopated  forms  in  Apollonius,  av  (be- 
fore dentals  )  occurs  only  in  tmesis  (  eight  times  ) , 
but  the  corresponding  form  a/i  ( before  labials )  is 
used  twelve  times  in  case- construction.  All  these 
forms  are  found  in  Homer.  The  uses  of  avd  in  Apol- 
lonius may  be  classified  as  follows : 

ONLY  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE  AND  ONLY  IN  A 

LOCAL  SENSE: 

a)  Of  motion  up  through  a  place  or  through  a  crowd 

of  people. 

I.  308    u<5iv  .  .  .  /^Yikov   dv    r^a^eyjv,    r,e 

KXdpov.     I.  310  dvd  7i2.yj^vv  .  .  .  xiev;  II.  590 

dvd   ndvrag    i6v. — I.  812   dfi   nro2.L€^pov  .  .  . 

d:^dXy!vro;  similarly  I.  653;    III.  823;  IV.  1172, 

1279.— III.  166  dv  ai^epa  nokXov  iovn.     III. 

685    dvd    aroua    ^vlev   ivtanslv.      IV.    1056 


arpsvyofievoig  5'  dv  o^Ckov  enrilv'^Bv  evv^reipa  \ 
^v^  epyiav  av^peaai.  IV.  1110  avrixa  S'  capro  | 
ix  lexBov  dva  5(owa.  IV.  1336  Tikov  &g,  og  pa 
r  dv'  vTiYjv  I  avvvoiiov  riv  ^e^km^v  copverai.  Cf. 
Z  505,  K  362,  N  199,  n  349,  2  493,  X  452, 
*  74;  6  456,  x  251,  275,  o  80;  ^  234,  etc. 

5)  0/ mofian  over  sfiace. 
II.  avpai,  aiT  dva  ndaav  \  yalav  b^dg  .  . . 
nveiovaiv  11.  697  dva  vyjaov  ibiveov.  II.  1086 
i^psyjxe  ;|;;dXa^'ar  |  ix  ve<pmv  dva  r  aarv  xal 
oixia.  II.  1091  diGaovreg  .  .  .  aw  TtEkayog;  IV. 
1536  npriaovTog  dyyTeca  |  du  ne7.ayog. — IV.  231 
dva  yalav  .  ,  .  a^ovaiv.  IV.  1382  j.\3v7^g  dva 
^ivag  spYiiiovg  vyja  .  .  .  (pipt-iv.  Cf.  E  87,  96, 
Z  71;  e  329,  330,  x  308,  fi  143,  333. 

c)  Of  motion  up  to,  or  simply  to;  i.  e.  of  the  goal. 
I.  528    dm  aeX^ara  ^dvreg.     I.  838  elfii 
^'   vnorpoTtog  avrig  dm  7tr6?uv;  similarly  III. 
573. — IV.  115  oLTid  vyjog  sfiyjaav  \  noiYievr    dva 
X^^ov.     Cf.  X  77. 

d)  Of  motion  up  along,  or  simply  along, 
I.  526=IV.  580  dva  ^eaariv  \  arelpav  .  .  . 
%^o(Tf.  I.  781  dva  ari^ov  yiisv  i^pcjg;  similarly 
IV.  43,  47. —  II.  168  hivYievT  dva  Jioanooov 
i^vvovro,  II.  825  iXvoevrog  dva  ^poa^ovg 
norafiolo  veiaer  'A/3avTtd5>7$.  Cf.  E  87,  K  339; 
X  176,  4.  136,  etc. 


j 


1 


—  169  — 

e)  0/  motion  up,  upon. 
II.  1367  Toz/  p'  dva  ;^elpa  7jx^(jsv\  cf.  K  466; 
y  492,  etc.     The  reverse  of  this  is  rest  "'on": 
III.  44  YiGio  bofio)  fiiVidTov  dvd  ^porov,  cf.  S  278. 
Homer  uses  dvd  c.  dat.  in  H  352,  0  153,  etc. 

/)  With  verbs  denoting  extent  over  or  in  a  place. 
In  this  category  dvd  is  nearly  synonymous 
with  h,  as  in  I.  166,  825,  1130.— I.  127 
[xdnpiog']  og  p  evi  ^yjaartg  \  t^jepfisro  Aa^Tteiyjg, 
^Epvfidv^tov  dji  [leya  rhpog,  I.  166  'A/lfor 
Xiner  di.i  7i62.iv;  similarly  I.  825;  II.  998';  III. 
748;  IV.  1177.— I.  1061  eneipyiaavTo  r  de^Xov 
&ji  ne^Lov  jiEi^m'iov;  also  II.  516;  IV.  974. — 
I.  1130  drd  aneog  .  .  .  e^TidaTYiasv  I.  1292 
xvhog  dv  'EXXdSa  /f>7  ae  xayiv-^ri.  II.  1018  dv 
ovpea  vaiETaovaiv  ^oaaivag;  IV.  1338  <p2.oyyYi 
vTiorpo^ieovaLV  dv  ovpsa  .  .  .  (iyjaaai.  —  IV.  623 
dvd  KeXri^v  yjnsLpov  Ttenravrat  [^.tfivai].  IV. 
996  drd  nXyj^vv  xexdpovro.  IV.  1359  ov6'  m 
rdaS'  dvd  x^P^^  iaeSpaxov,  IV.  1440  nai^aaae 
he  rovK  dvd  X^P^^^  I  ^^"P  f'^fpf^*)^*  IV.  1742 
d^  nklayog  vaieiv.  Cf.  0  517,  .0  488;  y  215, 
V  367,  g  474,  0  80,  n  96,  etc. 

g)    With  verbs  denoting  the  direction  toward  or  over 

a  place, 

II.  363  da  nk'kayog  rerpafifievYi]  II.  810  a^ 

neXayog  ^yjevuevoi.     III.  1283  nanrrivag  S'  dvd 

vecov.     Cf.  T  212. 


^ 


—  170  — 


sni 


Of  all  the  prepositions  i^ri  (  Sanskrit  dpi )  is  per- 
haps the  most  difficult,  because  its  meanings  are  so 
numerous  that  at  times  it  is  hard  to  distinguish  one 
from  the  other.  In  a  local  sense  it  denotes  resf  tipon 
a  place  or  object,  position  bordering  on  a  place,  or 
motion  toward  or  upon  something.  From  these  primary 
local  meanings  (upon,  at,  near,  to),  have  been 
derived  the  metaphoric  meanings,  which  Monro  sum- 
marizes in  part  as  follows :  '  *  After  (  as  we  speak  of 
following  upon);  with,  at  {\.  e.  close  upon);  in  ad- 
dition, besides,  esp.  of  an  addition  made  to  correspond 
with  or  complete  something  else  ;  also  attached  to  as  an 
inseparable  incident  or  condition  of  a  person  or  thing  ; 
and  conversely,  on  the  condition,  in  the  ciraimstances y 
etc.*' — In  other  words,  trt' in  the  metaphoric  usages 
may  denote  sequence  in  time,  as  well  as  succession  in 
order;  it  may  be  used  in  a  hostile  sense  against,  or  in 
a  friendly  sense /^r,  in  regatd  to  ;  it  may  express  the 
occasion  or  the  action  at  which  one  is  present  or  in 
which  one  participates, —  the /^r^^w,  in  whose  power 
something  is  ( hence  depends  upon  the  person ) ; 
furthermore,  it  may  signify  the  cause,  the  nuayis,  the 
condition,  i\i^ purpose,  the  circumstance,  and  the  like. 
Apart  from  these  embarrassing  metaphoric  us3ges,  it  is 
astonishing  how  the  question  regarding  the  difference 
of  ^-e  with  the  genitive  and  dative  in  a  local  sense, 
apparently  the  easiest  of  all  usages,  was  for  a  long 
time  involved  in  a  haze  of  conflicting  opinions.  Cf. 
Forman,  The  Difference  between  the  Genitive  and 
Dative  used  with  c^rj'  to  denote  Superposition,  p.  4 
seq.     According  to  the  investigation  of  Forman,  the 


i 


—  171  — 

dative  is  the  picturesque  and  emphatic  means  of  in- 
dicating locality  and  the  genitive  the  colorless  means. 
In  this  fact  lies  the  solution  for  the  large  use  of 
(7:1  with  the  locative  dative  in  poetry,  and  its 
limited  use  in  prose.  For  the  Orators  compare  Lutz, 
pp.  104-106.  In  his  conception  of  superposition  and 
proximity  with  the  genitive  and  dative,  Apollonius 
agrees  with  Homer,  as  the  following  calculations 
show  : 

Ap. :  -a)  Superpos.:  gen.  38.  dat.  51;  b)  Prox.:  gen.  3,  dat.  29. 
Ho:-fl)         "  "    138,    "   22y,  b)      "  '*    9,    "  121. 

Also  in  the  other  usages  Apollonius  remained  within 
the  limits  of  his  department.  Thus  he  keeps  the 
metaphoric  usages  almost  entirely  to  the  dative, 
though  in  the  later  language  a  large  share  of  these 
usages  fell  to  the  genitive  and  accusative.  Cf. 
Schumacher,  pp.  54-59,  Sobolewski,  pp.  141 -146  and 
166;  Lundberg,  pp.  32-36;  Lutz,  pp.  101-104  and 
1 1 7- 1 24;  Krebs,  pp.  80-84  and  93-98. 

After  these  introductory  remarks  we  may  proceed 
to  classify  the  different  uses  of  ^-i  in  Apollonius. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

SUPERPOSITION. 

a)    With  verbs  of  rest,  or  words  implying  position, 

(a)  Of  place,  usually  the  large  divisions 
of  space: — III.  930  vi^ov  en  dxpefiovcov  ""Epyjg 
ryiTtaTts  ^ov?Ag.  II.  407  in  dxp>7$  nenrdfievov 
^yjyolo;  similarly  III.  202.— 11.916  in  dyx^dXov 
^dv6v  dxr^g;  cf.  I.  444  3ai'f«j^  ,  ,  .  in^  'AaiSog 
r^neipoto. — II.   401    in    r.neipoLO    KvradSog  .  .  . 


.? 


—  172  — 

4>d(Tf$  hivrieig  evpvv  poor  Eig  a/la  [3d?.?.ci,  III. 
455  e^er  inl  Sporor.  IV.  954  zopvcpyig  em 
Xf0crd5og  axpY;g  op3o$.  II.  259  en  6(p^a?^^i^v 
dXaop  vi^og.     I.  320  (Jtyj  6'  dp  sni   npo^oX^g, 

II.  1058  bovTZFi  ini  Gxomyjg  nepi^iyixEog.  IV.  1318 
6g  ini  z^ovog  .  .  .  xdiieaS^s]  cf.  IV.  1330,  1357. 
For  Homer  compare  A  46,  536,  A  38,  N  12, 
H  157,  2  422,  T  50,  U^  61;  a  104, 162,  185,  190, 
y  90,  h  718,  e  82,  151,  195,  ^  136,  etc. 

(/3)  Of  veliicics: — I.  658  [topa]  dyeir  ini 
vYi6g\  similarly  XL  211,  1187. — II.  1254  rov  ^ev 
[aieTOp]  in*  dxpordryig  l8ov..*VYj6g  vnepnTdf-iEvov 
vE(pe(dv  ax^^or.  Here  belongs  I.  566  in  ixpio^tv 
"upon  the  deck".  Cf.  E  550,  0  455,  N  665 
n  223,  n  275,  447;  a  260,  /3  332,  y  505,  g  188, 
p  249,  etc. 

5)  With  verbs  of  motion. 
(a)  Of  motion  down,  down  upon: — 11.550 
^^xev  in^  d^eivoio  no^ag  Qwi^i^og  dxr^g.  Of 
throwing  the  cable  on  the  shore  to  fasten  the 
ship:  IV.  660  neia^iar  in'  'liovcdv  .  .  .  (idXov; 
cf.  HI.  569,  IV.  78. — Of  disembarking  or  land- 
ing:   II.  631    in'   ineipoio  /JatV^aei/;    similarly 

III.  199;  IV.  514. — Of  sitting  down  upon: 
II.  203  ix  h'  iX^idv  (.isydpoio  xa^s^ero  .  .  .  ovSov 
in'  avlsioio-  cf.  11  522;  e  195,  x  314,  366,  etc. 
Here  belong  the  examples  of  looking  or  fixing 
the  eyes  upon  the  ground:  I.  784  iju  x^ovog 


%    " 


—  I73-- 

o^liar  iptiaag]  similarly  11.685,111.22.  Homer 
has  xard  c.  gen.;  but  compare  Theocr.  II.  112. 
{i3)  Of  motion  up,  upon: — Here  the  prin- 
cipal expression  is  that  of  embarking,  or  going 
on  board  a  sliip.  IV.  1535, 1584  ini  vriog  e(3av 
{e^SyjGav)',  cf.  N  665,  ;i  534,  etc.  Similar  to 
this  is  IV.  1661  (Syjaar  in  Lxpi6^Lv''he  mounted 
the  platform";  also  III.  573  ini  v/jog  \  evvaiag 
ipvaavreg  ''drawing  the  mooring  stones  upon 
the  ship".  Other  examples  are:  I.  1237  in' 
avxhog  dv^sro  n^(pvv  "she  put  her  arm  upon, 
or  around,  his  neck'*.  III.  683  ^v'^og  .  .  .  ol 
in  dxpoTdrr^g  dveTe?./i6v  \  y?vMGyjg.  IV.  578 
^opeovro  \  vyjgov  ent  xpavayjg  'ti?.exrpiSog.  IV. 
939  v^ov  in  ai'rdcoi^  cniT^dkjv  xai  xv^iarog 
dy^g  I  p6ovr'.  Cf.  I  588,  M  265,  2  531;  S  817, 
S'  500,  (?)  51,  etc. 

PROXIMITY. 

In  three  examples  ini  c.  gen.  means 
"close  upon",  "at"  or  "near". — Though  prox- 
imity is  clearly  meant,  yet  the  perspective 
renders  the  image  of  the  object  as  one  of 
superposition,  and  so  this  category  can  not  be 
said  to  differ  much  from  the  preceding.  The 
examples  are:  I.  29  <py:yoi  5'  dypid^eg  .  .  .  dxrijg 
&pyjLxiyjg  Zcxivy^g  em  .  .  .  crixoi^i^iv.  III.  880  in 
axTYig  dypo^evai  nyjy^g  'Aj-ivioi^og.  IV.  516  in 
'IX^vpixolo  ^e'kanfia^eog  noraj-tolo  |  .  .  .  nvpyov 
Uetfiav.     Cf.  X  153;  e  489,  x  96  etc 


—  174  — 

OTHER   I.OCAI.  USES   ARE: 

Motion  '*over''  or  '^across",  without  any 
definite  goal:  1. 182  novrov  Ini  yXavxolo  ^eeaxev 
ol^fiarog.    Homer  has  no  close  parallel. 

Motion  ''toward":  IV.  1576  ini  x^ipog 
5f^(Tfp%  .  .  .  i^mm^e;  c£  r  5,  E  700;  y  171, 
e  238. 

Succession:  IV.  671  dXXo  (5'  in'  aX?.G)v  \ 
avfxfiiyesg  fieXiuv.  Seaton  reads  an'  for  in\ 
as  suggested  by  L. 

J.    IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

II.  782  ini  IlpioXao  xaGiyv/jroio  ^avoprog, 
III.  918  ovmj  rig  rolog  ini  n^orepov  yever 
iLvSpciv.  Cf.  B  797=r  403,  X  156  in'  eipyjvyig 
"in  time  of  peace";  E  637,=^P  332  ini  nporspuv 
dv^p^nciv. 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
I.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

SUPERPOSITION. 

a)  JVM  the  idea  of  rest  or  position  '*iipoiV'  or''over'\ 
(a)  Of  place:— I.  549  in'  dxporarr.ai  hi 
vv^Kpai  I  n>7Xfd5f$  xopv^iGiv  iMufieov  elaopo- 
uGai.  II.  735  in'  dxpordryi  [?itGGdSi]  nscpvaGiv;  cf. 
A  484. — I.  178  in6?uGGev  in  (xppvGiv  aiyiakolo; 
similarly  IV.  1298  vdovrog  in'  ocppmi  naxrcoXolo 
xvxvoi  XLvrjGovGiv  iov  ^teXog.  IV.  605  ^a^d'^oig 
Im  TEpGaivovrar,  IV.  1503  xelro  h'  ini  ^a^d- 
^m,     Cf.  T  151,  *  853;  y5,  38,  v  119,  284, 


4    ■• 


-  175   - 

etc. —  Noteworthy  is  I.  497  rii-ihv  K  ojg  yala 
xai  oi'paro^  rM  S-dXaacra,  |  ro  npii'  in'  d'/.TiyjAoiGi 
jiifi  GwapT^poTu  i-iop^Yi  I  veix8og  i^  oAoolo  hiexpi^ev 
ducpig  exaGTa;  cf.  I.  946;  also  E  141;  ^  389,  ^  47. 

{fi)  Of  tlie  object: — II.  1103  in'  dxpor- 
droiGiv  driGvpog  dxpefioveGGiv;  similarly  11.1148, 
1273  nsnrdfievov  T^aGtoLGiv  ini  hpvog  dxpsfiov- 
6GGLV.  In  II.  481  71  cm  \hpvi]  n')v7^6v  aidva 
Tpi^eGxe  [a^uaSpi'd^],  evi  would  seem  more 
natural:  cf  A.J.  P.,  XVII.  31.— II.  487  'kui^Yiia 
l>e^aL  in  arrw  [/i?6)^c3]  lepd\  a  similar  example 
is  II.  496  pi^ov  in  iG'^apo^iv,  III.  218 
'XakxeriGiv  ini  yXv^iheGGiv  dp>7pet  [^pty;c6$];  cf. 
2  275. — IV.  955  opSog  ini  gteTley}  rvniSog  .  .  . 
ciiAov  ipsLGag.  III.  1158  V^e  6'  ini  x^afiaXoj 
G(pe?LaL  I.  435  xalov  ini  G^i^YiGtv.  Cf.  A  462, 
0  240;  X  273,  459,  e  59,  etc. 

(y)  Of  vehicles: — III.  877  ;j;pi;(iftof$  .  .  . 
i^'  apixaGLV  iGry^vla;  cf  Z  354,  A  600,  P  459. 
In  IV.  85  ini  vyji  <pevyo)U8v,  the  dative  seems 
to  be  instrumental;  cf.fi  414. 

(5)  Of  parts  of  the  body:  — I.  219  in' 
dxpordroiGL  noSup  (on  tiptoe);  also  II.  90. — 
IV.  1403  fivlai  nv^oftevoiGLV  i^'  eXxegl  nopGaiv- 
ovro.  IV.  1404  'EGnEpiSEg  xE^aXalg  Im  ;^apa$ 
iX^ovGat  dpyv:pEag  ^av^iiGL  Xty  egtevov.  IV.  172 
ini  ^av^YiGL  napYi'iGLV  rM  ^Er6no)  |  .  .  .  I^ev 
IpEV^og,      I.  946     TEGGapEg     aivordripGLV     ini 


—  176  — 

nXevprig  dpapvlai  [xdpsg']  III.  167  ini  ael^aOL 
vyjog  .  .  .  Xsloxwhoi,  Cf.  0  436,  K  26,  91, 
A  623,  H  419,  0  102,  393,  P  210;  v  60,  p  90, 
a  378,  X  102,  etc.,  also  h.  Merc.  388. 

b)    With  verbs  0/ moiioH  {construdio  praeg7ians)  : 
(a)  Of  place:— I.  1104   ^oi;paTa  .  .  .  btu 
^riyiuvL  (3d?.G)aiv;  similarly  XL  430,  IV.  902.— 

II.  365-366  ini  neipaaiv  aiyiaXolo  \  olxtyi  em 
npoSX^ri  pool  ''ATivog  nora^olo  \  heivov  ipevyovrai. 
I.  1194  ini  x^ovi  ^-^xe  fpaphpyjv;  similarly  IV. 
523. — IV.  1555  in'  d?.?.oSan^  nepocjvreg  [yaiYi]. 
I.  453  ini  yj^a^ud^om  .  .  .  ^vXXdSa  x^^^^^^^^oi. 
Cf.  E  729,  Z  273,  303,  473,  A  161,  N  654,  X  60, 
n  487;  L  284,  X  315,  0  60,  348,  x  387,  etc. 

{(d)  Of  the  object:— I.  329  iX:^o^i8voig  ini 
Xai(peaLV  rM  xai  laTu  \  xexXi^iho)  .  .  .  iSptoovro, 
I.  365  and  5'  //^/ar'  .  .  .  vyji^aavro  Xelg)  ini 
nXara^i^vi,  I.  376  xXlvav  ini  np6rr,aL  <pdXay^iv. 

III.  1286  eyxog  enyi^sv  .  .  .  in  oifidxo).  IV. 
124  ^  Ini  [<|)>7yw]  xc5ag  ^el3?.yjro.  IV.  187 
[xGkzg]  r^  5'  ini  tpapog  \  xd^l3a7.8.  IV.  717  ehev 
ini  ^earolGLv  .  .  .  ^povoiaiv.  Cf  Z  213,  H  60, 
A  371,  *  18,  ^s  876;  ^  422,  n  408,  r  101,  etc. 
Under  this  category  seems  to  belong  II.  1285 
v^'  ixelevaev  in'  svvairiaiv  ipvaoai,  Cf  A  485; 
also  Haggett,  p.  46. 

^  (y)  Of  parts  of  the  body:— I.  517  Tioi/Sag 
. . .  ini  re  yX6aa^aL  x^ovro  aiiofiivaig,     11.  104 


t 


■ 


—  177  — 

cSfiOLatv  in'  d^^repotai  xeda^yi,  11.  220  in' 
o^^a:^ fiolmv.  'Epivvg  Xa^  ini^yj.  III.  1159 
ipeiaafihyj  Xatii  ini  x^^pi  napsiriv;  similarly  IV. 
693.— III.  1227  €716  xpari  x6pvv  ^ero.  III.  1393 
nlnrov  .  .  .  in  dyoaru)  xai  n?i8vpolg.  IV.  44 
nenXov  in  b^pvoiv  .  .  .  arei^ia^evyi.  Cf  F  336, 
E  743,  E  165,  0  102,  480,  n  137,  *  396,  727; 
a  364,  S  213,  x  123,  o  230,  etc. 

PROXIMITY. 

(a)  On  the  border  of  bodies  of  water: — 

I.  554  no2.iYi  S'  ini  xvfiaTog  dyii  reyye  noSag. 

II.  505  norafio)  em  Ttoifiaivovaiv.  I.  1321  ini 
npoxoYiOL  Kioto  .  .  .  nenporai  .  .  .  (lolpav  dva- 
nX^aetv;  similarly  II.  972;  III.  67;  IV.  615.— 
IV.  251  ini  pYjyyXaiv  eSeLf^iav  [eSog'].  I.  54  in 
'Afi^pvaaoto  poYiaiv  .  .  .  rexev,  similarly  I.  309. 
— I.  36  yeivaro  Stvyjevrog  i<p'  vSaaiv  'AmSavolo; 
similarly  I.  537;  II.  658;  III.  875;  IV.  1309.— 
Cf  E  36,  479,  598,  Z  15,  H  86,  133,  0  490, 
501,  K  287,  A  712,  M  168,  n  719,  P  263,  T  390^ 
4>  87;  o  442,  u  82,  etc. 

(^)  Of  other  localities:— III.  1033  nvpxaiyiv 
ei  vYiYiaag  iTti  /Jo^po).  IV.  691  i(p'  iariYi  di^avre 
l^avov.  III.  235  rri  6"  em  [^eaaav:ioi]  no?iXai 
Six2.iSeg  .  .  .  ^Xafioi  r'  eoav.  IV.  1272  in' 
oiYixeaat  ^daaeiv.  III.  679  ini  yaiyjg  neipaoi 
vaierdeiv;  similar  examples  are:  IV.  1173,1225. 


f^ 


-178- 

1565,  1595. — IV.  1158  v^dvaiov  ini  Ttfo^o^Yiotv 
aeiSov.  IV.  1605  ini  aroiidreaai  x^T^^va  .  .  . 
xporeovrai. — ^IV.  1613  aire  [axar3at]  axoXiolg 
ini  VEio^i  xevrpoig  .  .  .  5(;|^dG)VTo. — Cf.  B  788, 
r  153;  a  196,  /3  419,  8  579,  $  52,  153,  t  105, 
284,  X  461,  etc. 

(y)  Of  the  occupation: — I.  730  in  d<pyiro 
fJl.i8V0L  Ipy w  "  sitting  at  or  around  the  immortal 
work".  Cf.  A  175,  258;  n  111;  also  Eurip. 
Ale.  361,  439.  Similar  to  this  is  IV.  1658  in' 
iper/iolaiv  [yjfievoi], 

OTHER  LOCAL  USES  ARE  THOSE  WHICH  DENOTE: 

(a)  The  limit: — II.  112  ogov  S'  ini  Up^an 
"i.  e.  skin-deep".  IV.  938  dvaaxo[ievai  Xevxolg 
ini  yovvaai  ne(ag. 

(/3)  The  direction  towards  or  against: — 
III.  444  in  avru  5'  ofifiara  xovpyj  ,  .  .  cxo/iivYi; 
similarly  III.  1022.  Cf.  A  88;  a  364,  n  439, 
^  358,  etc.— III.  284  [^Epwg]  yXv^iSag  ...  V 
ini  MyiSeiri;  cf.  III.  276  ini  (pop^doLV  olarpog  \ 
reTiTisrai, —  II.  285  vyiaoLOiv  em  nXoTipcTt 
XLXovreg.     Cf.  T  283,  etc. 

{y)  The  motion  over: — IV.  952  nifine 
ini  xvfiaatv.     Cf.  B  6;  >;  264. 

Examples  of  a  figurative  local  use  are: 
1.  1140,  III.  497;  IV.  1197.  Cf.  A  55,  K  46; 
B  427,  ^  554,  V  209,  etc. 


^  - 


—  179  — 

a.    IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

(a)  Of  a  particular  point  in  time: — I.  934 
ini  vvxri  II.  453  in'  jj^art;  similarly  IV.  977. 
— Cf.  K  48,  N  234,  T  110,  229;  ^  105,  etc. 
Here  belongs  I.  260  ini  npofio^at  xiovrov  ^^at 
the  departure  of  those  going".  *  Cf.  SchoL:  r^ 
i^oSu  ruv  dpiareuv. 

(/3)  Of  succession  in  time: — II.  475  in* 
ijfiaTi  6'  ^fiap  6p6p6i.  II.  633  arovoeaaav  in' 
yjfxaTL  vvxra  ^vXdaau;  cf.  11.622,947;  IV.  1632. 
Homer  has  no  parallel.  Akin  to  the  preceding 
examples  are  the  following,  most  of  which 
refer  to  the  order  in  which  the  Argonauts 
enlisted:  I.  40  ini  rolci  .  .  .  no?iv<py!i.iog  Ixavev) 
similarly  1.  53,  86,  90,  95,  115,  133,  179,  190, 
740, 1046;  11.  792,  955.— Cf.  H  163-167,  *  355, 
401,  514;  i;  162,  185,  etc.  Different  are  the 
examples 

OF  GEOGRAPHICAL  SUCCESSIONS: 

a)    With  verbs  0/ motion,  '' after' \  '' next  to'': 

I.  932  inx  rri  ['A^iSu^  xai  'A^apvihog  .  .  . 
nova  .  .  .  napri^ei^ov.  II.  357  ini  rii  [d;cp>2] 
Ttapavela^e  xo:^vovg  Ila^T^yovuiV',  cf.  also  IL 
654,  1017,  1247;  IV.  564,  570.  This  use,  as 
well  as  the  next,  is  not  Homeric. 

b)    With  verbs  of  rest  denoting  the  position  ''beyond'', 

II.  379  T>7  h"  ini  [dxpYi]  Moaavpoixoi .  .  . 
vifiovrat.     II.  397-398    i^eiyjg    Si  ^dnetpeg    ini 


il 


—  i8o  — 

acphi  [Bej^fctpoKTt]  vaierdovaiv]     Bv^yjpeg  5'  inl 
rolGiv. 

OF  ACCESSION,   ACCUHULATION  OR  ADDITION: 

I.  297  en  a/iyeGLV  aXyog  apoio,  IL  81  in' 
dX^6>  5'  dXXo;  arirai  Sovnog.  Notice  the 
alliteration  in  the  last  two  cases.  Similar 
examples  are:  I.  811,  1064;  II.  1044;  III.  125, 
178,  1284;  IV.  411,  447, 1188, 1274.  Cf.  I  639, 
H  130;  y  113,  yi  120-121,  216. 

OF  THE  CAUSE. 

I.  286-287  w  em  noX2,yiv\  dyXaLYjv  xai  xv8og 
e'^ov  ndpog,  (L  em  fiovvo)  \  {.drp^v  npdrov  eT^vaa 
xai  vararov.  II.  860  oXol)  ini  nyifian  xyjSog 
eXovro,  III.  643  ini  afperepoig  dx^ovoa  Ttaiai; 
cf.  IV.  995  eolg  ini  naioi  ydvva^ai.  III.  692 
fiY^  h^  dXeyeivov  Jc^'  vldai  x^6og  eXoLO.  III.  1056 
in  aiVci  I  .  .  .  akexoiev  d'^'kri^ovg.  III.  1254 
yYi^oavvoL  .  .  ,  in  iTincopiioiv  de^Xov.  IV.  8 
GtvyepG)  ini  .  .  .  de^Xo)  .  .  .  xexo^^evog.  IV. 
994  ini  ^e  g^lgl  xayx<^'Xdaaxev  .  .  .  noKig,  IV. 
1294  olxTLGro}  ^avdro)  em.  IV.  1495  Kdv^ov 
enetpvev  ini  pviveGGiv.  IV.  1604  in^  av^^vL 
yavpog.  Cf.  A  162,  I  492,  H  67;  y  549,  ^  43, 
n  19,  G  414,  i;  358,  374,  <?>  376,  o)  91. 

OF  THE  CONDITION  OR  ATTENDANT 
CIRCUMSTANCE. 

I.  252  in'  dyMtri  (^lotolo,  "with  the  joy  of 
life".     I.  422    in    anvi^ovi  [loip^,  "with  good 


I.  •*"    ■    - 


—  i8i  — 

luck".  I.  514  op^olGiv  in'  ovaGiv  'Ipeueovreg^ 
"with  eager  ears";  cf.  III.  1260.— I.  652  ini 
nvoLYi  [3opeao;  cf.  I.  1013. —  I.  767  Syjpoi^  nep 
in  eXni^i  ^yiYjGaio,  II.  205  d3?LyjxP^  ^^  ^^^ 
x6f.iari  xexXir  dvavhog.  IV.  711  (xel'/uxTpd  re 
VYj^paT^iYiGiv  xalev  in  sv^^jTiiiGL:  cf.  IV.  1599 
oLfia  6'  evx^d2.YiGLV.  IV.  1305  dvyjvvGTo)  in 
oce^/lco.  IV.  1455  8iepolg  ini  x^i'keGLV  nnev 
tavMg.     Cf.  N  485,  2  501,   T  181;  n  99,  etc. 

OF  THE  PURPOSE. 

I.  425  ini  (3ovGiv  l^uGaG^y^v,  "they  girded 
themselves  for  the  purpose  of  killing  the  oxen". 
III.  403  in  o^veioiGiv  eSy^re.  IV.  1547  Op<p£vg 
xex?yer  'An6?.X(dvog  rptnoSa  .  .  .  vogto}  em 
^letXia  ^eG^at.  IV.  1430  i<p'  ofxerepoiGiv  ovetap  \ 
Sevp'  e^ioTitv  xa[idroLGtv,  Cf.  I  602,  K  304, 
*  574;  G  44. 

OF  THE  PERSON  OR  THING  UPON  WHICH 
SOHETHINQ  DEPENDS. 

I.  713  elvat  in'  dfi^i.  III.  507  ini  xaprei 
XeLpcdv.  IV.  545  xoipaveovrog  in  6(ppvGL  l^avGi- 
^0010.     This  use  is  post-Homeric. 

IN  A  HOSTILE  SENSE,  **AGAINST",  *«UPON*\ 

I.  1025  ini  g^lgi  ;|^fipag  aetpai^;  cf.  II.  92. 
— II.  5  o(7t'  ini  xai  ^etvoiGiv  detxea  ^eG(idv 
e^yjxev,  "who  imposed  an  unjust  law  even  upon 
strangers".  IL  69  in"  dXj{.riXom  fievog  ^epov. 
III.  1351  bhovTag  ^yjyei  ^y^pevriiGLV  in  dvSpoGiv. 


-  I82    - 

IV.  7  ^6?j)v  alnvv  ini  a^iat  fiyirioLaaxev,  cf.  IV. 
462.  Other  examples  are:  I.  42;  II.  1038;  IV. 
448,  971,  1087,  1101,  1665.  For  Homer  com- 
pare:  A  382,  F  15, 132,  A  178,  E  14,  630,  A  293, 
442,  n  608,  *  362;  8  822,  o  182,  etc. 

IN  A  FRIENDLY  SENSE,  ••FOR". 

I.  612  e^op  3'  ini  XyiidSeaaiv  rpyj^vv  Ipov, 
III.  28  xovpyjv  AlYjreu  ^fX^at  .  .  .  in  ^Irjaovi; 
cf.  III.  143.  — III.  708  a^^  in  aX?iyi?Lr,ai 
(mutually)  Secrar  yoov.  III.  742  in  dvepi 
(lyiridaa^ai.     Cf.  A  162,  I  492;  n  19. 

With  a  verb  expressing  a  hental  attitude 
towards  another  ptrson. 

III.  405    ia^?.olg   yap   in    dvfipdciv  oijrL 

(leyaipci.     Cf  B  270;  a  414,  x  412. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
1.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Motion  '7<?*'  or  ** towards*'  a  place  or  object, 

I.  832  ini  vria  xi6p;  similarly  II.  71,  295, 
814,  835,  III.  826,  1165,  1318,  1345.  Cf. 
A  12,  371,  B  8, 17, 168,  etc. — In  three  passages 
(I.  523,  910;  11.  933)  Apollonius  uses  ini  vyja 
^aivsiv  in  the  sense  of  "going  on  board",  for 
which  Homer  uses  ini  vyjog  ^aiveiv.  The 
phrase  ini  v^a  ^aiveiv  in  Homer  means  only 
^'to  go  to  the  ship". — Other  examples  are: 
L  849  ini  G^ea  S6fiaT  ayeaxov;  cf.  I.  872;  III. 
36. — I.  881   fiiXiGGat  .  .  .  aXTuoT    irC   okT^v 


«    -•< 


7 


",i "ill. 


-     183- 

xapnov  .  .  .  nenoryjuevar,  cf.  0  684. —  I.  925 
l^epovYjGov  em  npovj^ovGav  Ixovto.  1.  1298 
yivGQiV   ini   yalav  Ixovro;  similar  are:  II.  404; 

III.  891;  IV.  631, 1761.  Cf  I  619,2  240,  ^V  205, 
X  55,  ^  43,  91,  0  88,  492,  p  205,  r  170,  etc. 
The  examples  with  animate  beings  that  fall 
under  this  category  are:  11.  677  dvep^ofievog 
T)7/l'  in  dneipova  S^fiov,  cf.  ^  43. — 11.  1046 
YIX6  5'  in  olcdvov  ray(^LGr6v  [SeXog.  This  is  the 
nearest  approach  to  the  Homeric  use  with 
persons,  as  B  18,  E  590,  etc. — In  11.  371  it 
seems  best  to  read  In  instead  of  in. 

b)  Motion  upon, 
III.  803  iv^e^evyj  S'  ini  yovvar  obvpero;  cf. 

IV.  1046. — III.  1334  ?.alov  em  CTf/^apcj  meaag 

nohi.     III.  1373  ini  yalav  . .  .nlnrov,     IV.  885 

^alvov  ini  xXyjlSag;  cf  Z  386,  0  442.— IV.  1516 

axpy^v  in  axav^ov  iveGtYipi^ato  . . .  rapGov  nohog, 

Cf.  r  270;  a  146,  etc. 

c  )  Limit  or  a  point  of  measurement  *  *  as  far  as' ' , 

''up  to". 

1. 565  in  r.Xaxdryjv  ipvGavreg  [Xtva],  1. 744 
ix  5f  ol  &110V  nrix^v  em  Gxatov  ^vvoxyj  xe^d^^aGro. 
II.  791  6(Tt'  ini  'Pyjliaiov  npo^odg.  III.  412 
ra^idv  ini  re'^Gov.  IV.  947  xoXnov  in  i^vag 
ELXi^aGat.  IV.  1401  and  xparog  8e  xeXaiVYjv 
d;^pi$  €71*  axvyjGriv  xelr  dnvoog.  II.  1609  far' 
ini  vYihvv  I  .  .  .  fiaxdpEGGL  .  .  .  elxto.  Cf.  F  12 
A  7;  ^  120. 


I 


—  i84  — 


M 


I 


d)  Extent  or  motion  over  a  space. 
I.  424  ml  novrov  iXevaofie^';  cf.  IV.  1318  €>' 
vypY^v  TtXal^ofievoi. — 11.  975  pie^pa  . . .  ini  yalav 
lYjai;  III.  743  vv^  .  .  .  ini  yalav  aysv  xve^ag. 
IV.  183  7(0$  fiev  ^'  enl  yalav  ixiSvaro,  III. 
1054  GTieipofiEvidv  d(j)tog  SvocpepYjv  ini  (iidXov 
oidvrcjv,  Cf.  H  88,  e  1,  K  27,  11  695;  y  105, 
S  381,  etc.  Here  belongs  the  example  denot- 
ing direction  -'over":  1.631  ndnraivov  ini 
nlarvv  .  .  .  novrov.  Cf.  A  350,  U^  143;  e  84, 
158,  etc. — Noteworthy  is  IV.  1357  i^'  vypriv 
ErXyjuev;  cf.  ^  370  novrov  in   drpvyerov  xaxd 

ndax^eiv, 

e)  Position, 

I.  930  ini  hs^td  yalav  e^ovreg;  cf.  II.  347; 
IV.  1621. — II.  1269  e^ov  S'  in  dpLOrepd  .  .  . 
KavxaGov.  Cf.  E  355,  N  326;  y  171,  f  277. 
This  use  is  common  in  military  language. 

A  figurative  local  use  is  seen  in  IV.  618 
ini  yyj^oavvag  rpdnero  voog;  cf.  r422. — IV.  678 
rd  6'  ini  orixag  ^yayev  al6v;  cf.  B  687,  T  113, 
2  602.— IV.  1773  ini  x:^vrd  neipa^'  Ixdvo)  \ 
vfiErepcdv  xafidrcdv;  cf  ^  226,  ^  338,  -^  248. 

J.  IN  A  TEHPORAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE  THE 

EXTENT  OF  TlflE. 

I.  605  iTii  xvE^g,  ^^till  night".  I.  793  ini 
Xpovov,"  for  a  time";  similar  are  IV.  960, 1255, 
1545. — IV.  1293  vvxr^  ini  naaav  xai  ^dog^ 
"for  a  whole  night  and  day",     IV.  1632  cV 


I 


c'J 


-185- 

^^ap,  "by  day".  For  examples  like  ini  Syjpov 
see  the  chapter  on  the  prepositions  in  adverbial 
phrases.— Cf.  B  299;  rj  288,  0  494,  etc. 

3.    OF  PURPOSE. 

II.  1129  iTii  xf>^og/'on  business".  III.  375 
ini  xwag  .  .  .  veeai^ai,  "to  go  in  quest  of  the 
fleece".  III.  389  rig  ^'  dv  roaov  olhiia  nepr^aat 
rT^LYi  ixcdv  o^velov  ini  ;cTepa$.  Cf.  ft  43;  y  421, 
p  295,  also  Aesch.  Sept.  861,  Ag.  1535. 

—  (lerd  — 

Originally  /j-^rd  meant  between  or  amoncr    Cf.  Brug- 

mann,  Griecli,  Gram.,'*  Sec.  503  From  these  local 
meanings  developed  the  sociative  or  comitative  idea, 
in  which  /^sra  is  equivalent  to  Tf'».  In  prose 
Aiera  (c.  gen.)  in  a  sociative  sense  restricted 
the  use  of  <rov  to  such  an  extent  that  in  some  of 
the  Orators  <j''^v  is  practically  an  unknown  quantity. 
Isocrates  never  uses  it ;  Andocides  has  it  only  once  ; 
Aeschines  once ;  Antiphon  and  Lysias  each  have 
it  twice.  Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  pp.  3-7,  where  the 
facts  for  the  rise  of  li-^rd  c.  gen.  and  the  fall 
of  <r6v  in  prose  are  admirably  set  forth. — Apollonius 
avoids  At£r«  with  the  genitive  altogether.  Homer  has 
only  five  examples,  for  which  compare  Mommsen,  p. 
52:   Monro,  Sec.  196;   Vogrinz,  p.  219. 

As  Aterd  c.  gen.  is  chiefly  a  prose  construction, 
so  /Jterd  c.  dat.  is  almost  exclusively  an  epic  usage. 
It  is  foreign  to  all  departments  of  prose ;  while  in 
the  drama  we  find  a  mere  trace  of  it.  Cf.  Aeschylus, 
Choe.  365,  Pers.  613;  Sophocles,  Phil,  mo;  Euri- 
pides, Hec.  355;  Aristophanes,  Av.  251,  Lys. 
1283,  Ran.  336. — Apollonius  has  always  the  plural 
after  iitrd  with  the  dative.  Homer  has  six  examples 
with  the  singular  of  collective  nouns.    Cf.  Mommsen, 


If 


—  i86  — 

p.  44.  In  as  far  as  the  dative  of  the  person  pre- 
dominates in  the  Argonautica,  our  author  stands 
closer  to  the  Iliad  than  to  the  Odyssey,  in  which  the 
dative  of  things  is  more  numerous. 

Merd  c.  acc.  was  used  primarily  with  plurals  and 
collective  nouns  after  verbs  of  motion  to  denote  info 
the  midst  of,  among;  then  in  the  sense  of  to  with 
words  like  city,  ship,  etc.  This  last  use,  as  that  with 
proper  names  of  countries,  is  an  extension  on  the  part  of 
Apollonius.  In»  Homer  iierd  is  sometimes  used  with 
the  accusative  without  a  verb  of  motion.  Cf.  Monro, 
Sec.  195.  This  does  not  occur  in  Apollonius.  Our 
author  differs  also  from  his  predecessor  in  the  frequency 
of  ix^rd  with  the  dative  and  with  the  accusative. 
Homer  has  it  215  times  with  the  dative  and  164 
times  with  the  accusative.  Apollonius  reversed  this 
numerical  relation,  using  it  36  times  with  the  dative 
and  47  times  with  the  accusative. 

A.     WITH  THE   DATIVE. 

I.  IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE  **AMONQ":  ONLY  OF 

PERSONS. 

I.  17  aXXohanolai  ^er^  dvSpdai;  similarly 
I.  648,  779;  III.  341,  891;  IV.  481,  616,  1209, 
1640;  also  I.  679;  IV.  1102.  Cf.  E  86,  n  493, 
570,  *  476,  etc.— I.  979  rolg  ^era  Satr'  dXiyvve. 
III.  544  roiov  Inog  fierd  naat  .  .  .  dyo^evaev^ 
similarly  II.  144;  III.  90,  505,  889;  IV.  56, 189. 
Cf.  K  250;  n  336,  etc.— III.  908  haadue'^a  fisTa 
a^iaiv,  "among  ourselves".  Other  examples 
are:  IV.  975, 1418.    Cf.  N270,  4>122;  t  418,  etc. 

J.    IN  THE  SOCIATIVE  5ENSE  «*WITH":  ONLY  OF 

PERSONS. 

I.  303  fjter^  d^^mo?^iaiv  sxriTjog  fiifive 
iofioig;  cf  X  204  and  Mommsen,  p.  43. — I.  340 


V       -I 


t 


—  187  -- 

avv^Bciag  re  fisrd  ^dvoiai  (iaXecj^ai.  Cf.  I  434, 
A  428.  Other  examples  are:  II.  536,  757; 
IV.  6,  1465.     Cf  K  208;  i  335,  etc. 

3.    IN  THE  CONCOniTANT  SENSE  ••WITH":  ONLY 

OF  THINGS. 

I.  223  hoveoi^ro  ^erd  nvoiYiciv  e^mpai.  III. 
1214  SpvivoiGi  fxsrd  nrop^oiCi  [^iare^dvcdvroJi. 
Compare  also  IV.  423,  427;  for  Homer  ^  367; 
^  118. 

More  singular  is  the  phrase  ^isrd  (ppealv 
(I.  463;  II.  952;  HI.  18,629;  IV.  56?),  where, 
according  to  our  idiom,  we  render  fierd  by 
"in".     Cf  Haggett,  p.  49. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  'TO",  LIKE  irp6s: 

a)   0/ persons. 

(a)  In  the  singular: — III.  25  hfiev  ^srd 
Kvnpiv.  Schol.  npog  rvjv  K. — III.  1138  veea^ac 
kriv  fierd  fiYjrepa.  IV.  77  fierd  rrivye  [Myj^eiav] 
.  .  .  iXdaaxov.  Cf  K  63,  73,  N  252,  297;  also 
E  152,  614,  etc. 

{(i)  In  the  plural: — III.  1148  /wer'  dfi^i- 
noTiovg  [copro  veea^aL],  IV.  1499  fi^Xa  fierd 
a<p6ag  .  .  .  ixo^taaav.  Cf  A  222,  K  149,  etc. 
Here  belongs  the  example  of  a  collective  noun: 
III.  434  Ipx^o  vvv  (^e^'  ofitXov,  Cf  A  478, 
E  21,  T  47,  etc.  Similar  is  the  example  in 
which  fierd  denotes  direction  towards:  III.  951 


T 


—  i88  — 

cf.  fi  247. 

d)   Of  place  or  object. 

The  examples  under  this  heading  have, 
with  the  exception  of  II.  1121,  the  noun  in 
the  singular.  In  this  respect  Apollonius 
differs  entirely  from  Homer,  who  never  uses 
the  noun  in  the  singular: — 

(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries: — 
II.  424  ^fxd  5'  Alar  a?ag  Ttofin^eg  saovrai. 
Schol.:  y;  ^erd  awl  T)7g  Ttpdg.  Cf.  II.  1188 
vsBG^ai  .  .  .  bIt6  ^bt  Alav,  \  elre  fxer  d^veiYiv 
Mov  noXiv  'Opxofievolo,  III.  13  f.i6^'  'E;iXd5a 
xuag  ayoirro',  similarly  IV. 349, 369. — 111.1242 
Ka?.avp6iav  fiera  .  .  .  veiaero. 

{[3)  With  appellatives: — I.  137  laav  fiera 
vyja;  also  I.  701,  1255;  III.  1187;  IV.  1766.— 
II.  461  i^aviovra  ^erd  nroXiv;  similarly  II.  762, 
892,  1095,  1189;  III  331,  621.— II.  1172  xiov 
^erd  vYiov  *Ap>70$;  cf.  III.  914. — IV.  57  ^erd 
Adr^top  dvrpov  dXvaxcd.  IV.  123  fie^'  lepov 
a?i(Jog  hovro.  IV.  289  ^er'  "Ioviyiv  a)^  [idXkBC, 
also  IV.  630,  844.— IV.  720  ^srd  yalav  eyjv 
xai  ^cj^iar'  lovreg. — 11.  1121  (ler^  rtovag  ^dXe. 
a.  OF  SUCCESSION  IN  ORDER  OF  PLACE,  **BEVOND". 

II.  367  ^erd  rov  5'  dy;^6ppoo$  ^Iptg  .  .  . 
tXiaasrai  eig  avla.  Closely  allied  to  this  is 
the  use 


♦x 


'Mum. 


189    

3.    OF  SEQUENCE  IN  ORDER  OF  TIME,  **AFTER", 

I.  698  ^srd  trivye  dz^wpro  'T-vj/tTtiiX)?; 
similarly  II.  898, 1011.  Cf.  K  516;  0  147,  p  336. 
—I.  1309=IV.  1211  iierd  x^ovov.  Cf  x  ^^2; 
also  h  .  Merc.  126. 

4.    OF  PURPOSE,  ''IN  QUEST  OF",  «*AFTER", 

LIKE  ^ir(. 

The  only  example  of  this  use  in  Apollonius 
is  iiETd  xQKig  in  I.  4;  II.  211,  873;  III.  58.  Cf. 
N  247,  T  347;  a  184,  n  151  (of  the  person); 
h.  Cer.  106. 

An  example  of  a  figurative  local  use  is 
^er  Ixvia  vha^at  in  I.  741;  III.  447.  Cf,  2 
321;  (3  406. 

—  Ttapd  — 

Form : —  Besides  rcapd  (24),  which  becomes  rcdpa  (2) 
by  anastrophe,  Tzap'  (8)  by  elision,  r«^  (i)  by  apocope, 
Apollonius  has  the  form  nap  at  five  times.  Homer 
has  twelve  examples  of  7:apat. 

Use: — Of  all  the  prepositions,  ra^a  is  one  of  the 
best  to  show  how  close  Apollonius  drew  the  line 
between  poetic  and  prosaic  usages.  In  prose 
Ttapd  c.  gen.  predominates ;  in  epic  poetry  it  is  com- 
paratively rare,  in  Apollonius  even  more  so  than  in 
Homer,  as  appears  from  the  following  figures; 

Apollonius :        gen.        4,        dat.      16,        ace.      i8. 

Homer:  **        67,  "      219,  "      133. 

Orators:  *♦       974,  **      607,  "      328. 

Polybius:  "      554,  "      416,         '*      491. 

Again,  in  prose  rrapd  is  largely  restricted  to  a  per- 
sonal use,  or  to  animate  beings  in  general.     Upon 


—  IQO  — 


191  — 


this  fact  was  based  the  maxim  of  the  old  gram- 
marians "  ^  Ttapa  Iful'o^aiv  iariv,'*  In  epic  poetry,  how- 
ever, it  is  used  much  more  frequently  of  the  thing 
than  of  the  person.  ApoUonius  has  in  all  only  six 
instances  of  the  person  (3  c.  gen.  and  3  c.  dat. ) 

Furthermore,  in  prose  a  number  of  metaphoric 
uses  have  grown  around  itapa;  cf  Kiihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  440;  Lutz,  pp.  145-154;  Krebs.  pp.  51-58.  In 
epic  poetry  these  usages  are  rare.  In  ApoUonius 
they  are  practically  conspicuous  by  their  absence. 
Only  one  example  occurs  with  the  genitive  and  one 
with  the  accusative. 

Meaning^:  —  The  radical  sense  of  rrapd  is  destde. 
This  meaning  appears  most  distinctly  in  the  adverbial 
use  of  the  preposition.  In  case-construction  it  is 
modified  according  to  the  general  nature  of  the  cases. 
With  the  genitive  it  is  ablatival,  from  the  side  of, 
French  de  ckez\  with  the  dative  it  is  locatival, 
by  the  side  of,  beside,  near;  with  the  accusative 
it  denotes  a)  the  goal  of  motion,  to  the  side  of, 
and  b)  motion  or  extent,  alongside  of, 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

(a)  Of  a  person: — 11.  1096   kvkovto   Ttap' 

Mrirao  Ki^ratoi;;  cf.  B  787,  N  211,  etc.— III.  38 

Ttapai  A(6$  Yiy^v  axoiTiv;  cf.  0  5,  175;  Hes.  Th. 

348. — Un-Homeric  is  the  metaphoric  example 

of  hearing  something  from  a  person:   II.  417 

aonaaiug  xe  Ttapd  aeo  xal  ro  ^eiYjv. 

(/3)  Of  an  object:— III.  568  ''Apyog  fiev 
Ttapd  vYjog  .  .  .  ar€X2.h^ii;  cf.  N  744,  H  28,  46, 
T  143;  y  431,  etc. 


k    < 


fi 


B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

(a)  Of  a  person: — ^I.  455  napd  Se  a^ici 
^ivpt  exeiro  eihara  xal  (ae^v  ylapor;  cf.  ©  504; 
X  9. — IV.  223  Ttdp  Se  ol  sy^og  .  .  .  reravvaro; 
cf.  Z  43,  4>  547;  v  387,  etc.  In  II.  503  TtporepoLai 
nap'  dv^pdaiv,  the  preposition  is  used  partly  in 
a  local  and  partly  in  a  temporal  sense. 

{(3)  Of  an  object  or  of  a  place: — I.  319 
'ApywT?  .  .  .  Ttapd  vyji  fihovreg;  similarly  I.  855; 
IV.  849,  1122.  Cf  A  329,  H  383,  0  345,  K  35, 
256,  etc. — I.  530  G^erepoiai  Ttap  evreaiv 
ibpiOGivro;  cf.  H  135. — I.  694  =  11.  61  Ttapd 
Ttocaiv;  cf  N  617,  0  280,  etc.  II.  309  Ttap 
kfxdpYi  Yiaro  yspaiog)  similarly  II.  158,  498; 
III.  1193.  Cf  0  562;  h  449,  ^  239,  385,  ^  71. 
— II.  868  ov^IfifipaaioiOL  Ttap'  vSaOiv'  AarvTtdXaLa 
rixre;  similarly  IV.  132,  973.  Cf.  A  475;  ^  97. 
— In  1. 458  Ttapd  Sairl  xal  olvo)  repTtvc^g  8^l/l6G)vro, 
the  idea  is  temporal  as  well  as  local.    Cf.  y  37. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

ApoUonius  has  no  instance  of  Ttapd  with 
a  person  in  the  accusative.  The  example  in 
III.  486  is  one  of  tmesis,  not  of  case-construc- 
tion. Homer,  however,  uses  occasionally  Ttapd 
with  a  person  in  the  accusative,  as  E  837, 
A  592,  2  143,  fl  169;  y  469,  5  51,  etc. 

The  uses  in  ApoUonius  are: 


—  192  — 


(a)  Of  motion  ^Ho",  ^^to  the  side  of":— 
I.  217  ayidv  .  .  .  Trapa  ^6ov  "E^ylvoio,  II.  906 
Ttapd  7tpo;j^od$  nora^olo  yjXv^ov.  II.  1003 
XaU(iG)v  Ttapd  yalav  Ixovto.  III.  1276  Ttapd 
X^l'^og  iXiaao^evov  norafiolo,  I V.  825  Ttapd  l^xvX- 
X>7$  OTvyepop  xev^f^iC^va  veea^at.     Cf.  0  220,  etc. 

{(3)  Of  motion  ''alongside  of':— I.  1279 
(popeovro  napal  UoOLSj^iov  dxpY^v.  11.  621  Ttapai 
Ei^vviSa  yalav  vyja  ,  ,  .  aevev,  II.  946  Ttapd 
novXvv  .  .  .  i^^avvov  .  .  .  |  aiyiaXov.  III.  1252 
xoij/e  Ttap'  ovpiaxov.  IV.  324  axdneUv  ndpa . .  . 
r^(id4^avro,  IV.  564  Ttapat  Kepxi;pai^  txoj/ro. 
IV.  787  Ttapd  XxiTiXy^g  axons'Kov  jiiyav  r^Si 
XdpvlSSiv  SsLvov  ipevyofievyjv  Sexerat  oSog,  i.  e. 
the  road  leads  alongside  of  S.  and  Ch.  Cf 
X  127. — IV.  1578  Ttapd  ;^epo'oi'  kpyo^evot 
i^vvsG^e,     Cf  A  166;  ^(  89,  etc. 

(y)  Of  direction  "towards"  or  ''upon": 

III.  445  o^fiara  .  .  .  Ttapd  ^iinapyjv  axo^evYi  .  .  . 
xaXvnrpr^v,     Cf  *  603. 

{h)  Of  extent  "alongside  of",  *^near":— 
I.  967  eladfiEvoL  Ttapd  ^Iva.  II.  502  e?u)g  ndpa 
Uyjveiolo  (i^Xa  vifisiv.  II.  507  At^vyjp  ivefiovro 
Ttapai  Mvprumov  alnog.  Cf  A  316,  B  522, 
711,  Z  34,  A  622,  M  313;  i  46,  etc. 

(e)  In  the  metaphoric  sense  "contrary  to": — 
III.  613  Ttap'  ahav,  with  which  compare  Ttapd 
UvafiLv  (N  787),  Ttapd  fiolpav  (^  509). 


193  — 


—  Ttept  — 

Akin  to  dfupi  in  meaning  and  in  case-construction 
is  Tre^oj  (Sanskrit /t£r/,  l,2Ltin  per).  The  as  never  elided. 

The  original  meaning  of  ^^^pt  has  been  the  subject 
of  quite  a  controversy.  Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn. 
I  Sec.  284  ;  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  hom.  Dial.,  p.  225- 
226. —  In  Apollonius,  as  in  Homer,  it  shows  the 
meanings  around^  and  above,  i.  e.  over  and  beyond,  as 
in  Tztp\  TzdvTwv^  above  all.  The  former  meaning  is 
generally  considered  the  original  one,  and  I  believe, 
correctly.  Secondary  meanings  are  :  about,  for,  con- 
cerning, on  account  of  and  the  like. 

The  most  distinctive  difference  between  epic  poetry 

and  the  other  departments  of  literature  is  that  in  the 

latter  the  use  of  T^spi  c.  dat.  practically  disappeared, 

except   in   two  sets  of  phrases ;  viz. ,    in   regard   to 

clothing  and    with  verbs  of  fear.     Even    in  these 

expressions  r.spi  was  not  used  much,  since  there  was 

a  tendency  for  the  accusative  to  encroach  upon  the 

first,  and  the  genitive  upon  the  second  usage.     From 

the  Orators  Lutz  (p.  125),  cites  only  one  example  to 

which,    however,    two  more  are  to  be  added;  viz., 

Ant.    V.    6   (i)    and   I^ys.  Frag.  52.     Aristophanes 

recognized  that  the  construction  was  Homeric,  as  is 

shown  by  his  parody  of  it,  apart  from  which  he  uses 

it  only   four  times.     Cf.    Sobolewski,  p.   207.     The 

examples  in  tragedy  are  few,  as  also  in  Thucydides 

and  Xenophon.     Poly  bins  has  only  one  example  of 

Its  pi  Q,  dat.  against  11 14  c.  gen.  and  1819  c.  ace. 

In  the  use  of  Tt^pi^  Apollonius  differs  from  Homer 

in  several  details,  as  will  be  indicated.     He  shows 

a  special  fondness  for  using  it  with  the  dative. 

Homer  has :        gen.     79,        dat.      85,        ace.      72. 
Apollonius  has :    "        19,  ••        31,  " 


10. 


-  194  — 

A.    WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
I.    IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE  ••AROUND,"  ••ABOUT". 

This  use  does  not  occur  in  prose  and  it  is 
rare  in  poetry.  Homer  has  only  two  cases  of 
it,  (f  63,  130)  and  ApoUonius  has  only  two:  II. 
1131    elXv^a    nspi   ;tH^;  cf*  II.  1191. 

J.    IN  THE  METAPHORIC  MEANINGS:  ••ON  ACCOUNT 
OF",  ••FOR",  CONCERNING",  ••ABOUT". 

a)   To  denote  the  object  of  contention. 

11.  141  fidpvavro  ciSyipofpopov   nepi  yairig; 

similarly  III.  1057;  IV.  1485,  1765,  1770.    Cf. 

M 170, P 157, 734, 2 265,  *437;  y403,(o515,etc. 

b)   To  denote  the  object  of  thought,  anxiety  or  fear, 

I.  901    kyik^Bv    nepL    ^v^ov    dpeiu  \  loxoiv\ 

III.  60  heihi^sv  .  .  .  Ttepi  h'  Alaovihao.     IV.  492 

vavTikiYig  . .  .Tftpt  ^Yitioaaxov)  also  I.  1342;  III. 

688;  IV.  1068,  1355.  Cf.  T  17,  ^P  553;  n  191,  etc. 

3.    IN  THE  SENSE  OF  SURPASSING:  ••ABOVE". 

I.  65  M64.o$,  ov  7i€pi  ndvrov  \  Ayiroi&yjq 
i^'Me;  similarly  I.  830;  II.  179;  III.  304,  585. 
Cf.  A  287,  417,  B831, 138,2  81;  >?  108, etc.  From 
this  usage  developed  expressions  like  nepi  nok- 
Xou  Ttotaa^at,  etc.,  which  abound  in  the  Orators. 

Examples  of  Ttept  c.  gen.  used  after  verbs 
of  saying  and  asking  (a  135,  405,  y  77;  o  347, 
etc.),  and  phrases  like  Ttept  yLv%^v,  "in  words" 
(0  284),  Ttepi  noii^v,  *4n  archery''  (^  225),  Ttspt 
Tivo$  slihai  (p  563),  nepi  nvog  dxovetv  (r  270), 
are  not  found  in  ApoUonius. 


fc»» 


—  I95-- 

B.    WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
I.    IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE:  ••AROUND". 

a  )    With  verbs  of  binding ,  faste7iing  or  putting  around, 

I.  379  Ttfpi  GxaX^olGiv  eSyjaav,  III.  1224 
nspl  [I8V  arrj^eaaiv  haro  ^6pyjxa;  cf.  also  1. 1020; 
II.  57,  160,  1251;  III.  867.  For  Homer  com- 
pare:  r  330,  332,  H  207,  0  43;   ^  528,  etc. 

b)    With  verbs  of  falling  upon,  or  arowid. 

II.  128  TiLTtrovra  Ttspi  a^iai.  II.  833 
[is^pvx^g  Ss  ^ou  Ttepi  xdnneae  hovpi  IV.  93 
nepi  yovvaai  nenryjvlav.     Cf  A  303,  0  86,  etc. 

c)    Wifh  verbs  of  whirli7ig  around, 

IV.  936  EiXiOQQvuo  'i\pyw>7  Ttfpi  vyi'l.  Cf. 
A  817,  X  97.  Also  with  the  accusative  in  IV. 
932,  1196,  1450.— IV.  1454  TOxpatT?  ^vvai 
Ttepi  TtihaxL  Stvaveaxov;  for  the  accusative  com- 
pare IV.  1642,  1664. —  Here  belongs  IV.  325 
axoTteXop . . .  c5  nspt  8yj  Gx't^idv  "larpog  poov. 

d)  Examples  ifi  which  the  idea  of  surrouyiding  jrom 
all  sides  is  especially  promiuefit, 
I.  389    nepi    U   G<pLV   aiSvYj    xrixie   Tiiyvvg-y 
similarly  II.  162,323,  1173;  III.  1019;  IV.  953. 
Cf  P  133,  ^V  598,  n  96,  etc. 

2.    IN  THE  HETAPHORIC  SENSE:  ••FOR",  **0N 

ACCOUNT  OF". 

a)    To  denote  the  object  of  contention. 
IV.  549  dypav'koiaiv  aks^o^evov  nepl  [Sovglp; 
cf.  n  568,  P  4,  133;  p  472.     In  IV.  1485  the 
genitive  is  used  in  the  same  sense. 


—  196  — 

^)  Of  a  negotiation, 
III. 904  Ttfpi  ^om\v  vnear^;  cf.  li.  Merc.  236. 
^r)  In  expressions  of  fear  and  anxiety. 

II.  875  Uoc,  Ttfpt  vYii,  III.  638  w^i  .  .  . 
^fiVcj  4)pevf$  ^fpe^ovrai.  IIL  1171  i^e?j)vro 
TtEpia^ioLV.     Cf.  K  240. 

d)  To  denote  the  object  about  which  anger  exists. 
1. 1340-1342  oi  Ttept  Ttwedi  \Lriki^v,\  ov  be  nepi 
xredreaOL  x^Tie^d^evog  (leviyivag,  \  olTlX  irdpov 
nspl  ^Gytog.  IV.  614  ;^6)6|Mfro$  nepi  naiSL  Cf.h. 
Cer.  77.  This  use  is  post-Homeric;  cf.  Delbrueck, 
Vergl.  Syn.  Vol.  I.  p.  712. 

e)    With  a  verb  of  asking, 

III.  1155  nepi  Ttaioiv  . . .  ipeBivev.  Cf  dii^i 
c.  dat.  in  5  151,  e  287;  etc. 

/)    To  denote  the  inner  catise. 

III.  865  ear  eve . . .  bhvvri  nepi.  IV.  440  nepi 
yoLo  (iiv  dvdyxYi  .  .  .  hoaav  ^eivoiciv  ayec^ai. 
Homer  has  no  close  parallel,  but  cf  h.  Cer.  429 
bpenoiiYjv  nepi  xdpfiari  [dv^ea];  also  Pind.  Pyth. 
V.  58;  Aesch.  Pers.  696.  Choe.  35.  Noteworthy 
is  III.  1257  Ttfpi  a^im  (P  22). 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
ONLY  LOCAL  IN  APOLLONIUS  AS  IN  HOMER: 

a)    With  verbs  of  motion^  chiefly  eUifftrw  and  dtvebm, 

IV.  932  heT^qTiveq  .  .  .  eXicduvtai  nepi  v^a; 
similarly  III.  1218;  IV.  1196,  1450.— IV.  1642 
nepi  .  .  .  Kpriryjv  . . .  Sivevovta;  cf.  IV.  1664. — 
I.  538  nepi  /3u)|u6v  .  .  .  nebov  priacGiaL  nofieaaiv, 
Cf.  A  448,  M  297;  5  368,  £  308,  g>  69,  etc.  Un- 
Homeric  seems  to  be  IV.  436  3€a$  nepi  vyiov 
ix>7Tai,i.e.  to  <  the  neighborhood  of>  the  temple. 


.jf'" 


—   197   — 

b)    With  verbs  of  rest. 
III.  216  [xtoi^e^]  nepi  rot^ovg  e^eiyjg  avex^ov, 
IV.  321  nepi  Aavpiov  .  .  .  vaLerdovteg.  Cf.  B  757, 
M  177,  2  374;  t  402. 

—  npog  — 

Homer  uses  rrpo^  327  times  in  case-construction. 
ApoUonius  has  it  only  13  times.  Like  the  later 
Homeric  imitators,  he  shows  a  preference  for  the 
poetic  form  nori^  which  he  uses  7  times,  against  2 
examples  of  the  other  poetic  form  Trport  and  4  ex- 
amples (with  cases)  of  the  common  form  np6^, 
Cf.  La  Roche,  Wiener  Studien,  XXII.,  p.  49. —  In 
Homer  t:ot{  and  Trport  are  about  equal  in  number,  and 
the  two  together  amount  to  a  little  above  one  half 
of  7tp6^,  ApoUonius  did  not  use  r:p6>^  with  the  dative. 
With  the  genitive  he  has  it  only  in  entreaties  (three 
times),  and  with  the  accusative  only  in  the  local 
sense,  except  I.  684  (temp.).  The  Homeric  examples 
of  TT/xi?  c.  ace.  with  verbs  of  speaking,  and  in  the 
hostile  sense  "against",  were  too  common  in  prose 
to  be  imitated  by  ApoUonius.     His  uses  of  T^po^  are : 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
In  entreaties: — II.  215  'hsfftou  rrpd^  Ztjvo^  . . .  Xtffffofiat; 
similarly  II.  1125;  III  984.     Cf.  A  339;  v  324,  etc. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE:  "TO"  "TOWARDS"  "UPON". 

I.  774  ^r^  5'  ifisvai  TtpoTi  d(TTu;  similarly  II.  8;  III. 
322,  1154;  IV.  595,  1 1 16,  1399.  Cf.  rii6,  J  108, 
-^41;  /?  342,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  8. 

More  noteworthy  are  the  examples  denoting,  (a) 
the  extent   "up  to*   or   "as  far  as":  II.  807  ^ort 
(TTOfia  SepfiwdovTo^;  and  (b)  the  direction  "towards**: 
IV.  311  TToTt  poov  [dvi^stv],     Cf.  E  605;  At  81,  etc. 
2.    IN  A  TEHPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  684  ffTuyepov  TtoT\  yrjpa<^j  for  which  there  is  but 
one  example  in  Homer;  viz.  /o  191  noT\  ^(rnepa. 


li. 


—    igg  — 


11 ! 


It  i 


c        / 
VTtO 


Form: — Morphologically  otto  is  connected  with 
Sanskrit  lipa  and  Latin  s-2ib.  The  poetic  form 
oTzai  occurs  seven  times  in  Apollonius,  but  only  four 
times  in  Homer. 

Meaning: — As  appears  from  the  adverbial  use, 
the  primary  meaning  of  07:0  is  under.  In  case-con- 
struction this  meaning  is  modified  to  denote  a)  with 
the  genitive:  motion/rom  under  or  place  under \  b) 
with  the  dative :  position  under\  c)  with  the  accu- 
sative :  aim,  direction  or  motion  towards  and  imder, 
or  extension  under. — The  metaphoric  usages  to 
denote  the  author,  the  cause,  the  occasion,  the  accorn- 
paniment,  the  instrument,  the  means  and  the  like 
are  developments  from  the  original  ujider,  in  a  local 
sense.  The  most  characteristic  epic  feature  of  (>tJ>  is 
its  use  with  the  dative  to  denote  the  agent,  in  place 
of  ^Tto  with  the  genitive.  Since  in  prose  orJt  c.  gen. 
predominates  (Orators:  gen.  1294,  dat.  63,  ace.  26), 
Apollonius  used  it  only  thirteen  times  with  this  case, 
and  in  these  thirteen  examples  we  find,  as  a  further 
offset  to  prose,  the  form  l>T.ai  six  times.  Noteworthy 
is  also  the  post- Homeric  ^'>r.o  vozn' (at  night),  which 
seems  to  have  started  with  Aesch.  Ag.  1030  '^tto  axtrnp . 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE. 

(a)    Motion   "away  from   under": — I.  10 

\nkhikov\  i^ecdwafv  W  Vkmc,,  P  235;  h  39,  etc. 
(/3)  Place ''under": — 11.106  Imoank^voio... 
7tA)7^f.  II.  667  o^ftara  Se  a<pLv  \  Ao^d  napa- 
arpofp^vrat  imo  ^vyov.  II.  743  tzovtolo  3'  hno 
orevEL  r^x^evrog,  IV.  1611  vnai  Xayorwr; 
similarly  IV.  1644  I'Ttai  .  .  .  revovrog,  "under 
the  tendon".     Cf.  A  106,  A  14,  <&  15,  etc. 


K:f 


<T 


Ui 


*«#■ 


—   199  — 

2.  IN  A  METAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  The  agent: — IV.  641  naTuvrponocdvro 
^ecLg  VTtO]  similarly  II.  847  Movaecdv  vtw 
yyjpvaaa^ai,     Cf.  11  434;  r  114,  etc. 

(/?)  The  cause:— II.  1232  vTtal  I)i7t^g 
av^wioreivsro',  also  III.  969.  Cf.A423,T358,etc. 

(y)  The  accompaniment: — 1. 538  (pop^iyyog 
vTtai^  ''to  the  accompaniment  of  the  lyre"; 
similarly  IV.  1157,  1192.  Cf.  0  275,  2  492;  also 
h.  XIX.  15;    Hes.  Sc.  278;  Arist.  Ach.  1001. 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE: 

(a)  Of  rest  or  position:  "under"  or  "in": — 

I.  388  vno  rponi^L  .  .  .  arevdxovro  ^dTiayyeg; 
cf.  also  I.  544,  956,  957, 1262;  II  681,  707,  732, 
797, 1086;  III.  39, 119, 221,  287,  296,  371, 1023; 
IV.  137, 313,  676, 765, 922, 944, 982, 1107, 1528. 
For  Homer  compare  B  307,  A  44,  P  371,  etc. 

{(i)  Of  motion  implying  subsequent  rest 
(constructio  praegnans).  II.  512  Xelpcdvog  W 
avrpotaLV  xo^hc^ar,  cf.  Ill  281,  IV.  1261, 1522; 
Homer  X  482;  5  297,  etc. 

a.    IN  A  HEfAPHORlC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)   The  agent, 
I.  794  vii  Q,vhpd(5i  vaierai  darv,  cf.  further 

II.  783;  III.  469,  1342;  IV.  1398,  1758;  Homer 
E  646;  y  235,  305,  etc. — Here  belongs  II.  788 
ifiu  vno  Ttarol  haiiaaoev  xal  ^pvyag ;  cf.  Z  453. 


i\ 


Y 


200 


b)  The  causey  instrument  or  means, 
1. 114  uTt'  sipeaiYiatv  inEipi^aavro  ^aXdaGYjg; 
cf.  II.  586. — ^I.  272  vTto  (ii^rpviri  ^iorov  (Sapvv 
riyyiXd^€L.  1. 815  iiyjtpvi^g  vno  x^p^^^  draa^dlov; 
cf.  1. 1303;  III.  1226;  IV.  1369.— 1. 1308  xivvrai 
Ttx^i^vrog  vno  nvoiii  (3opeao;  cf.  II.  727. — II.  26 
&ar€  Xeqv  i)7i'  dxovtL  rerv^fihog,  II.  117  5y?G>(T- 
eo^ai  vno  ^i(p8t;  similarly  vno  Sovpi  II.  139;  III. 
416,  1186,  1329,  vno  ^ovpaai  111.321,1374;  i^Tto 
axT^nrpom  III.  353,  395;  IV.  1176.— II.  1013 
rexcdvrai  vn  dvSpdat  rexva  yvvdixeg]  cf.  B714, 
728, 742, 820,  etc.  II.  1109  ^epov^'  vno  xv^aatv. 
IV.  269  norafjtog  . . .  q  vno  ndaa  \  ap^erai  'Hfpt>7. 
IV.  1733  apSea^t  Xevx^iciv  irTtai  Xi^dbeaai.  Cf 
B  374,  r  352,  A  291,  E  555,  653,  Z  139,  A  433, 
N  590,  11384;  r  81,  etc.  Examples  of  the  imier 
cause  are:  I.  7=11.  1112, 1169  vn  ivveaiYiaL;  cf 
h.  Cer.  39.  The  simple  dative  occurs  in  I.  956; 
III.  29,  478,  818,  942;  IV.  644,  772, 1443,  etc.— 
1. 263  oTioo)  vno  yyjpa.  1. 443 arvyepii  vno  hai^ovog 
aXciYi,    II.  71  vno  .  .  .  ihpsiri.    II.  558  I'Tt'  dvidyri, 

II.  1059  drvi^Yi^Ci  vno  Sei^arr,  cf  IV.  53, 1009.— 

III.  3  vn  lp6)Tt;  cf  IV.  567;  also  III.  971  ^^ey- 
^aa^at  vno  nvoiiiaiv  "Eporog. — III.  702  xaxij 
vno  xYipi,  IV.  193  xovpYig  vno  Syjveai.  Cf.  N  667; 
a  136,  etc.     Also  Eurip.  Med.  8. 

c)    The  accompaniment, 
I.  540  vn  'Op^YJog  xi^dpYi.    Homer  has  no 
example  of  the  accompaniment  of  a  musical 


4     » 


-^Tt;.'    » 


\ 


l\ 


\) 


-  ♦» 


201    


instrument;  but  compare  the  examples  of  the 

attendant  circumstances  in  Z  171;  S  402,  yj  193, 

etc.  For  a  closer  parallel  compare  Hes.  Sc.  283. 

d)   The  time.      This  use  is  post- Homeric. 

I.  1022,  1038;  III.  323,  1360;  IV.  1682 
vno  vvxri;  cf  Aesch.  Ag.  1030. 

A.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

I.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Motion  or  aim  ^'towards  or  under. ^' 

II.  113  vno  ^(dvyjv  ^ope  ;KOt^^o$;  cf  also  II. 
587;  III.  1321,  1368,  IV.  1062.  Cf  E  67, 0  271; 
V  578,  etc,  A  figurative  local  sense  is  seen  in 
I.  452  SeleXlvov  xXivovrog  vno  (o^ov  rETiioio;  cf. 
*  51;  X  191,  etc.  Without  Homeric  parallels 
are:  III.  288  ^dX^Ev  vn'  kiaovihyiv  d^apvynara. 

III.  675  vno  ippEvag  Ixeto  nh^g;  cf  III.  1403. — 

IV.  39  Ehiv  .  .  .  ;ta/le7ta$  vno  ;t€lpa$  dvdaaYjg. 
b)  Position  ''under''  or  ''in'';  like  ^tzo  c.  dat. 

I.  50  \Li\ivEv  vno  axorLYjv  opEog.  I.  509  vacEa- 
XEV  vn6  aniog;  cf  I.  102;  II.  371,  570,1236;  III. 
278, 762;  IV.  1474.    Homer  e  B  603;  co  234,  etc. 

a.    IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  587, 1186;  II.  1034;  IV.  590  vno  xvE^g, 
"toward  dusk''.  1.1160  vno  SeleXov,  "toward 
evening '.  II.  1122;  IV.  458  vvx^'  vno  XvyaiYjv. 
Cf  n  202,  X  102  (the  only  examples  in  Homer); 
also  Arist.  Ach.  139,  1076;  Xen.  Ana.  II.  2, 14 
and  IV.  5,  9. 


202  — 


CHAPTER  VI. 


I 


PREPOSITIONS    IN    ADVERBIAL 

PHRASES. 

As  a  supplement  to  the  prepositions  in  case- construction 
may  be  regarded  the  prepositions  in  adverbial  phrases,  where 
the  adverb  assumes  the  nature  of  a  substantive.  Cf.  Kriiger- 
Pokel,  P.  I.,  Sec.  66,  A.  3-4 ;  P.  II.,  Sec.  66,  A.  1-2. 

The  following  examples  occur  in  Apollonius : 

With  lirC :  —  I.  516;  IV.  728  iiri  S-ffv.  According  to  Ruther- 
ford, New  Phrynichus.  p.  121,  iirl  8^v  is  an  ^*  unintellii^ent^^ 
imitation  of  the  Homeric  iirl  Srjpdu  ( !  ?  ).  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
^iri  5t7/j6i' occurs  only  once  in  Homer  (I  415),  but  seven  times 
in  Apollonius  (I.  615,  870,  1072  ;  II.  519,  759;  III.  949,  1048.) 
—  I-  ^359;  IV.  I $27  iirl  tvt66v.  III.  II45;  IV.  i $16  ivl  r6(r<rov; 
cf  r  12  ;  €  251.  "IV.  1335  iiri  ^laKpbv  :  cf  6  160 ;  {  117.— II.  942 
iwl  Trporiptixre.  I.  661  iwlvoWSp;  cf.  II.  439  xepiiroWdv. —  More 
interesting  is  II.  428  iiri  5i  <rx€56i',  which  evidently  is  tmesis  for 
^t-<rx€36K  (II.  492,  606;  IV.  1108,  1 185,  1348,  etc).  Compare 
8td  5'  dfiirepis  (A  377.  P  309;  0  422  )  for  Si-afjurepis ;  iK  5'  dvofxa- 
*cXiJ5i;v  (  5  278  )  for  i^-ovofiaKXifiSTjv ;  5id  5'  dvStxo  (  Hes.  Op.  13) 
for  didvSixa.  In  this  connection  may  be  mentioned  a  very 
curious  example  from  Apollonius  ;  viz.,  III.  700<nJi'  re  bpiicrreipa 
wi\€<r$at^  where  the  scholiast  takes  <rip  in  tmesis  with  the  noun 
and  explains  (rvv-dp-j^trreipa  by  iTvv-€py6s  **  co-helper."* 

With  lie:  — I.  1078;  II.  533;  IV.  623  iK  Si  rbdiv,  cf.  IV  431 
iiiri  Kilvov^  i^  o5  and  the  Homeric  ^^^t  toO^  ire  (  I  106  ). 

Withtls:  — I.  1 138  ^pSev  is  aUi;  II.  718  €ts  aliv.  Cf.  Aesch. 
Pro.  732,   Eum.  836;  Soph.  Aj.  570. —  IV.    1313  e/j  iripoxre. 

Withji«TA:  —  I.  624  pxB'  (xrTepovy  cf.  h.  Merc.  126;  also  ^5 
li<rT€pop{fi  126).  II.  653  ov  furit.  StiBA;  II.  451,  881,  1288;  III. 
955  ov  pjirh,  St}p6p,  with  which  compare  the  synonymous  phrase 
dijpdp   3'  oiJ  fjxriweiTa  {11.  1 259;  III.   1329 ;  also  3319;  ^519). 

•  Cf.  p.  48. 


—  203  — 


With&ird:  — II.  192;  IV.    1090,    II72    dirb  tv\ov,     Cf.    t  I17. 
'A7r6  TTjXov  might  also  be  written  as  one  word ;  cf  Kar'  avrbdi    nd 
KaTavrbdi.  This  last  word  deserves  special  attention  on  account 
of  Rutherford's  note  in  the  New   Phrynichus,   p.  121 ;  viz. 
"Any  freak  of  diction  may  be  expected  in  a  writer  like  Ap. 
Rh  ,    who  at   an   age,    when   Greek    had    already    lost    all 
its  great  qualities,  attempted  to  write  in  an  old  style  which  he 
little  understood.     He  naturally  makes  even  more  blunders 
than  are  found  in  modern  attempts  to  imitate  classical  styles, 
and  by  misunderstanding  the  facts  of  tmesis  in  Homer  has 
been  led  to  use  many  forms  intrinsically  absurd.     In  II.   X. 
273  iSav  f>'  iivai,  Xnririjp  Si  /car'  avrddi  irdPTas  apicrrovs,  the  Kard  be- 
longs to  Xiirirrip,  but  in   Apollonius  Karavrddi  unblushingly 
takes  the  place  of  the  simple  a^rSdi;  cf.  II.  778."     That  this 
criticism  is  unmerited,  the  Argonautica  itself  is  the  best  proof. 
The   fact  that  in  six  passages  Kar'  has  to  be  taken  with  oiJt6^i, 
written  also  Karavrddi*  is  not  so  bad  as  Rutherford  tried  to 
make  it.     In   Homer  we  have  a  good  parallel  in  4^  147  irap' 
avrddi  fxrjy  lepeixreLP  ii  irriyd^,  where  irap'  cau  hardly  be  in  tmesis 
with  the  verb,  but  it  is  to  be  taken  with  the  adverb,  or  rather 
it  itself  is  adverbial,  emphasizing  the  other  adverb  airroSi,  with 
which  later  it  blends  into  one  word.     Moreover,  that   Apol- 
lonius recognized   Kard  to  be  in  tmesis  in  K  273,  seems  to 
appear  from  his  own  examples,   in  which  Kard  is  in  tmesis 
with  the  verb,  although  standing  immediately  before  airrbdi  { I. 
1356;  II.  894  ;  III.  648,  888;  IV.  298),  abSc  (  I.  1079;  II.  530  ) 
or  airroO  (  I.  565 ). 

That  differences  in  the  diction  of  Apollonius  and  Homer  exist 
is  quite  natural.  There  are  stylistic  differences,  and  great  ones 
at  that,  even  in  the  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  as  they  are  in  the  early 
and  late  writings  of  every  individual  writer.  Hence  it  should 
not  l)e  surprising  if  an  imitative  writer  does  not  reproduce  his 
model  perfectly.  Apollonius,  imbued  with  the  spirit  of  his 
contemporaries,  was  a  scholar  rather  than  a  poet,  and  in  ti:e 
field  of  Homeric  studies  he  produced  undoubtedly  the  most 
creditable  work  of  his  age. 


•  Cf.  p.  28. 


—  204  — 


CONCLUSION. 


The  purpose  of  this  thesis  has  been  to  show  how 
closely  Apollonius  reproduced  the  Homeric  usages  of 
the  prepositions.  The  investigation  proved  to  be  a 
source  of  constantly  growing  interest  on  account  of 
the  striking  similarities  in  the  two  writers  on  the 
whole  and  the  intentional  differences  or  deviations 
of  the  latter  from  the  former  in  detail.  It  is  indeed 
astonishing  to  find  a  writer  of  the  Alexandrian  Epos 
so  well  versed  in  the  Homeric  idiom  with  all  its 
peculiarities  of  form  and  meaning,  without  the  aid  of 
a  Gehring  or  Ebeling ;  but  still  more  surprising  is  it 
that  Apollonius,  after  having  thoroughly  mastered 
the  Homeric  language,  did  not  remain  a  slavish 
imitator.  His  aim  in  telling  the  often- told  story  of 
the  Argonauts  was  not  to  make  a  cento.  It  was 
rather  to  write  a  poem  that  should  be  epic  in  coloring, 
but  at  the  same  time  intelligible  to  his  readers  and  in 
keeping  with  their  taste.  This  demanded  judicious 
selection.  Forms,  uses  and  words  that  would  seem 
too  strange,  and  were  of  so  rare  occurrence  in  Homer 
as  scarcely  to  merit  the  name  of  being  Homeric,  had 
to  be  discarded ;  others  had  to  be  avoided  because, 
being  adopted  into  the  later  language,  they  had 
become  too  prosaic  for  the  elevated  diction  of  epic 
poetry.  The  others  were  to  be  imitated  with  the 
risk  of  going  to  excess.  That  Apollonius  should  keep 
here  a  perfect  equilibrium  would  be  expecting  too 
much.  That  things  inconsistant  with  Homeric  usage, 
and  even  incongruous  in  the  eyes  of  one  who  knows 
the  history  of  Greek  Syntax  should  occasionally  occur 
was  unavoidable  ;  but  I  hope  to  have  shown  in  this 
thesis  that  Apollonius  is  far  from  deserving  what 
Rutherford  says  of  him  in  the  New  Phrynichus,  p. 
121.  Separated,  though  he  was,  from  Homer  by 
a  long  line  of  eminent  writers,  who  mark  so  many 
stages  in  the  evolution  of  the  Greek  language,— stand- 
ing altogether  outside  of  the  period  of  the  Classic 


i      "** 


—  205  — 

Literature  of  the  Greeks,  and  living  in  Alexandria, 
when  that  city  had  become  the  centre  of  a  new  kind 
of  literary  activity,  viz.,  that  of  imitation  and  artifi- 
ciality  rather   than  of  invention   and   originality, — 
Apollonius  admirably  acquitted  himself  of  his  task  by 
reflecting  the  Homeric  diction.     The  Argonautica  is 
a  masterpiece  of  systematic  industry,  even  though  it 
lacks  the  quickening  spark  of  the  genius  of  Homer ; 
and  it  fully  shows  that  the  Homeric  language  was 
under  his  discerning  eye  not  petrified  or  dead  ;  but 
w^as  living,  organic,   capable  of  further  development 
and  productive  of  new  words.     It  is   this   quality, 
more  than   anything  else,   that  gives  the  work  of 
Apollonius   the  stamp   of  a  strong  personality,   and 
makes  it  especially  interesting  from  a  linguistic  point 
of  view.     If  Apollonius  had  not  understood  his  proto- 
type. Homer,  we  should  expect  to  find  in  his  work  a 
strange  mixture  of  poetic  and  prosaic  usages.     The 
Argonautica,  however,  testifies  to  a  clear  conception 
of   purely    poetic    and    prosaic    constructions.      In 
general,  the  prepositions  which  are  less  frequent  in 
Apollonius  than  in  Homer  are  prosaic;  e.  g.  xara  izapd^ 
Tzpd,  7r/)09.     With  the  utmost  care  Apollonius  avoided 
also  those  particular  usages  of  prepositions  that  were 
essentially  prosaic.     Thus  ti^rd  with  the  genitive  is 
entirely   absent   from  the  Argonautica ;  -/><>?  is  rare 
(not   once   with   the   dative);  and   no   trace   of  the 
articular  infinitive  with   prepositions  is  found.     On 
the  other  hand,  the  more  poetic  prepositions,  as  «/xf «', 
dvd^  am^  and  also  the  double  prepositions  StU,  Ttapix 
and  07:ix  are  comparatively  frequent  in  Apollonius. 
Likewise  he  uses  er?  with  the  person  in  the  singular 
and  fJLsrd  c.  ace.  in  the  same  usage  more  frequently 
than   Homer.     Also  post  position  and  the  adverbial 
use  of  prepositions  gain  in  the  Argonautica. 


—  2o6  — 

SYNOPTIC  TABI^K  OF  AI,!,  THE  USES  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 

IN  APOLLONIUS. 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

Total. 

Adverbial. 

In  Tmesi". 

With  Cases 

In  Ad.  Phr. 

dlJ.<pl 

20 

7 

69 

0 

96 

aua 

0 

28 

r>5 

0 

83 

dvTl 

0 

0 

3 

0 

3 

dw6 

0 

21 

69 

3 

93 

did 

0 

11 

(d5 

0 

76 

6iV 

0 

3 

165 

3 

171 

iK 

0 

31 

163 

4 

198 

ip 

15 

17 

298 

0 

330 

iiri 

1 

36 

292 

17 

352 

Kard 

0 

Ift 

88 

0 

107 

fierd 

14 

4 

83 

6 

107 

■wafd. 

2 

5 

40 

0 

47 

wepi 

23 

9 

60 

0 

92 

Trpb 

7 

0 

2 

0 

9 

Tp6i 

4 

1 

13 

0 

18 

a6p 

10 

7 

65 

0 

82 

inrip 

0 

2 

44 

0 

46 

xmb 

0 

0 

119 

0 

119 

diroTrpb 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

8l4k 

0 

1 

21 

0 

22 

Siavpo 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

iirnrpd 

11 

0 

0 

0 

11 

wapiK 

5 

1 

11 

0 

17 

irepiir/>6 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

Trp6irap 

0 

0 

2 

0 

2 

vpoTTph 

2 

0 

1 

0 

3 

inriK 

0 

1 

13 

0 

14 

inr€Kirp6 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

inroTTpb 

0 

0 

1 

0 

1 

f  'Tcpf  r' 

\  dlX<f>i  T€ 

2 

0 

1 

0 

3 

Total. 

124 

205 

1743 

33 

2105 

I    '1 


If  we  include  in  this  list  the  five  examples  in 
which  the  preposition  is  used  in  a  pregnant  sense, 
i.  e.  as  a  compound  verb  («va  IV.  i322,«i'  I.  494  and 
Ttdpa  IV.  1260,  1272,  1553)  we  have  in  all  21 10 
prepositions  in  the  Argonautica. 


^■^^ 


-  207  — 

INDEX. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 5 

PREFACE 9 

INTRODUCTION n 

CHAPTER  I.:— The  Improper  or  Pseudo-Prepositions. . .   17 

A.  With  the  Genitive 20 

B.  With  the  Dative. 32 

C.  Witu  the  Accusative 33 

D.  With  the  Genitive  and  Dative •  34 

E.  With  the  Genitive  and  Accusative 35 

CHAPTER  II.:— Prepositions  Used  as  Adverbs 37 

Table  Showing  their  Frequency  in  Apol.  and  in  Homer.  38 

dfji4.( 39 

Siairpd 40 

kv 40 

IfieL 41 

4iriirp6 42 

|i.€Td 42 

irapd,  irap^K 43 

ir£p( 44 

ircpC  T  d(ji<)>C  T€ 45 

«nr€piirp6,  irpd,  irpoirpi    4^ 

irp6s 47 

triiv 47 

Prepositions  Equivalent  to  Compound  Verbs 49 

CHAPTER  III.:— Prepositions  Used  in  Tmesis 51 

Table  Siiowing  their  Frequency  in  Apol.  and  in  Homer  59 

djt^C 60 

dvd 61 

dir6 63 

8id 65 

8Uk 66 

4v. 70 

hti 71 

fls 73 

Kard 73 

ficrd 75 

irapd,  irap^K 7^ 

ircpt 76 

irp6s 77 

orvv 77 

{t-nip 78 

Mk 78 

vir€Kirp6 79 

Summary  of  Prepositions  in  Tmesis 79 


—  208 


CHAPTER  IV.:— Why  Prepositions   in    Case-Con- 
struction are  Rarer  in  Poetry  than  in  Prose 8l 

A.  SIMPLE  CASES  TO  EXPRESS  I.OCAI.  RBI^ATIONS 82 

i)  Local  Genitive 82 

2)  Ablatival  Genitive 83 

3)  Locative  Dative 87 

4)  The  Accusative  of  the  Goal 89 

B.  SUFFIXES     -0€V     AND     -Si     TO     EXPRESS     I,OCAI, 

REI.ATIONS 91 

i)  Forms  in  -Ofv 9^ 

2)  Forms  in  -St 92 

CHAPTER  v.: —Prepositions  in  Case-Construction 95 

General  Tables  of  Statistics 97 

I.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE I05 

A.  With  the  Genitive 105 

&vtC 105 

av6 106 

Ik no 

irpo,  irpiiirap,  irpotrp^i  viroirp6 1 19 

vir^K 120 

B.  With  the  Dative 121 

Iv 121 

<rvv 136 

C.  With  the  Accusative 139 

els  . .  .^ 139 

irtpC  T  &^(^C  Ti 147 

II.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO  CASES  (Gen.  and  Ace) 148 

8id 148 

SUk 151 

Kard 152 

irap^K 157 

vvip 158 

in.    PROPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES 161 

&|Ji4»( 161 

&vd 166 

lirC 1 70 

jurd 185 

wapd 189 

irfp( 193 

irpds 197 

vir6 198 

CHAPTER  VI.:— Prepositions  in  Adverbial  Phra-es 202 

CONCLUSION 204 

TABI^B  OF  AIX  THE  PREPOSITIONS  IN  APOI,I,ONIUS .  .206 


X 


^* 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY 


0032206437 


/ 


f Ill 


o 
o 


^i;::^^ 


1^ 

t 
00  O 

00  o 


/ 


i 


■.iq 
•f'i 


4"  [: 


-5.  *■ 


f  ■■  'I  . 


i-  >'l 


M 


!aJ>i' 


S  v.. 


